JP7268885B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachislot machines and pachinko machines.

A conventional game machine has been proposed in which the player can select the content of the effect to be executed during a special game state (for example, a bonus game) that is advantageous to the player by selecting a character of his or her choice. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-148810 A

By the way, in such a game machine, various kinds of special game states can be provided, and specifications such as start timing and timing are also diversified. For this reason, depending on the type of special game state, the player may not be able to smoothly select an effect, and there is a possibility that the interest in the effect may decrease.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of increasing interest in presentation.

In order to achieve the above object, the present embodiment can provide a gaming machine configured as follows.

a variable display means (for example, a variable display unit) capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns in a plurality of columns;
internal winning combination determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs internal lottery processing) that determines an internal winning combination;
stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) for stopping the variable display of symbols in accordance with the determined internal winning combination and the player's stop operation;
Has a first information game state (for example, RB state in the second game machine) and a second information game state (for example, AT state in the second game machine) in which information on the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified Then, information game state control means (for example, the second 2 main CPU 101) for controlling each game state in the gaming machine;
Production execution means (for example, production display unit) for executing production,
A performance operation means (for example, a performance button) capable of accepting a player's performance operation related to the performance executed by the performance execution means,
The first information game state is a special control (for example, lock middle white BAR uniform effect) that can display a special symbol combination on the variable display means after the start operation of the next game of the game in which the predetermined condition is established is performed. ) is executed, and
The production executing means is
In the game in which the special control is executed, after the special symbol combination is displayed on the variable display means, an effect mode (for example, an announcement type) during the first information game state is selected from a plurality of effect modes. It is possible to execute a selection effect to make
After executing the selection effect, when one effect mode is selected by the player's effect operation, a result effect indicating the selection result of the effect mode is executed in the game, and the selected game is selected from the game next to the game. A predetermined effect corresponding to the effect mode can be executed during the first information game state,
The first information game state includes a first control state (for example, RB state not promoted to BB state) and a second control state (for example, BB state) that is more advantageous than the first control state,
The information game state control means can determine whether or not to shift to the second control state during the first control state, and when the state shifts to the second control state, the specific condition is established. , the gaming machine is characterized in that it can be controlled to the second information game state in accordance with the end of the second control state.

According to the gaming machine with the above configuration, it is possible to enhance the interest in the presentation.

It is a figure which shows the external structure of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a game machine according to this embodiment; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the function flow of the gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the playability of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the mode of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various tables of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various tables of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a correspondence relationship between an internal winning combination, a stop operation mode, a display combination, etc., of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; It is a figure for demonstrating the limit process of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of the winning flag storage area, winning operation flag storage area, and symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the carryover combination storage area|region of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of a game state flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; It is a diagram showing the configuration of the mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the operation|movement stop button storage area|region of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of the pressing order storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing power-on processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing medal acceptance/start check processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing internal lottery processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing a game start state control process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; It is a flow chart showing processing at the start of a game during an advantageous section, which is executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing reel stop control processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing a game end state control process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing at the end of a game during an advantageous section, which is executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing regular interruption processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing an overview of sub-side control processing executed by the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment; It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a medalless gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the main-control board of the game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the playability of the 2nd gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the playability of the 2nd gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the playability of the 2nd gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the playability of the 2nd gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the playability of the 2nd gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the playability of the 2nd gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various tables of the 2nd gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various tables of the 2nd gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various tables of the 2nd gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various tables of the 2nd gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various tables of the 2nd gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table of the 2nd gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table of the 2nd gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the symbol combination of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 2nd gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 2nd gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 2nd gaming machine based on this embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, the display combination, etc. of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, the display combination, etc. of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment; It is a diagram for explaining the instruction monitor of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the instruction monitor of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the lock effect|action of the 2nd gaming machine based on this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a start effect executed when the RB state of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment is started; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a start effect executed when the RB state of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment is started; FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the pressing order history display of the second gaming machine according to the present embodiment;

A gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachislot machine will be described as an example of a game machine.

[1. Structure of pachislot machine]
First, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 shows the external structure of the pachi-slot machine 1, and FIG. 2 shows the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. Also, for convenience of explanation, the following description of the external structure may include a portion of the internal structure, and the description of the internal structure may include a portion of the external structure.

[1-1. External structure]
[1-1-1. Housing]
A pachi-slot machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2 . The housing 2 includes a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as a game machine main body, an upper door mechanism UD arranged in the upper front part of the cabinet G, and a lower front part of the cabinet G. and a lower door mechanism DD.

The cabinet G has an intermediate support plate G1, a pair of left and right side walls G2, a rear wall G3, a top wall G4, and a bottom wall G5. In addition, in FIG.1 and FIG.2, illustration of the back wall G3 and the bottom wall G5 is abbreviate|omitted. In addition, two openings G4a are formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction. A wooden plate member G4b is attached to the top wall G4 so as to block the two openings G4a.

The plate member G4b is used to fix the pachi-slot machine 1 to a game island (not shown) when it is installed in the amusement arcade. or integrally formed with the top wall G4. Moreover, as long as a certain strength is ensured for the cabinet G, a part or all of each component can be made of wood or resin material.

Inside the cabinet G, an upper opening G101 is formed that opens forward with the intermediate support plate G1 interposed therebetween. A side opening G102 is formed. That is, the interior of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space with an intermediate support plate G1 interposed therebetween, and the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that partitions the interior of the cabinet G into the upper space and the lower space. there is The upper space is a space on the rear side of the upper door mechanism UD inside the cabinet G, and accommodates a main display device 210 and the like, which will be described later. The lower space is a space on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD inside the cabinet G, and accommodates a reel unit RU, a main control board 71, and the like, which will be described later.

Note that the cabinet G does not necessarily have to include the intermediate support plate G1. That is, as long as each device and the like can be properly accommodated in the cabinet G, the upper space and the lower space may not be partitioned. Further, the cabinet G can be simply referred to as a "box" or "main body", and functions as a frame for supporting or fixing the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD. It can also be referred to as a "support", "support frame", or "fixed frame".

[1-1-2. front door]
The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G, and are provided so as to be able to block the upper and lower spaces of the opening in the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. That is, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD function as front doors provided on the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1 .

Each of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD is attached to the cabinet G so as to be openable and closable, for example, by an opening/closing mechanism (not shown) such as a hinge provided on the left side wall G2. Either one of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can be opened and closed by the opening/closing mechanism described above, and the other can be attached and detached only when one of the door mechanisms is in an open state. can also

The upper door mechanism UD has an effect display window UD1 provided at its center and an upper lamp 23 provided above the effect display window UD1. The effect display window UD1 is configured as, for example, a transparent panel made of resin, and enables visual recognition of the effect image displayed on the screen device C constituting the main display device 210, which will be described later, provided on the rear side thereof. Note that, in this embodiment, the main display device 210 that performs the effect display through the effect display window UD1 may be described as the main effect display section 21 in some cases.

The lower door mechanism DD has a main display window 4 provided substantially in the center of its upper portion, and a reel unit RU attached to the inside of the cabinet G behind the main display window 4. there is

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels 3L (left reel), 3C (middle reel), and 3R (right reel). Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is composed of, for example, a cylindrically formed reel body and a translucent reel band attached to the peripheral surface of the reel body. ) are drawn at predetermined intervals along the direction of rotation of the reel. The reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are arranged in parallel (in a horizontal row) so that they can rotate vertically at a constant speed. The main display window 4 is configured as, for example, a transparent panel made of resin, and allows at least a portion (for example, three) of the symbols on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R to be visible. Further, inside each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, a light source (a reel lamp included in lamps and LEDs, which will be described later) is provided at a position where the pattern can be viewed at least through the main display window 4. At least each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R When 3C and 3R are rotating, they are illuminated from the inside with a constant luminance to ensure the visibility of the pattern.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD has a sub effect display section 22 provided on the left side of the main display window 4 and a effect button 10b provided on the right side of the main display window 4 . The sub effect display section 22 displays the effect image displayed on the sub display device 220 which will be described later. It should be noted that the sub-rendering display section 22 can be configured as a touch panel so that it functions not only as a function of displaying a performance, but also as one of the buttons for performance. The effect button 10b is an operation unit that receives a player's operation for effect (effect operation).

In addition, the lower door mechanism DD is provided substantially in the center of the substantially horizontal pedestal formed below the main display window 4, with the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, and the checkout button 9 provided on the left side. and a medal slot 5 provided on the right side.

The MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b are the player's game operations (betting operations, "insertion operations" and "betting operations") for using the medals deposited (credited) inside the pachislot machine 1. ”, etc.). When the MAX bet button 6a is operated, if the current bet number is less than the maximum bet number (for example, 3) and the number of credited medals is equal to or greater than the difference, the maximum bet number of medals is bet. be. On the other hand, if the credited medals are less than the difference, no medals are bet. Further, when the 1 bet button 6b is operated, if the current bet number is less than the maximum bet number and there is one or more credited medals, one medal is bet.

The settlement button 9 is an operation unit that receives a game operation (settlement operation) of the player for returning credited medals (settlement). If the payment button 9 is operated while there are no credited medals, the medals to be inserted or paid out will be credited within the creditable number (for example, 50). A player's game operation (C/P mode selection operation) for enabling selection of either mode (C mode) or a pay mode (P mode) in which the medals are not credited may be accepted. That is, the settlement button 9 can also function as a so-called C/P button. The effect button 10a is an operation unit that receives a player's operation for effect (effect operation).

The medal slot 5 accepts medals that are thrown into the pachi-slot machine 1 from the outside by a player. The received medals are detected by the selector 31, which will be described later, and it is determined whether or not they are proper medals. If the one received medal is not proper, the received medal is returned from a medal payout port 11, which will be described later. Also, if the accepted one medal is correct, and if the current bet number is less than the maximum bet number, one medal is bet. If the current number of bets is the maximum number of bets and the credited medals have not reached the creditable number, one medal is credited. On the other hand, when the credited medals have reached the creditable number, the received medals are returned from the medal payout port 11, which will be described later.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD has an information display device 14 provided between the main display window 4 and the above-described pedestal. The information display device 14 includes a plurality of lamps (LEDs) and 7-segment LEDs, and displays information about the game according to lighting modes thereof.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD includes a start lever 7 provided on the left side, three stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R provided substantially in the center and a and a locking mechanism 15 . The start lever 7 is an operation unit which is attached so as to be tiltable within a predetermined angle range and receives a game operation (start operation) by the player for starting a game. Each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R is provided corresponding to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and is an operation unit that receives a game operation (stop operation) by the player for stopping the rotation of each reel.

The locking mechanism 15 is composed of, for example, a key cylinder lock, and when the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state, a manager on the amusement arcade side (for example, an amusement arcade clerk, etc.; the same shall apply hereinafter) inserts a door key (not shown) into the keyhole. ) is inserted and turned to the right to unlock, and the lower door mechanism DD is opened. Note that the locking mechanism 15 may have a function as a reset switch as well as a function to manage opening and closing of the door mechanism. For example, when an amusement arcade manager inserts a door key into a keyhole and turns it to the left, it may be possible to detect a reset operation similar to the reset switch 53 described later. Further, in this embodiment, when the lower door mechanism DD is opened, the upper door mechanism UD can also be opened in conjunction therewith. A separate mechanism may be provided so that the opening and closing can be managed independently.

In addition, the lower door mechanism DD includes a waist panel 13 provided in the center of its lower portion, a medal receiving tray 12 provided below the waist panel 13, and a medal dispensing opening 11 provided above the medal receiving tray 12. , and sound transmission holes 24 a and 24 b provided on the left and right sides of the medal payout port 11 .

The waist panel 13 includes, for example, a decorative panel on which model information such as a logo representing the name of the model or a character representing a motif is drawn, and a light source for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side (such as lamps and LEDs, which will be described later). lumbar ramp included). The medal tray 12 stores medals paid out from the medal payout port 11. - 特許庁The medal pay-out port 11 discharges medals paid out (or returned) from the inside of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the outside. The medals discharged from the medal pay-out port 11 include those paid out from a hopper device 32 described below and those returned from a selector 31 described later through a cancel chute (not shown). The sound transmission holes 24a and 24b are located on the back sides of the respective speakers 35a and 35b (the speaker 35a is omitted in FIG. 2) mounted inside the cabinet G. is transmitted toward the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1.

In this embodiment, an upper door mechanism UD and a lower door mechanism DD are provided in correspondence with the fact that the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space. As long as it can be opened and closed, it can be configured as a single door mechanism, or it can be configured as three or more door mechanisms. Moreover, it can also be configured as a double door mechanism (for example, an outer door and an inner door) in the front-rear direction. Further, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can be simply referred to as "doors" or "doors", and since they function as members capable of opening and closing the opening in the cabinet G, they can be referred to as "opening/closing members" or "doors." It can also be called a "member", or a "door member" or the like.

[1-1-3. Fluctuation display]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the main display window 4. As shown in FIG. When the start lever 7 is operated (when the player performs a start operation), the reels 3L, 3C and 3R start rotating by driving and controlling stepping motors 51L, 51C and 51R, which will be described later. As a result, the pattern displayed on the main display window 4 is displayed in a variable manner. When the respective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R are operated (when the player performs a stop operation), stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, which will be described later, are driven and controlled for the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. to stop each rotation. As a result, the symbols displayed in the main display window 4 are stopped and displayed.

That is, each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the main display window 4 has a variable display section (means) capable of variably displaying (and stopping) a plurality of symbols in a plurality of rows, or a variable displaying (and stopping) display of a plurality of symbols. ) constitute a possible plurality of variable display units (means). The variable display section (means) can also be referred to as a "symbol display section (means)" or a "variable display section (means)". The pattern can also be referred to as a "picture" or "pattern", or as long as it is information visually identifiable by the player, it can also be referred to as "identification information" in that sense.

Further, the main display window 4 is constructed so that when the rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped, three symbols arranged consecutively are displayed within the frame. That is, the main display window 4 displays one pattern (three in total) in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions of each column (the frame of the main display window 4 displays 3 rows x 3 columns). The pattern is displayed in the form of ). Note that the main display window 4 is sometimes referred to as a "design display area", a "window", or the like.

A valid line is defined in the main display window 4 . The effective line is a line for determining whether or not a prescribed combination of symbols is displayed when symbols of all rows are stopped and displayed in response to a player's stop operation. In that sense, the activated line can also be referred to as a "win line" or a "decision line". Also, the effective line is configured as a line connecting any of the regions of each column. That is, when the main display window 4 is configured to display patterns in the form of 3 rows×3 columns, it is possible to define a maximum of 27 effective lines. However, in practice, one or more of the lines can be defined as valid lines, and the other lines can be defined as invalid lines that are not valid lines.

For example, the line connecting the middle area of the reel 3L, the middle area of the reel 3C, and the middle area of the reel 3R is the "center line", the upper area of the reel 3L, the upper area of the reel 3C, and the upper area of the reel 3R. The connecting line is the "top line", the line connecting the lower area of the reel 3L, the lower area of the reel 3C, and the lower area of the reel 3R is the "bottom line", the lower area of the reel 3L, the middle area of the reel 3C, and the reel 3R. A line connecting the upper area is called a "cross-up line", and a line connecting the upper area of the reel 3L, the middle area of the reel 3C, and the lower area of the reel 3R is called a "cross-down line". One or more of these lines are often defined as effective lines because they are lines that connect each area in a straight line. However, as described above, a so-called irregular line that connects each region of each column with a polygonal line can also be defined as an effective line.

In addition, in order for the activated line to be activated, it is necessary to bet the required amount of medals for the current game (the number of medals that can be used to start the game) prior to the player's start operation. The number of activated lines to be converted may be the same regardless of the number of bets, or may vary according to the number of bets. For example, assuming that the above-mentioned three lines of "center line", "top line", and "bottom line" are defined as active lines, in the case of the former, the number of bets is any of 1 to 3. Even if the 'center line', 'top line', and 'bottom line' are enabled. On the other hand, in the latter case, if the number of bets is 1, only "center line" is activated, and if the number of bets is 2, "center line" and "top line" are activated, and the number of bets is 3. If (maximum number of bets), "center line", "top line" and "bottom line" are enabled.

In this embodiment, the variable display section has three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and a main display window 4 capable of displaying three symbols in each column. Although the symbols are displayed in the form of columns, the pattern display form in the variable display section is not limited to this. For example, the number of reels is set to 1, 2, or 4 or more, and, for example, the number of symbols displayed in each row is set to 1, 2, or 4 or more. You can also display the pattern with . In this case, the number of valid lines that can be defined also increases or decreases as appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display section variably displays the symbols by rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, but the configuration of the variable display section is not limited to this. For example, a configuration using an image display device similar to the main display device 210 and the sub-display device 220, which will be described later, may be used, or a configuration using other display devices (eg, organic EL, 7-segment LED, etc.) may be used. . Also, for example, a configuration using other physical devices (for example, a belt or the like) may be used. Also, the arrangement, size, etc. of the variable display section can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display section functions as a main side display section that is directly related to the game and is controlled by the main control circuit 100, which will be described later. A variable display section may be provided as a sub-side display section related to an effect not directly related to the game, which is controlled by the game. Note that the sub-side display section can be configured using the main display device 210 and the sub-display device 220, for example. That is, a variable display unit that variably displays symbols in accordance with a player's start operation (or other start conditions are met), and stops and displays symbols in response to a player's stop operation (or other stop conditions are met). As such, not only the main side display section but also the sub side display section may be provided. In this case, in order to allow the player to identify whether or not the variable display section is directly related to the game, characters such as "pachislot" or "main reel" are displayed near the main side display section. It is sufficient that an identification mark indicating is attached so that it is possible to identify that the variable display portion is the main side display portion. Note that such an identification display may be displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220 .

[1-1-4. Medal slot]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the medal slot 5 for receiving medals inserted into the pachi-slot machine 1 from the outside by the player. Note that the medal slot 5 and a selector 31, which will be described later, have the function of betting the number of medals required for one game, like the MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b. , for example, can be rephrased as a bet operation. Therefore, it can be said that the medal slot 5 is a betting operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the player's betting operation. The shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal slot can be changed as appropriate. Also, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

In the present embodiment, as an example of the game value that is used in the game or given according to the game result, medals are used as game media. It is not limited to this. For example, coins, game balls, game point data or tokens, etc. may be used. Also, the game value can be simply referred to as "value" or "game value".

[1-1-5. Operation part]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, the following operation units as operation units that can be operated by the player. It should be noted that each operation unit shown below is merely an example, and may be configured to include an operation unit different from these, or may be configured not to include an operation unit that is not necessarily essential among these. .

[1-1-5-1. bet button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with the MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b for receiving a player's bet operation for using medals deposited (credited) therein. Also, such a bet operation is detected by a bet switch 6S, which will be described later. Therefore, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, and the bet switch 6S constitute a bet operation detection section (means) capable of detecting the player's bet operation. Note that the bet button only needs to be able to detect the player's betting operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, although the MAX bet button 6a and the 1-bet button 6b are provided in this embodiment, only the MAX bet button 6a may be provided without providing the 1-bet button 6b. Also, a 2-bet button for betting two medals may be provided separately.

[1-1-5-2. start lever]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a start lever 7 for receiving a player's start operation for starting a game. Also, such a start operation is detected by a start switch 7S, which will be described later. Therefore, the start lever 7 and the start switch 7S constitute a start operation detection section (means) capable of detecting the player's start operation. It should be noted that the start lever only needs to be able to detect the player's start operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-3. stop button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with respective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R which are provided corresponding to the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R and which receive a player's stop operation for stopping the respective rotations. Moreover, such a start operation is detected by a stop switch 8S, which will be described later. Therefore, the respective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R and the stop switch 8S constitute a stop operation detection section (means) capable of detecting the player's stop operation. It should be noted that the stop button only needs to be able to detect the player's stop operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-4. Settlement button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the checkout button 9 for accepting the player's checkout operation (return operation) for returning (checkout) credited medals. Further, such a settlement operation is detected by a settlement switch 9S, which will be described later. Therefore, the checkout button 9 and the checkout switch 9S constitute a checkout operation detection section (means) capable of detecting the checkout operation of the player. It should be noted that the checkout button only needs to be able to detect the checkout operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-5. production button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with effect buttons 10a and 10b for receiving the player's effect operations. Incidentally, such an effect operation is detected by a detection switch (not shown) provided corresponding to each effect button. Therefore, the effect buttons 10a and 10b and the detection switch constitute a effect operation detection section (means) capable of detecting the effect operation of the player. It should be noted that the effect button only needs to be able to detect the player's effect operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate. In addition, in this embodiment, two production buttons 10a and 10b are provided, but it is possible to configure without providing either of them, or to provide only one of them. can. Also, it can be configured to provide three or more production buttons.

The main uses of the production buttons are to change the production mode when executing a specific production (for example, an operation-linked production described later), and to perform a selection/decision operation in the user menu described later. Therefore, it is also possible to configure so as to provide a presentation button according to the application. For example, for the former purpose, the production buttons 10a and 10b are used, and for the latter purpose, the above-described touch panel may be used. For use in the latter application, a jog dial, a cross key, or the like that can accept selection/decision operations can be provided as separate effect buttons.

[1-1-6. medal outlet]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has the medal payout port 11 for discharging medals paid out (or returned) from inside the pachi-slot machine 1 to the outside. When a prize is won and medals are paid out, the medal payout port 11 gives the player the medals paid out from the hopper device 32, which will be described later. It can be said that it is part of the means. Also, the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal payout port can be changed as appropriate. Also, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-1-7. Medal tray]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the medal receiving tray 12 for storing medals paid out from the medal payout port 11 . That is, the medal receiving tray 12 constitutes a storage section (means) capable of storing the given game value. Note that the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal receiving tray can be changed as appropriate. Also, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-1-8. waist panel]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, a decorative panel on which model information is drawn and a waist panel 13 composed of a waist lamp for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side. The waist panel 13 basically indicates to the player what kind of model the pachislot machine 1 is. can also be configured as one of the effect executing means capable of executing the effect by configuring with an image display device or the like.

[1-1-9. Information display]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with the information display device 14 that displays game-related information by its lighting mode. In other words, the information display device 14 constitutes an information display section (means) capable of displaying information about games.

The information display device 14 includes, for example, an insert lamp, a start lamp, a replay lamp, a bet number lamp, a credit lamp, a payout number lamp, an instruction monitor, a limit lamp, and the like.

The insert lamp lights up to indicate that medals can be inserted. The start lamp indicates that the game can be started by operating the start lever 7 by turning on the start lamp. The replay lamp lights to indicate that medals have been automatically inserted due to the operation of the replay. The bet number lamp lights up to display the number of medals bet. The credit lamp displays the number of credited medals according to its lighting mode. The number-of-payouts lamp displays the number of medals (number of payouts) paid out according to the game result by its lighting mode.

Further, the instruction monitor includes a notification lamp (stop operation display section) and a section lamp (state display section). The notification lamp lights up in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified under a situation (for example, AT state) in which the information of the stop operation is notified to the player, so that the information of the stop operation is displayed. display. It should be noted that the "mode uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified" is, for example, the pressing order (in the present embodiment, this may be described as the "batting order"), the 1st (the first stop operation is In the case of announcing "2nd (perform the first stop operation to the reel 3C)", the numerical value "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor. displays the numerical value "2" on the instruction monitor, and displays the numerical value "3" on the instruction monitor when notifying the pushing order "3rd (performing the first stop operation to the reel 3R)". It's about. Note that the notification lamp may not necessarily be provided separately from the credit lamp and the payout number lamp. For example, either a credit lamp or a payout lamp may be used to display stop operation information.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in a situation where the information of the stop operation is notified to the player, the sub-side notification means (for example, the main effect display section 21) controlled by the sub-control circuit 200, which will be described later. In addition, the information of the stop operation is notified also by the instruction monitor as the main side notification means controlled by the main control circuit 100 which will be described later. The manner of notification by the main-side notification means and the manner of notification by the sub-side notification means may be different from each other. That is, the main-side notification means may perform notification in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified, and does not necessarily need to directly notify the information on the stop operation. For example, in the case of announcing the pressing order "1st", even if the indication monitor displays the numerical value "1", there is a possibility that the content of the notification cannot be specified depending on the player. On the other hand, the sub-side notification means may directly notify the information of the stop operation. For example, when informing the pressing order "1st", the main effect display section 21 may directly inform the instruction information for performing the first stop operation on the reel 3L.

In addition, the section lamp indicates that the current state is in an advantageous section, which will be described later, by turning on. For example, when transitioning from a non-advantageous section described later to an advantageous section, the section lamp lights up at an arbitrary timing until the game in the advantageous section starts, and the advantageous section ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section. , the lights are turned off at an arbitrary timing until the game in the non-advantageous section is started. Note that the lighting timing of the section lamp is not limited to this. For example, when the production section (normal advantageous section) described later in the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section first shifts to the increased section (AT state) described later in the advantageous section, any time until the game in the increased section is started It is good also as what lights up at timing. That is, the section lamp may indicate that it is in an advantageous section regardless of whether it is a production section or an increase section, or at least the advantageous section including this from the start of the first increase section It may be one that informs the period until the end of.

In addition, the limit lamp indicates that the limit processing described later has been executed or the possibility thereof, depending on its lighting mode. For example, when the limit process is executed, the lighting informs the player that a state advantageous to the player (for example, the AT state) has been forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit process. In addition, for example, when the execution of the limit process is near, by blinking, it is reported that there is a high possibility that the advantageous state will be forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit process. In addition to these, other information related to the limit processing can be appropriately notified by providing a trigger for lighting, blinking, or extinguishing.

[1-1-10. Effect display section]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the main effect display section 21 and the sub-effect display section 22 that display effect images. The main effect display portion 21 and the sub effect display portion 22 constitute a effect display portion (means) capable of performing effect display. Also, it is configured as one of the effect executing means capable of executing a visual effect for the player.

The main effect display unit 21 includes a main display device 210 that displays effects through the effect display window UD1. The main display device 210 includes a display unit A replaceably mounted on an intermediate support plate G1 in the cabinet G, an irradiation unit B for emitting irradiation light for image display, and irradiation from the irradiation unit B. It is configured as a so-called projection mapping device having a screen device C that makes an image appear by being irradiated with light. In the present embodiment, by configuring the main display device 210 in this way, it is possible to display an advanced and powerful effect, but the configuration of the main display device 210 is not limited to this. In other words, it is only necessary to be able to execute a visual effect for the player, and it can be configured as an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL device, a display device such as a 7-segment LED device, or a sub-reel device. It can also be configured as a variable display device or a dot display device. Moreover, from such a point of view, the shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate. In addition, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is, for example, a type of game mainly focused on entertaining players with so-called winning numbers, the main effect display section 21 may not be provided (the sub-effect display section 22 as well).

The sub effect display section 22 is configured including a sub display device 220 . Also, the sub-display device 220 is configured as a liquid crystal display device. The sub-display device 220 can also be configured as another image display device or display device like the main display device 210, or can be configured as a variable display device or a dot display device. Moreover, from such a point of view, the shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate. In addition, since the main effect display section 21 is composed of a large screen, it mainly displays effects closely related to the current game such as notification of pressing order, notification of winning, continuous effects, etc., and a sub-effect display section. 22 is composed of a small screen, it is possible to divide the display content according to the purpose, such as mainly displaying effects that are not so closely related to the current game, such as game history. It is possible. Further, in the present embodiment, the main effect display portion 21 and the sub effect display portion 22 are provided. It is also possible to configure so as to provide only one of them. Moreover, it is also possible to configure so as to provide three or more effect display units.

[1-1-11. lamp]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1, like the upper lamp 23 given as an example, includes its light emission mode (lighting, blinking, or light-off, as well as its brightness and emission color when configured as a full-color LED). ), one or more lamps (light emitting means) are provided. Further, such a light emitting means is configured as one of the effect executing means capable of executing a visual effect for the player. From this point of view, the number, shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

Other lamps included in lamps and LEDs to be described later include, for example, side lamps provided on both side end surfaces of the upper door mechanism UD and both side end surfaces of the lower door mechanism DD, and operation units provided in each operation unit. A lamp etc. can be mentioned. The latter includes a function to notify the player whether or not each operation unit can be operated. , can be controlled to emit light according to a unique lighting mode.

[1-1-12. speaker]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes speakers 35a and 35b for outputting sounds such as sound effects and BGM. The speakers 35a and 35b constitute audio output means capable of producing effects by outputting audio. In addition, it is configured as one of the effect execution means capable of executing the effect from an auditory point of view for the player. From this point of view, the number, shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-13. Other production equipment]
Incidentally, the pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with an effect device other than the various effect devices (effect execution means) described above. For example, it is possible to provide effects such as a movable production device such as a so-called accessory, a vibration production device that produces production by vibration, or an air production device that produces production by injecting air. That is, an effect device capable of executing an effect that can appeal to any of the player's five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, taste, and olfactory) (allowing the player to recognize that the effect is being performed) Either of them can be used. Therefore, in the present embodiment, unless otherwise specified, "executing a production" means that one or more of the various production devices (production execution means) described above is used to produce a production. indicates that it is permissible to execute

[1-2. Internal structure]
[1-2-1. selector]
The selector 31 (not numbered in FIG. 2) is a downstream passage for medals inserted from the medal slot 5, and is provided on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD. The selector 31 has, for example, a medal sensor 31S, which will be described later, and a sorting device.

The medal sensor 31S detects medals inserted from the medal slot 5 and determines whether or not the detected medals are appropriate medals. When the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medal is an appropriate medal, and the medal can be accepted, the sorting device sends the medal to the hopper device 32, which will be described later. It is driven and controlled so as to be guided. In this case, 1 is added to the number of bets or the number of credits. On the other hand, when the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medal is not an appropriate medal, or when the medal is not ready to be accepted, the sorting device passes the medal through the cancel chute to the medal payout opening 11. is driven and controlled to be returned from A selector error occurs when an abnormality occurs in medal detection by the medal sensor 31S. In this case, the error state is canceled when the reset operation is performed after eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, medal jam).

That is, the selector 31 constitutes a game medium detection unit (means) capable of detecting the inserted game medium. In addition, the selector 31 constitutes a judgment means capable of judging whether or not the inserted game medium is proper. Further, the selector 31 constitutes a sorting means for storing inside when the inserted game media are correct, and discharging them to the outside when the inserted game media are not correct. Also, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the selector 31 can be changed as appropriate. Also, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-2. Hopper device]
The hopper device 32 is provided in the lower space inside the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. The hopper device 32 includes, for example, a bucket section for storing medals inserted from the medal slot 5 and guided by the selector 31, and a bottom section of the bucket section for agitating the medals stored in the bucket section. It has a disc portion that guides the medals to the discharge portion one by one, a discharge portion that discharges the medals guided by the disc portion one by one, and a count sensor that counts the medals discharged from the discharge portion.

The bucket section is configured to be able to store a fixed number of medals. Medals exceeding a certain number are guided to a medal auxiliary storage box 33, which will be described later, through a guide passage provided on the upper surface side. A hopper empty error occurs when the medals stored in the bucket become empty. In this case, after replenishing medals, the error state is released when the reset operation is performed.

The disc portion has a plurality of medal-shaped cutouts radially formed from the center, and the central shaft is rotated according to a drive signal to guide the medals fitted in the cutouts to the discharge portion one by one. Note that the medals stored in the bucket section are agitated by the rotation of the disk section. Also, when an abnormality occurs in the rotation of the disk portion, a hopper jam error occurs. In this case, the error state is canceled when the reset operation is performed after eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, medal jam).

The count sensor detects the medals discharged from the discharge section and counts the number of medals. For example, when one medal is to be paid out, the disk portion starts rotating, and then the disk portion stops rotating when the count sensor counts one medal payout. In this manner, an appropriate number of medals are paid out.

That is, the hopper device 32 constitutes a game medium payout section (means) capable of paying out game media. Also, as described above, it can be said that it is a part of privilege giving means for giving a privilege to the player. Also, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the hopper device 32 can be changed as appropriate. Also, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-3. Auxiliary storage for medals]
The medal auxiliary storage box 33 is provided in the lower space inside the cabinet G. The medal auxiliary storage box 33 is, for example, a storage unit for storing medals guided from the bucket unit of the hopper device 32, and a medal auxiliary storage unit provided near the storage unit for detecting the capacity of the medals stored in the storage unit. It has a storage switch 33S.

The storage section is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. When it is determined by the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S that the predetermined number or more of medals have been stored, an auxiliary medal storage error occurs. In this case, the error state is released when the reset operation is performed after reducing the number of medals stored in the storage section to at least less than a certain number.

That is, the auxiliary medal storage box 33 constitutes a surplus game medium storage section (means) capable of storing surplus game media. The configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal auxiliary storage box 33 can be changed as appropriate. Also, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-4. power supply]
The power supply device 34 is provided in the lower space inside the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. The power supply device 34 has, for example, a power board 34a and a power switch 34b, and supplies power to the pachi-slot machine 1 when the power switch 34b is turned on. The power supply device 34 converts AC voltage power of 100 V supplied from a power cable (not shown) into power of DC voltage required for each part, and supplies the converted power to each part. do. That is, the power supply device 34 constitutes a power supply unit (means) capable of supplying necessary power to the gaming machine. Note that the configuration, arrangement, size, and the like of the power supply device 34 can be changed as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the setting key-type switch 52 and the reset switch 53, which will be described later, are provided on the main control board 71 (more specifically, on the main control board case, which will be described later). A switch can also be configured to be provided on the power supply 34 .

[1-2-5. substrate]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, the following boards as boards required for various controls. Note that each substrate shown below is merely an example, and a configuration in which substrates different from these are provided may be employed, or a configuration in which non-essential substrates among these are not necessarily provided may be employed.

[1-2-5-1. Main control board]
The main control board 71 is mounted inside the cabinet G on the rear side of the reel unit RU. In addition, the main control board 71 is a game control board that performs control related to the game. are housed in The electrical configuration of the main control board 71 will be described later.

There are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71, and basically various electronic components are DIP-mounted. implemented). Also, in this case, a test point may be provided for checking the operation using a tester or an oscilloscope. In addition, small electronic parts not exceeding 6 mm square may be used for some or all of the various electronic parts. Moreover, the board surface of the main control board 71 may be configured to have multiple layers.

[1-2-5-2. Sub control board]
The sub-control board 72 is mounted inside the cabinet G on the back side of the intermediate support plate G1. In addition, the sub-control board 72 is an effect control board that controls effects, and is housed in a sub-control board case (not shown) made of resin. The sub control board case can be configured as a transparent (or substantially transparent) resin case similar to the main control board case, or can be made of other materials that are opaque (or substantially opaque). can also be configured as a case using The electrical configuration of the sub control board 72 will be described later.

[1-2-5-3. Other substrates]
(main relay board)
The main relay board 73 (reference numerals omitted in FIG. 2) is attached to a specific position (for example, the back side of the lower door mechanism DD) in the cabinet G, and various devices connected to the main relay board 73 and the main control board 73 are connected to the main relay board 73. It is an intermediate control board for relaying between the board 71 and between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 . Note that the main relay board 73 is configured as a board separate from the main control board 71 for convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency. A configuration in which the main relay board 73 is not provided can also be adopted. From this point of view, the main relay board 73 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of substrates may be provided as the main relay substrate.

(Secondary relay board)
The sub-relay board 74 is mounted at a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD), between various devices connected to the sub-relay board 74 and the sub-control board 72, and It is an intermediate control board for relaying between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 . The sub-relay board 74 is configured as a board separate from the sub-control board 72 for convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the sub-relay substrate 74 is not provided while the sub-relay substrate 74 is provided. From this point of view, the sub relay board 74 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of substrates may be provided as sub-relay substrates.

(External collective terminal board)
The external centralized terminal plate 55 is attached at a specific position (for example, the back side of the lower space) in the cabinet G, and receives signals such as medal insertion signals, medal payout signals, external signals 1 to 4, and security signals. Output to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. The output start conditions and output end conditions of the external signals 1 to 4 can be appropriately set, and the transition of the internal state of the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, bonus state or AT state) can be externally controlled according to the game characteristics. Allows you to report. Since the external centralized terminal board 55 is normally connected to an external data display device or a hall computer, these devices can be used not only for inserting/paying out medals and error occurrences in the pachi-slot machine 1, but also for detecting errors. , such internal state transition situations are recognizable.

(Interface board for testing machine)
The first interface board for testing machine 301 and the second interface board for testing machine 302 are both relay boards used for outputting various game-related signals to the testing machine in the certification test (trial test) of the pachi-slot machine 1. (In addition, since these relay boards are not mounted on the pachi-slot machine 1 as a released product for sale, the main control board 71 for sale includes the first interface board 301 for testing machine and the second interface board 301 for testing machine. Various electronic components required to connect to the interface board 302 are also not mounted). For example, a test signal for controlling the main operations related to the game (for example, internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) is output via the tester first interface board 301, and is determined by the main control board 71. The test signal or the like related to the push order navigation thus obtained is output via the second interface board 302 for testing machine.

[2. Electrical Configuration of Pachislot Machine]
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1. As shown in FIG.

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71, a sub-control board 72, a main relay board 73, and a sub-relay board 74. The main control board 71 and the main relay board 73, the main relay board 73 and the sub-relay board 74, and the sub-relay board 74 and the sub-control board 72 are electrically connected. In addition, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are electrically connected via the main relay board 73 and the sub relay board 74 so that one-way serial communication from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72 is possible. properly connected.

The main control circuit board 71 is mounted with a main control circuit 100 as a game control unit that controls games. The main control circuit 100 includes, for example, a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown), a random number circuit (not shown), and the like. The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for transmitting various control instructions (commands) to the sub control circuit 200, and the like. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program. The clock pulse generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU 101 . The random number circuit generates random numbers within a predetermined range (eg, 0-65535 or 0-255, etc.). The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the generated clock pulse signal. Also, one or more values are extracted as random numbers from the generated random numbers as needed. In this way, control relating to game operations in general is performed.

A sub-control circuit 200 is mounted on the sub-control board 72 as a production control unit that controls production. The sub-control circuit 200 includes, for example, a sub-CPU 201, a sub-RAM 203, and the like. A ROM cartridge board 202 is connected to the sub control board 72 . The ROM cartridge substrate 202 contains various control programs executed by the sub CPU 201, various data tables, various effect data (for example, video data and drive data for the main display device 210, video data for the sub display device 220, lamp/ lamp data related to the LED group, sound data related to the speaker group, etc.) are stored. The sub-RAM 203 has a storage area for registering performance contents and various performance data determined by executing the control program, a storage area for storing data related to various control instructions (commands) transmitted from the main control board 71, and the like. be provided. In addition, the random number value for the effect related to the effect may be generated and extracted within the sub CPU 201 from a predetermined range of random numbers (for example, 0 to 32767, etc.), or the main control The generation and extraction may be performed by providing a random number circuit similar to the circuit 100 . Alternatively, a sub ROM may be included in the sub control circuit 200 instead of the ROM cartridge board 202, and various control programs may be stored in the sub ROM. Further, the ROM cartridge board 202 may store various performance data, and the sub ROM in the sub control circuit 200 may store various control programs and various data tables. In addition, the sub-control circuit 200 includes an image-dedicated microprocessor such as a GPU (for example, also referred to as "VDP"). may be configured to generate (edit) the

The main control board 71 includes stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, a setting key switch 52, a reset switch 53, a role ratio monitor device 54, an external collective terminal plate 55, a hopper device 32, an auxiliary medal storage switch 33S, and a power supply. Device 34 is electrically connected. In addition, the main control board 71 has a door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, a medal sensor 31S, a bet switch 6S, a start switch 7S, a stop switch 8S, an adjustment switch 9S, and an information display device 14 through the main relay board 73. It is connected to the. If the tester first interface board 301 and the tester second interface board 302 are mounted, they are electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the main relay board 73, for example.

In addition, the external collective terminal plate 55, the hopper device 32, the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S, the power supply device 34, the medal sensor 31S, the bet switch 6S, the start switch 7S, the stop switch 8S, the settlement switch 9S, the information display device 14, and the testing machine. Since the first interface board 301 for the tester and the second interface board 302 for the tester have already been described, description thereof will be omitted here.

Each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is connected to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio, and is driven to rotate and stop each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Since each reel 3L, 3C, 3R rotates at a constant angle each time one pulse is output to each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R, the main CPU 101 controls each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R. The number of times pulses are output to 51C and 51R is counted, and the symbol positions of the respective reels 3L, 3C and 3R are managed based on this count result. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is provided with a reel index (not shown) that determines an initial position for such management, and an index sensor (not shown) for detecting the position of the reel index. .

The setting key-type switch 52 is used when changing the setting values of the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, setting 1 to setting 6 in six stages) (setting change), or when checking the setting of the pachi-slot machine 1 (setting confirmation). used for Here, the set value indicates the degree of the player's advantage in the game, and normally, the lower the set value (for example, the closer to the setting 1) the relatively the degree of the player's advantage. The higher the set value (for example, closer to setting 6), the higher the player's degree of advantage. The setting key-type switch 52 is turned on when, for example, the manager of the amusement arcade inserts a setting key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it to the left from the initial position, and returns it to the initial position after turning it to the left. and turn off. When the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned off, the settings can be changed by turning on the setting key-type switch 52 and then turning on the power. When the key-shaped switch 52 is turned on, the setting can be confirmed.

The reset switch 53 is capable of detecting a reset operation by an administrator on the amusement arcade side. A reset operation is an operation for canceling various error states. In addition, the reset switch 53 can detect a setting value decision operation by the manager of the game parlor in a state in which the setting can be changed. When the reset switch 53 is operated in a state in which the setting can be changed, the setting value is incremented by 1 each time it is operated (when reaching setting 6, the setting returns to setting 1). In this manner, setting value determination operation can be performed. Further, the set value determined in this manner is fixed when the start lever 7 is operated once thereafter. That is, the start switch 7S is capable of detecting setting value confirmation operation by the manager of the game parlor. In this way, when the setting is to be changed, the setting key-type switch 52 is turned on, the reset switch 53 is operated to select a set value, and the start lever 7 is operated to confirm the selected set value. After that, it is necessary to perform a setting change operation such as turning off the setting key-type switch 52 . It should be noted that this is an example of the setting change operation, and the configuration can be such that the setting can be changed by another operation. Also, when changing settings or confirming settings, for example, the current set value may be displayed in the credit lamp or payout number lamp.

The role ratio monitor device 54 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and is provided inside the main control board case. The role ratio monitor device 54 sequentially displays various kinds of ratio information related to the game aggregated and calculated by the main CPU 101 . These ratio information are used when the administrator of the gaming parlor confirms whether or not the pachislot machine 1 is illegally remodeled. Note that the role ratio monitor device 54 may be mounted on the main control board 71, or may be mounted on another board (for example, a ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71. may Moreover, as long as it is inside the cabinet G, it may be provided in another place. For example, it may be provided on the main control board case. Also, a management switch for starting the display on the role ratio monitor device 54 or switching the contents thereof may be provided in the cabinet G, and when this switch is operated, the various ratio information described above may be displayed. good. On the premise of using such management switches, for example, the information display device 14 may also be used as the role ratio monitor device 54 . In addition, immediately after the power is turned on or after a predetermined time (for example, about 10 seconds. A buffer time considering the time required to start up the main control circuit 100 and the sub control circuit 200) after the power is turned on, the role ratio monitor device 54 In order to be able to confirm that the 4-digit 7-segment LED is functioning normally, for example, a test pattern (a pattern in which all seg and decimal LEDs light up) such as "8.8." It is desirable to have a configuration in which the light is lit (or blinked) for a period of time.

In the role ratio monitor device 54, for example, the type of the ratio information is displayed in the upper two digits, and the value (%) indicating the ratio information is displayed in the lower two digits. Here, the various ratio information displayed on the role ratio monitor device 54 includes, for example, cumulative specific section ratio information, continuous role ratio information and role ratio information for the most recent 6000 games, and cumulative continuous role ratio information. and role item ratio information.

The specific section ratio information refers to a stop operation that is advantageous to the player among the game sections of the target number of games played (for example, 175,000 games for "total"; 6,000 games for "last 6,000 games"; the same applies hereinafter). Information indicating the ratio of the number of games played in the game section (for example, AT state) (or simply the number of games in the advantageous section may be used) in which the information of . In addition, the continuous role ratio information means that among the number of medals paid out in the game section of the number of games to be played, the first type special role (RB) is in operation It is information indicating the ratio of the number of medals paid out (including during operation of the first class special bonus (RB) in the state where the operating device (BB) is operating). In addition, the accessory ratio information is the number of medals paid out in the game section of the target number of games, the first type special accessory (RB), the second type special accessory (CB), and the normal accessory (SB ) is information indicating the ratio of the number of medals paid out during the operation of the first class special bonus (RB). BB) is in operation and the first class special bonus (RB) is in operation, and the second class special bonus (CB) is in operation It is a concept that includes the operation of the second type special role product (CB) in the state where the role product continuous operation device (MB) is operating.

In addition, the game section (for example, AT state) in which the information of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is performed is regarded as the operation of the accessory or the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and in the respective ratio information It can also be subject to aggregation and calculation. In other words, the role ratio monitor device 54 may appropriately display necessary ratio information, and the various ratio information that can be displayed is not limited to these. Also, for example, when displaying continuous accessory ratio information on a model that is not equipped with a first class special accessory (RB), or when displaying specific section ratio information on a model that is not equipped with an advantageous section function (AT function) For models that do not have corresponding numerical information (corresponding information), the last two digits of the numerical information (% information indicating the ratio) of the four-digit 7-segment LED are displayed when displaying the item. In the 7-segment LED, for example, by lighting up the two vertical bars in the center, such as "--", by performing an identification display for non-compatible information, confirm that the model does not have compatible information. It is desirable to make it recognizable at a glance by a person.

The door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. In addition, it may be configured to be provided on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD, or may be configured to be provided on the cabinet G side. Further, the upper door mechanism UD may also be provided with a similar door opening/closing monitoring switch. The door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is turned on when the lower door mechanism DD is opened, and is turned off when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, thereby monitoring the opening/closing of the lower door mechanism DD. A door opening error occurs when the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is turned on. In this case, the error state is canceled when the lower door mechanism DD is closed.

The ROM cartridge board 202 , the main display device 210 and the sub display device 220 are electrically connected to the sub control board 72 . Further, the sub control board 72 is provided with, via the sub relay board 74, a 24h door monitoring unit 61, a group of effect buttons such as the effect buttons 10a and 10b, lamps and LEDs such as the upper lamp 23, and speakers 35a and 35b. etc. are electrically connected.

Since the ROM cartridge board 202, the main display device 210, the sub-display device 220, the effect button group, the lamps/LEDs, and the speaker group have already been described, description thereof will be omitted here.

The 24h door monitoring unit 61, like the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. The function of monitoring the opening and closing of the lower door mechanism DD is the same as that of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, but by allowing the sub-control circuit 200 to perform such monitoring, the lower door mechanism DD can be monitored even further. The opening/closing history of the door mechanism DD can be saved for a certain period of time. The opening/closing history can be confirmed from the hall menu, which will be described later. Therefore, for example, if there is a history of opening after the manager of the amusement arcade has left outside business hours, or if there is a history of opening and closing for a long period of time during business hours, this may result in fraud. It is possible to recognize that there is a high possibility that the act has been committed.

[3. Function Flow of Pachislot Machine]
Next, a functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the function flow of the pachi-slot machine 1. As shown in FIG.

When the player inserts medals into the pachi-slot machine 1 (performs a bet operation) and operates the start lever 7 (performs a start operation), a random number from a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535) is generated. One random number (in this embodiment, this may be described as an "internal lottery random number") is extracted.

The internal lottery means (the main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process, which will be described later) performs lottery based on the extracted random number value to determine an internal lottery combination. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols permitted to be displayed on the active line is determined in advance. As for the types of symbol combinations, there are two types of combinations: medal payouts, replay activation, bonus activation, etc. and related items are provided. In addition, a win related to the payout of medals is called a "small win", a win related to replay is called a "replay win", and a win related to the activation of a bonus (bonus state) is called a "bonus win". called. Also, a winning combination that can be internally won (that is, a combination of symbols permitted to be established) is sometimes simply referred to as a "winning combination." Also, the internal winning combination may be referred to as a “winning combination”, a “predetermined result”, or a “derivation permissible condition”. In addition, the internal lottery means may be referred to as a ``winning combination determination means'', a ``winning combination determination means'', a ``prior determination means'', or a ``derivation allowable condition determination means''.

Further, when the start lever 7 is operated (start operation is performed), a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the player operates the stop buttons (respective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R) corresponding to the reels (respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R) (stop operation is performed), reel stop control means (described later) The main CPU 101, which performs reel stop control processing, performs control to stop rotation of the relevant reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing at which the stop button was pressed (or the order of pressing thereof). Note that the operation means for performing the start operation is not limited to a lever-shaped one such as the start lever 7, and any operation means can be used as long as the player can perform the start operation. good. Further, the operation means for performing the stop operation is not limited to button-shaped ones such as the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R, and any operation can be performed as long as the player can perform the stop operation. It can be a means.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the relevant reel within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In this embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels within the specified time is referred to as "the number of sliding symbols". In this embodiment, when the prescribed period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols (maximum number of sliding symbols) is set to four symbols.

When an internal winning combination that permits the display of a winning combination of symbols is determined, the reel stop control means normally displays the combination of symbols on the effective line within a specified time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed at the top as much as possible. Further, the reel stop control means stops the rotation of the reels by using the specified time so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed on the effective line. The symbols displayed when the rotation of the reels is stopped are sometimes referred to as "stop display" or "display result". Also, the display of symbols when the rotation of the reels stops is sometimes referred to as "derivation of stop display" or "derivation of display result".

Further, the reel stop control means automatically stops each reel when a predetermined automatic stop time has passed since the reels are rotated, even if the player does not perform a stop operation. Stop control may be performed. In this case, since the reels are stopped without intervention of the player's stop operation, even if any internal winning combination is determined, any winning combination of symbols is valid. It is desirable to stop spinning the reels so that they are not displayed along the line.

In this way, when all of the plurality of reels stop rotating, the winning determination means (the main CPU 101 that performs a winning operation determination process, which will be described later) determines that the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line is a winning combination. (or other predetermined ones) is determined. That is, it is determined whether or not a winning combination of symbols (or other predetermined combination of symbols) has been established. Then, the combination of the displayed symbols is the one related to the winning (or other predetermined combination) by the winning determination means (that is, the combination of the symbols related to the winning (or other predetermined combination of symbols) ) is established), a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player, or various controls are performed with this as a trigger. In the pachi-slot machine 1, as an example, a series of the above-described flow is performed as one game (unit game).

Note that the winning judgment means judges whether or not the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line corresponds to any combination of symbols among a plurality of predetermined combinations of symbols. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponds to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means. That is, in the former, it may be determined whether or not there is a winning combination of symbols separately from the internal winning combination. In this case, as long as the stop control is appropriately performed by the reel stop control means, it is possible to sufficiently ensure the prevention of the occurrence of false winnings, so it is possible to reduce the control load related to false winning detection. On the other hand, in the latter, by making it possible to determine whether or not the combination of symbols related to winning is a combination of symbols for which winning was permitted, even if an erroneous winning occurs due to a problem with the reels, etc. can be detected, security can be improved.

In addition, in pachislot, in the flow of the series of game operations described above, images are displayed by the display device (for example, the main display device 210, the sub display device 220, etc.), various lamps (for example, the upper lamp 23, etc.) , sound output by speakers (for example, speakers 35a, 35b, etc.), or a combination of these, various effects are performed. That is, these are the effect executing means for executing the effect. The content of the effect executed by the effect executing means may be determined on the main control circuit 100 side (main side) or may be determined on the sub control circuit 200 side (sub side). That is, any one of them can be the effect content determining means.

For example, when the start lever 7 is operated (a start operation is performed), a random number for effect is extracted in addition to the random number for internal lottery. When the random number value for effect is extracted, the effect content determination means selects the effect to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination by lottery (or according to predetermined determination conditions). decide.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect executing means performs a corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reels start rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when it is determined whether or not a prize is awarded. to run. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination, the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be targeted, the pressing order to be operated, etc.) The player is provided with an opportunity to know or anticipate what is possible, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

[4. Basic specifications related to playability of pachislot machines]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be explained.

[4-1. Pattern arrangement]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed such that a game is played by displaying a plurality of symbols variably and statically. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured so as to be able to grasp which symbol is arranged at which position on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. For this reason, the main ROM 102 stores at least data for identifying the type of symbol at each symbol position on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. As long as such a purpose can be achieved, various data configurations can be adopted, and in this embodiment, as an example thereof, a pattern arrangement table (see FIG. 9), which will be described later, is used.

The symbol arrangement table defines symbol position data (for example, "0" to "19") indicating each symbol position in each rotation direction of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Further, data (for example, a pattern code) for specifying the type of pattern is associated with each pattern position data. Further, in the symbol arrangement table, the position of the symbol located in the middle region of each reel within the frame of the main display window 4 when the reel index is detected is defined as "0". It should be noted that the number of symbols in each row, the number of types of symbols, the maximum number of sliding symbols, etc. can be appropriately changed and stipulated.

[4-2. Pattern combination]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed so that the combination of displayed symbols affects the game result. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 gives various benefits, shifts the current state to a relatively advantageous state, or shifts the current state to a relatively disadvantageous state according to the combination of displayed symbols. It makes it possible to migrate. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp such a combination of symbols. Therefore, the main ROM 102 defines data for specifying such a combination of symbols. As long as such a purpose is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration. ing.

The symbol combination table defines data (for example, "display combination" or "winning operation flag") indicating the type of combination of a plurality of predetermined symbols among the combinations of symbols that can be displayed on the activated line. ing. It should be noted that the symbols forming each combination of symbols can be specified using, for example, the above-described symbol code or the like. In addition, data indicating the type of privilege (for example, "payout etc.") is associated with each combination of symbols. The symbol combination table basically has a data structure corresponding to a winning flag storage area, a winning operation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area (see FIG. 17), which will be described later. It should be noted that the number of types of combinations of symbols, the content of benefits to be provided, and the like can be appropriately changed and stipulated.

[4-3. Internal winning role]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed such that which combination of symbols is allowed to be displayed (determined in advance) affects the game result. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 determines the internal winning combination (that is, the type of combination of symbols that can be displayed (or the type of privilege that can be given)) prior to the player's stop operation (in advance). It is possible. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp such internal winning combinations. Therefore, data for specifying such an internal winning combination is defined in the main ROM 102 . As long as this purpose is achieved, various data configurations can be employed. In this embodiment, an internal lottery table (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is used as an example.

The internal lottery table contains data indicating the types of a plurality of predetermined internal winning combinations (for example, "No." or "winning number"), and lottery values for determining each internal winning combination in each gaming state. is defined. Note that the lottery value may also vary depending on the set value. In addition, each internal winning combination is associated with a type of symbol combination permitted (corresponding) to be displayed. In the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to associate a plurality of symbol combinations with one internal winning combination. When such an internal winning combination is determined, which symbol combination is displayed? is determined by stop control.

Here, for example, in the later-described internal lottery process (see FIG. 26; more specifically, the internal winning combination determination process in S64) of the present embodiment, first, a numerical range predetermined by a random number circuit (for example, 0 65535) is sequentially added and updated with a lottery value defined for each internal winning combination. Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result (lottery value+random number) exceeds 65535 (whether or not the lottery result overflows). Then, in a predetermined internal winning combination, when the result of the determination exceeds 65535, the internal winning combination is won (the internal winning combination is determined). However, if none of the internal winning combinations exceeds 65535 even after the determination is performed for all the internal winning combinations, the internal winning combination in the current game is "lost". Note that this is just an example of internal lottery processing, and various methods can be employed for the lottery processing as long as an appropriate lottery is performed according to the lottery value (winning probability). For example, the extracted random numbers are sequentially subtracted and updated with the lottery values specified for each internal winning combination, and then whether or not the subtraction result (lottery result) is less than 0 (lottery result underflows). or not) to determine an internal winning combination.

In this way, in the internal lottery table, the probability (winning probability) of an internal winning combination having a larger defined lottery value is higher. The winning probability of each internal winning combination can be represented by "the lottery value defined for each winning number/the number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

[4-4. stop control]
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, among the combination of symbols permitted to be displayed by the determination of the internal winning combination, which combination of symbols is finally displayed by the player's stop operation is the game result. It is a specification that affects the That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 finally displays not only the type of the determined internal winning combination, but also the player's stop operation timing and pressing order (also referred to as "stop operation mode" or "stop operation procedure"). It is possible to perform control (stop control) to vary (determine) the type of combination of symbols to be played. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured to be able to grasp in what manner the stop control is to be performed for each internal winning combination according to the player's stop operation manner. For this reason, the main ROM 102 defines data for specifying such a mode of stop control. As long as such a purpose is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration. there is

In the stop table, data indicating the amount of symbol movement (for example, "number of sliding symbols") is defined for each symbol position data of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. For example, assume that a predetermined stop table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination is determined. Next, it is assumed that a stop operation is performed on the rotating reel 3L. At this time, it is assumed that the stop start position (symbol position data in the middle area of the reel 3L when the stop operation is performed) is "0". Assume that the number of sliding symbols defined in the symbol position data "0" is "4" in the predetermined stop table. Then, the main control circuit 100 performs control so that the reel 3L is stopped at the symbol position moved by four symbols (position of symbol position data "4") (predicted stop position becomes "4"). In this way, the stop table defines data (the number of sliding symbols) that enables direct determination of the stop position. Note that such a data configuration is also just an example. Further, performing stop control using such a stop table is generally called "table control".

In the attraction priority table, when there are multiple combinations of symbols permitted to be displayed, data indicating which combination of symbols should be preferentially displayed (whether to attract) (for example, "attraction priority ”) is stipulated. For example, assume that a predetermined attraction priority table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination is determined. Here, it is assumed that the predetermined internal winning combination permits the display of the symbol combination A and the symbol combination B, and the predetermined pull-in priority table is such that the symbol combination B is preferentially displayed over the symbol combination A. An order of priority shall be specified. Next, it is assumed that a stop operation is performed on the rotating reel 3L. Assume that the stop start position is "0" at this time.

Then, the main control circuit 100 determines that the symbols constituting the symbol combination A and the symbols constituting the symbol combination B are different for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols (for example, "4") including the stop start position. search to see if there is If neither pattern is available, the stop position is determined according to a predetermined rule (for example, stop at a closer position, stop at a farther position, etc.). If there are only the symbols constituting the symbol combination A, it is decided to stop at the position corresponding to the symbols. If there are only the symbols constituting the symbol combination B, it is decided to stop at the position corresponding to the symbols. If there are both symbols, the symbol combination B is preferentially displayed over the symbol combination A, so it is decided to stop at the position corresponding to the symbols constituting the symbol combination B. The attraction priority may be stored for all symbol positions during the rotation of the target reel according to the selected attraction priority table, or the target reel may be stopped. Each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols including the stop start position may be stored. Also, such a data configuration is merely an example. Moreover, performing stop control using such a pull-in priority table is generally called "control control."

In this embodiment, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which stop control is executed by performing only "table control", or a configuration in which stop control is executed by performing only "control control". Alternatively, first perform "table control" to tentatively determine the stop position, then perform "control control" to search for a more appropriate stop position, and change the stop position depending on the search results. It can also be configured to execute stop control that enables to

Thus, in the pachi-slot machine 1, which symbol combination is finally displayed on the activated line is determined based on, for example, the following three factors.

The first element is the determined internal winning combination (lottery result of internal lottery processing). For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is "lost", any combination of symbols related to the replay hand, the combination of symbols related to the small hand, or the combination of symbols related to the bonus hand will finally be on the effective line. It is never displayed. Note that "lose" can be regarded as one of the internal winning combinations, or can be regarded as a lottery result in which no internal winning combination is determined.

The second factor is the timing of the player's stop operation (the position of the symbol (depression position) when the player operates one of the stop buttons). For example, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to 4 symbols, so display is permitted even if one of the internal winning combinations is won as a result of the internal lottery process. If the symbols constituting the combination of symbols are arranged in excess of 4 symbols on the effective line (each effective line if there are more than one), the combination of the relevant symbols depends on the timing of the player's stop operation. may not be displayed. This is so-called "dropping".

The third element is the player's pressing order (the order in which the player operates the stop buttons). For example, in the present embodiment, there is a case where an internal winning combination associated with a combination of multiple symbols is determined, and in this case, it is finally displayed on the activated line according to the player's pressing order. The combination of symbols to be played may change. Such an internal winning combination is called a "push-order combination", and if it is a replay combination, it is sometimes called a "push-order replay", and if it is a small combination, it is called a "push-order small combination". It is sometimes called

[4-5. game state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to provide various game states as states in which the game is played in order to vary the degree of advantage of the player or to achieve the intended game characteristics. An example of the game state will be described below.

[4-5-1. Bonus state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a bonus combination is won and a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the effective line, it is possible to shift to the bonus state (activate the bonus state). It should be noted that it is also possible to configure so that such a bonus state is not provided. Also, by providing a plurality of types of bonus combinations, it is possible to provide a plurality of bonus states. When the bonus combination is won, a state (carry-over state) occurs in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line. Such a bonus combination is sometimes referred to as a "carryover combination". In addition, such carry-over state is sometimes referred to as "between (bonus) flags", "(bonus) inside", and the like.

In the bonus state, it is possible to change the lottery mode (including the winning probability and its content, or the mode of stop control, etc.; hereinafter the same) for minor wins with respect to the state in which the bonus state is not activated (non-bonus state). (Because it is also possible to change the lottery mode of the replay combination, the bonus state can be regarded as one mode of the RT state described later). Therefore, when such a lottery mode becomes a relatively advantageous lottery mode for the player, the bonus state becomes a more advantageous game state than the non-bonus state. On the other hand, if such a lottery mode becomes a relatively disadvantageous lottery mode for the player, the bonus state becomes a game state more disadvantageous than the non-bonus state.

As a bonus role, for example, the first class special role (RB), the first class special role continuous operation device (BB), the second kind special role (CB) (but not the carryover role) , Accessory continuous operation device (MB) related to the second type special accessory, and ordinary accessory (SB) (but not carryover role), etc. can be mentioned. Also, for example, the bonus state corresponding to each bonus combination is configured as follows. The RB state is a game state that ends when a predetermined number of winnings (for example, the upper limit is 8 times) or a predetermined number of games (for example, the upper limit is 12 times) are played. Configured. The BB state is configured as a game state in which the game ends when the payout of medals exceeds an arbitrary predetermined payout number (for example, the upper limit is 285).

The CB state is configured as a game state that ends when one game is played. The MB state is configured as a game state that ends when the payout of medals exceeds an arbitrary predetermined payout number (for example, the upper limit is 153), or when RB or SB is won during the MB state. be. The SB state is configured as a game state that ends when one game is played.

Note that the operating condition of the bonus state is not limited to the fact that the combination of symbols for the bonus combination is displayed on the active line. For example, during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (BB) related to the first class special accessory, at the start of operation of the accessory continuous operation device (BB) related to the first class special accessory, the first type special role It is also possible to configure such that the first class special role (RB) is automatically activated at the start of the game when the object is not in action, or at the end of the operation of the first class special role. That is, it is possible to perform control so that RB is always in operation while BB is in operation without defining the combination of symbols related to RB. Here, the RB during BB operation is sometimes referred to as "JAC" or the like, and such a specification in which the RB during BB operation automatically operates is sometimes referred to as "auto JAC" or the like. Also, during the operation of BB, it is possible to control so that RB is in operation when a specified combination of symbols related to RB is displayed on the activated line. The specification in which the RB operates based on the display of the combination of corresponding symbols is sometimes called "manual JAC" or the like. The same applies to the relationship between the accessory continuous operating device (MB) relating to the second type special accessory and the second type special accessory (CB). That is, without specifying the combination of symbols related to the CB, it is possible to control so that the CB is always in operation during the operation of the MB, and during the operation of the MB, the specified symbols related to the CB It is also possible to control so that the CB is in operation when the combination is displayed on the effective line.

[4-5-2. RT state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to shift to the RT state (activate the RT state) when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. It should be noted that it is also possible to configure so that such an RT state is not provided. It can also be configured to provide a plurality of RT states. The RT state is a state in which the lottery mode of the replay combination can be varied with respect to the state in which the RT state is not activated (non-RT state). Therefore, when such a lottery mode becomes a relatively advantageous lottery mode for the player, the RT state becomes a more advantageous game state than the non-RT state. On the other hand, if such a lottery mode becomes a relatively disadvantageous lottery mode for the player, the RT state becomes a game state more disadvantageous than the non-RT state. Moreover, when a plurality of RT states are provided, the same applies to between the plurality of RT states. In this case, the RT state in which the lottery mode of the replay combination (in particular, the winning probability) is relatively advantageous to the player is called a "high RT state" or a "high probability replay state". The RT state in which the aspect (particularly, the winning probability) is relatively disadvantageous to the player is sometimes referred to as "low RT state", "low probability replay state", or the like.

The RT state can be transitioned to, for example, when any of the following transition conditions are satisfied. Moreover, when a plurality of RT states are provided, the same applies to between the plurality of RT states.
(1) When RB, BB or MB is won (2) When a combination of symbols related to RB, BB or MB is displayed (3) When RB state, BB state or MB state ends (4) RB, (5) (3) or (4) when a specific combination of symbols is displayed when BB or MB has not been won (not carried over) and neither RB, BB or MB has been won. When a predetermined number of games have been played after the transition condition is established

[4-5-3. AT state]
The pachi-slot machine 1 is capable of shifting to the AT state (activating the AT state) when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. It should be noted that it is also possible to configure so that such an AT state is not provided. It can also be configured to provide a plurality of AT states. The AT state is more advantageous than the state in which the AT state is not activated (non-AT state), for example, by informing the player of the information of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player when the above-described push win is won. It is a game state configured as a state.

In the case where multiple AT states are provided, the game period of each AT state (including the ease of extension, etc., if the period can be extended (or "additional"; the same applies hereinafter)), The degree of advantage of the player can be varied by varying the type of the notification target combination for which the stop operation information is notified, or the probability of occurrence of the notification of the stop operation information. Also, the conditions for transitioning to the AT state and the conditions for ending the game can be appropriately set according to game characteristics (however, the end due to the execution of limit processing, which will be described later, is excluded). Also, the AT state may be handled in the same way as the bonus state described above, and in this case may be referred to as a "pseudo-bonus state" or the like.

In addition, the AT state game period may be managed by the number of games (number of games played) as long as the period is appropriately managed (game number management). may be managed by (set number management). In addition, it may be managed by the number of payouts or the number of net increase (number of difference) during the AT state (number of payouts management, difference number management). In addition, it may be managed by the number of times (navigation count) that notification (for example, push order navigation at the time of winning a push order minor role) that affects the payout of medals in the AT state is performed (navigation count management). The same applies when the AT state is extended. Also, the game period given when shifting to the AT state and the game period given when the AT state is extended may be managed by different management methods. Moreover, when a plurality of AT states are provided, they may be managed by the same management method, or may be managed by different management methods.

[4-5-4. ART state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is established, it is possible to shift to the ART state (activate the ART state) by combining the high RT state and the AT state described above. That is, since the ART state means the AT state performed in the high RT state, at least the low RT state and the high RT state are provided as the RT state, and the state is shifted to the high RT state (or to the low RT state). Although it is different from the AT state in that control is performed (avoiding transition), the basic control is the same as the AT state (a high RT state as a result of notifying the information of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player). If the transition to the state (or the transition to the low RT state is avoided), it can be said to be synonymous with the AT state). In addition, when the transition condition of the ART state is satisfied, the state may be shifted to the AT state first, and then shifted to the high RT state to shift to the ART state. Alternatively, the high RT state and the AT state may be simultaneously ( Alternatively, the state may be shifted to the ART state by shifting at approximately the same time.

[4-5-5. Other game state]
It should be noted that the pachi-slot machine 1 can be provided with game states other than the various game states described above. For example, each mode (see FIG. 5 and FIG. 6) in an advantageous section to be described later is also a state in which a player plays a game, and is advantageous in determining whether or not to shift to an AT state as a pseudo-bonus state. Since the degree can be changed, these can be regarded as game states. Also, from the same point of view, for example, it is possible to provide a game state in which the degree of advantage of whether or not to shift to a bonus state can be varied. For example, when a bonus hand is won (carried over), the game state in which the combination of symbols related to the bonus hand is likely to be displayed by the stop control, and the combination of symbols related to the bonus hand are relative to this. By providing a game state that is difficult to be displayed on the screen, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player. Further, for example, a game state in which a bonus combination is won with a predetermined probability (easy to win) and a game state in which the bonus combination is won with a probability lower than the predetermined probability (relatively difficult to win) are provided. By doing so, it is possible to configure such that the degree of advantage of the player can be varied.

In addition, as a method for changing the degree of advantage of whether or not to shift to the AT state (including whether to extend the game period of the AT state in the AT state, the same applies hereinafter), the following method is adopted. You can also For example, a "special combination" can be determined as an internal winning combination. For the specific combination, the number of medals to be awarded varies depending on the player's stop operation mode (stop operation timing, pressing order, or a combination thereof). (For example, if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct answer), 8 coins will be paid out, and if inappropriate (wrong answer), 1 coin will be paid out or no payout will be made).

Then, when the specific combination is won in a specific game state, and when 8 coins are paid out, it is determined whether or not the advantage degree of whether or not to shift to the AT state in the current game is changed to an advantageous one. decision (whether or not to directly shift to the AT state, or whether or not to directly extend the game period of the AT state, which will be described as "advantageous decision" hereinafter) is not performed. On the other hand, if there are no payouts of 8 coins, the advantageous decision is made in the current game. Alternatively, if the specific combination is won in the above-described specific game state, and 8 coins are paid out, the advantageous decision is made in the current game. On the other hand, if 8 coins are not paid out, the advantageous decision is not made in the current game.

In this way, when a player plays a game in a specific game method, there are cases where an advantageous decision is made in the current game as a result of the game, and where the advantageous decision is not made (the advantageous decision is restricted). It can also be configured so that there is a case where the In addition, the player may change between the current game and the next game, and if such restrictions continue after the next game, the (next) player may suffer a significant disadvantage. Therefore, it is desirable that such restrictions be limited to the current game and not to continue after the next game. Such restrictions are also sometimes referred to as "penalties."

[4-6. Game section]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, in order to prevent gambling from becoming excessively high, it is possible to provide various game intervals as states in which the game is played with a concept different from the game state described above. An example of the game section will be described below. The game section is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section.

(Non-advantageous section)
The non-advantageous section is configured as a game period in which it is not possible to notify the player of a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player, and has the following requirements. The following requirements are only examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened, it can be changed accordingly.

(1) It is not possible to notify the player of advantageous stop operation modes (for example, push order navigation, etc.). Therefore, it is not possible to control to the AT state or ART state described above.
(2) When the set value is changed (changed in setting), or when an initialization condition such as "RAM abnormality" described later is met, a non-advantageous interval is set as an initial state.
(3) When the limit process described later is executed in the advantageous interval (that is, a predetermined value updated as the game progresses during the advantageous interval (for example, the advantageous interval game number counter and the advantageous interval payout counter described later) value) reaches a specified value (for example, 1500 games or 2400 sheets), a non-advantageous section is set as an initial state. Note that the predetermined value may be referred to, and if the predetermined value reaches a specific update value even before the predetermined value reaches the specified value, the non-advantageous section may be set on that condition. In addition, if a predetermined end condition is satisfied during the advantageous section and the end is determined (for example, if the configuration is such that a lottery for the end of the advantageous section is performed and the lottery is won, etc.), that condition will be used. A non-advantageous section may be set.
(4) In a non-advantageous section, processing related to an advantageous section (for example, processing for determining whether to transition to an advantageous section) can only refer to the determined internal winning combination. It is not possible to perform processing referring to various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games in the non-advantageous section (or the advantageous section before transition). To determine which internal winning combination has been determined, it is possible to refer to data directly indicating the internal winning combination, such as the winning number, or sub-flag (multiple roles) generated or converted from the data of the internal winning combination. as one piece of determination target data), it is also possible to indirectly refer to data indicating an internal winning combination.
(5) A non-advantageous section basically has one state, and multiple states cannot be set within the non-advantageous section. For example, it is not possible to set different states such that the non-advantageous section A after the end of the advantageous section is the non-advantageous section A, and the non-advantageous section B is the non-advantageous section after the setting change.

(advantageous section)
The advantageous section is configured as a game period in which it is possible to notify the player of a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player, and has the following requirements. The following requirements are only examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened, it can be changed accordingly.

(1) It is possible to notify the player of advantageous stop operation modes (for example, push order navigation, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to control to the above-described AT state or ART state.
(2) When the set value is changed (changed in setting), or when an initialization condition such as "RAM abnormality" described later is met, the advantageous section cannot be set as the initial state.
(3) When the limit process described later is executed in an advantageous section, it is necessary to terminate the advantageous section.
(4) In the advantageous section, processing related to the advantageous section (for example, determination processing of whether to shift the game state (mode) during the advantageous section, or whether to extend a specific game state (mode), etc.) , not only processing referring to the determined internal winning combination, but also processing referring to various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as the derived result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games in the advantageous interval. . Other examples of the various parameters that can be referred to include, for example, privilege information such as points that can be given according to the various parameters described above, the type of bonus state, the type of RT state, and the stop operation timing of one of the reels. , or the order of pressing.
(5) A plurality of states can be set within the advantageous section. For example, it is possible to set a state such as a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a CZ state that easily shifts to the AT state, or an AT state in which the expected value of increased medals is positive when a stop operation is performed according to the notification. Further, for example, in response to the decision to shift to the CZ state in the normal state, the CZ precursor may be set as a standby state until the transition to the CZ state actually occurs, and a precursor effect suggesting a transition to the CZ state may be performed. In response to the decision to shift to the AT state in the state, normal state or CZ state, the state is set as a waiting state until the actual shift to the AT state, and an indication effect suggesting the shift to the AT state can be performed. A state such as an AT precursor state can also be set according to game characteristics.
(6) It is possible to notify that the area is in an advantageous section by turning on the section lamp (status display unit) that can notify whether it is a non-advantageous section or an advantageous section (the section lamp is not lit). If you do, you can notify that you are in a non-advantageous section). It should be noted that the lighting start timing of the section lamp can be set to some arbitrary timing as described above. Basically, lighting may be started when a non-advantageous section transitions to an advantageous section, and lighting may continue until the transition to a non-advantageous section. However, if the transitioned advantageous section is in the normal state, the lighting may not be started, and the lighting may be started when the AT state is first entered. If the transitioned advantageous section is in the AT state, lighting may be started from that time.

[4-7. limiter]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, an upper limit (restriction) is set for the period in which the advantageous section continues continuously in order to prevent gambling from becoming excessively high due to the advantageous section continuing too long. is possible. Such an upper limit is called a "limiter". Also, in the present embodiment, the termination of the advantageous section by such a limiter is described as execution of limit processing or actuation of the limiter. An example of the limiter will be described below.

(game number limiter)
The number-of-games limiter is configured as a limiter that executes limit processing when the number of games (the number of games played) in the advantageous interval reaches "1500". For example, the advantageous interval game number counter, which will be described later, starts counting when the advantageous interval starts, and increments the count by one each time one game is completed. Then, based on the value of the advantageous interval game number counter reaching a specified value (for example, "1500" or more), the advantageous interval is forcibly played (for example, even if the AT state gaming period remains). Terminate it and move to a non-advantageous section. It should be noted that the number of games for which the game number limiter is activated can be set to any number of games up to the upper limit of "1500". Also, if the requirement for such a game number limiter is relaxed or tightened, it can be changed accordingly. Also, the gambling aspect may be suppressed step by step according to the number of games in the advantageous section.

(Payout number limiter)
The payout number limiter is configured as a limiter that executes limit processing when the number of payout medals in the advantageous section reaches "2400". For example, the advantageous section payout counter, which will be described later, starts counting from the start of the advantageous section, and each time medals are paid out, the corresponding number of medals (more specifically, the number of payouts minus the number of bets) a few minutes) add up the count. Then, based on the fact that the value of the advantageous section payout number counter reaches a specified value (for example, "2400" or more), the advantageous section is forced (for example, even if the AT state game period remains). Terminate it and move to a non-advantageous section. The number of payouts for which the number-of-payouts limiter operates can be set to an arbitrary number of payouts as long as the number of payouts is equal to or less than the upper limit of "2400". Also, if the requirements for such a payout number limiter are relaxed or tightened, it can be changed accordingly. Alternatively, the gambling aspect may be suppressed in stages according to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section.

Also, for example, the advantageous section payout number counter, which will be described later, counts the positive amount from the most recent lowest point, with the lowest point (starting point) at which the absolute number of medals has decreased the most from the start of the advantageous section. (That is, if there is no payout, the count is decremented, etc.). That is, the payout count limiter executes limit processing when a maximum of "2400" medals are paid out from when the number of medals increases during the advantageous section (for example, when the AT state is started). It can also be configured as a limiter that Also, for example, the advantageous section payout number counter, which will be described later, may simply count the actual payout number (that is, the payout number without subtracting the bet number) instead of the above-described net increase.

The pachi-slot machine 1 may execute limit processing in the advantageous interval using only the number-of-games limiter, or limit processing in the advantageous interval using only the number-of-payout limiter. Both of the number limiters may be used to limit the advantageous section. When both limiters are used, it is desirable to end the advantageous interval when the operation condition of one of the limiters is satisfied after the advantageous interval starts.

Also, the types of limiters are not limited to the game number limiter and payout number limiter described above. For example, the number of times of navigating the push-order minor combination during the AT state (that is, the number of times the information of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player for the combination related to the payout of medals) is a predetermined number (for example, "400" times). A navigation count limiter may be provided for executing limit processing when the number of times of navigation is reached. That is, as long as the gambling aspect can be appropriately suppressed, it is possible to execute limit processing using various game-related conditions.

[4-8. External signal]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed to output a plurality of types of external signals to the outside. For example, if the external signal 1 is turned on when the bonus state is started, and is turned off when the bonus state is terminated, the external data display device will also follow this. It is possible to perform an effect during the linked bonus state. Further, for example, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the BB state, the external signal 1 is turned off based on the termination of the BB state, and the external signal 1 is turned off based on the start of the MB state. If the external signal 2 is turned on in response to the termination of the MB state, and the external data display machine is turned off, not only the effect during the bonus state but also the bonus state is performed on the external data display machine. The number of times can be counted by type.

Further, for example, if the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the AT state and turned off based on the termination of the AT state, the external data display device can In conjunction with this, an effect during the AT state can be performed. Further, for example, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of a predetermined AT state, and the external signal 1 is turned off based on the termination of the predetermined AT state. If the external signal 2 is turned on when the AT state is started, and turned off when the specific AT state is finished, the external data display device can also be set to the AT state. It is possible not only to perform effects but also to count the number of ATs for each type.

Also, for example, the AT state is configured as an AT state for managing the number of sets, and when the first AT state of the first set is started, the external signal 1 is turned on, and the second and subsequent sets are started. If the external signal 2 is turned on every time the game is played, the number of initial wins in the AT state and the number of extensions in the AT state can also be counted on the external data display. It should be noted that the timing to turn on and the timing to turn off each external signal can be set as appropriate. That is, as long as the situation can be appropriately recognized by an external data display device, hall computer, or the like, the output mode of each external signal can be appropriately set. For example, the period from the OFF state to the ON state and to the OFF state again can adopt various conditions such as a predetermined time, one game, and a state change.

[4-9. command]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed so that a plurality of types of commands can be transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 . In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control circuit 100 and the sub-control circuit 200 cannot communicate with each other, and communication must be performed only in one direction from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. ing. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to timely transmit information (commands) for reporting changes in the state of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the sub-control circuit 200 . An example of such a command is described below.

The main control circuit 100 transmits an initialization command to the sub control circuit 200, for example, when a setting change operation is performed. The initialization command includes parameters specifying setting values, game states, and the like. Also, for example, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command is transmitted. The medal insertion command includes parameters for specifying the number of bets and the like. Also, for example, when a start operation is performed, a start command is transmitted. The start command includes parameters specifying internal winning combinations, game states, and the like. Also, for example, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command is transmitted. The lock command includes parameters specifying the contents of the lock effect. Also, for example, when the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start to rotate, a reel rotation start command is transmitted. The reel rotation start command includes parameters specifying that the rotation of the reels has started.

Also, for example, when a stop operation is performed, a reel stop command is transmitted. The reel stop command includes parameters specifying the reel to be stopped, the position at which the reel is to be stopped, and the like. Further, for example, when all the reels are stopped and the display combination (winning operation flag) is determined, the winning operation command is transmitted. The winning operation command includes parameters specifying the type of display combination, the content of the privilege to be given, and the like. Also, for example, when starting an advantageous interval, an advantageous interval start command is transmitted. The advantageous interval start command includes parameters for specifying the start of the advantageous interval, the mode (game state), and the like. Also, for example, when ending the advantageous section, an advantageous section end command is transmitted. The advantageous section end command includes parameters for specifying the termination of the advantageous section, the cause of the termination, and the like. Further, for example, when a settlement operation is performed, a settlement command is transmitted. The settlement command includes parameters for specifying the number of returned items and the like. Note that these are merely examples, and commands other than these can be transmitted as necessary, and unnecessary commands among these can be prevented from being transmitted.

[4-10. staging]
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, various effects are executed using various effect devices in order to increase the interest in the game, to inform the player of useful information, or to achieve the desired game characteristics. It is possible. An example of such effects will be described below.

[4-10-1. Main side production]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, the following effects can be performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side). As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is capable of informing information about the stop operation by means of the instruction monitor, which is also included in production in a broad sense.

(Rock production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect of stopping the progress of the game for a predetermined period (invalidating the game operation of the player for a predetermined period) can be performed. Such an effect is called a “lock effect” (or simply “lock”), and is also called a “freeze effect” (or simply “freeze”). It should be noted that it is possible to configure such that such a lock effect is not performed, and it is also possible to configure so that a plurality of types of lock effects can be performed.

Also, the game operation to be invalidated may be, for example, a start operation, a stop operation, or any other operation. For example, when the start operation is disabled for a predetermined period of time, the progress of the game is stopped for a predetermined period of time after all stop operations have been performed. Further, for example, when the stop operation is disabled for a predetermined period of time, the progress of the game is stopped for a predetermined period of time after the start operation is performed. In addition, when multiple types of lock effects are provided, the period during which the progress of the game is stopped (the period during which the player's game operation is disabled), the type of game operation to be disabled, etc. are set for each lock effect. You can do so.

(reel production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the effect display mode of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (not only the variable display mode but also the combination with the stop display mode) during the execution of the above lock effect. including) can be performed. Such an effect is called a "reel effect", and is also called a "symbol effect" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to configure such that such reel effects are not performed, and it is also possible to configure so that a plurality of types of reel effects can be performed. In addition, the case of "executing (executing) a lock effect" includes both cases in which reel effects are performed and cases in which reel effects are not performed.

The reel effect is, in short, to rotate or stop (temporarily stop) each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R regardless of the game operation of the player during the period in which the game operation of the player is invalidated. The performance is performed in Therefore, it is possible to set an operation pattern for performing such an effect operation without considering the rotation speed, the maximum number of sliding symbols, and the like. Also, by setting a plurality of operation patterns, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of reel effects. Also, by combining multiple types of reel effects and multiple types of lock effects, a wider variety of effects patterns can be set. It should be noted that any one of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be used for the reel effect, two of them may be used, or all three of them may be used.

(pseudo game)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect of performing a pseudo game can be performed during the execution of the lock effect. Such an effect is called a "pseudo game". It should be noted that it is possible to configure such a pseudo-game so as not to be performed, it is also possible to configure so as to be able to perform a plurality of types of pseudo-game. In addition, in the case of "executing (executing) the lock effect", it includes both cases in which pseudo-games are performed and cases in which they are not performed.

In short, the pseudo game accepts the game operation of the player in a pseudo manner during the period in which the game operation of the player is invalidated, thereby rotating or stopping (temporarily stopping) the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. It is a thing that directs by doing. In other words, the above-described reel effect is further effected by intervening the player's game operation. For example, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, the start lever 7, the respective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R, and the checkout button 9 are basically provided for the purpose of being used for game operations. Therefore, it is inherently undesirable to use it for purposes other than this. However, in the pseudo-game, it is possible to accept these operations on the premise that measures are taken so that the player does not misunderstand that the actual game is being played.

Here, an example is given and demonstrated about the flow of a pseudo-game. Pseudo-games, for example, are performed in the following flow.
(1) The player's actual start operation (where the execution condition is established and the pseudo-game starts)
(2) Pseudo-rotation of each reel (during pseudo-game)
(3) Receiving a pseudo stop operation, thereby temporarily stopping each reel (during pseudo game)
(4) After random delay processing, each reel actually starts spinning (actual game starts after simulated game ends)

Note that the random delay process is, for example, a state in which specific symbols are displayed side by side in the above situation (3), and when each reel starts rotating normally in the above situation (4), the player can make it easier to stop using a specific symbol as a mark (it may help the so-called "eye-pressing"), so to correct this, a random delay period is set for each reel. This is a process for starting the rotation after generating it (such a delay period is also called a "rearrangement period"). In addition, when each reel is temporarily stopped in the situations (3) and (4) described above, the phase signal in the excitation control of each stepping motor must always be a predetermined value so as not to misunderstand that it is completely stopped. It is desirable to alternate the reels forward and reverse for less than a period of time (eg, 500 ms).

As one of the measures described above, for example, when any combination of symbols is temporarily stopped in the above situation (3) (when the third reel is temporarily stopped and all the reels are temporarily stopped), Until the random delay process is started in the above situation (4), each reel may be slightly vibrated (swayed) up and down. As long as the phase signal changes in less than the above-mentioned predetermined time, when the first reel is temporarily stopped and when the second reel is temporarily stopped, such swinging is not performed. can be

In addition, as one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo-game lamp is provided to notify that a pseudo-game is in progress, and after the pseudo-game is started in the above-mentioned (1) situation, the above-mentioned (4 ) until the random delay process is started in the situation, the pseudo-game lamp is lit. In addition, the pseudo-game lamp is preferably installed above the operation unit that receives the game operation of the player and at a position that can be visually recognized during the game. Also, the pseudo-game lamp is an independent lamp that is not used for other purposes, and it is desirable that the entire display portion of the pseudo-game lamp is covered with a monochromatic border. In addition, it is desirable that the pseudo-game lamp has a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm and the surface area exceeds 642 square mm, etc.) including the explanation part of the pseudo-game lamp. In addition, the description part of the pseudo-game lamp is a description that can be recognized as a lamp for notifying that the pseudo-game lamp is in the pseudo-game (for example, "FREEPLAY", "pseudo-game effect", or " It is desirable that such a description portion occupies ⅓ or more of the surface area. It should be noted that the pseudo-game lamp may be controlled by the main control circuit 100 or by the sub-control circuit 200 .

In addition, as one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, after the pseudo-game is started in the above-mentioned (1) situation, the above-mentioned (4 ), the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220 (or both) may be used until the random delay process is started. In addition, it is desirable that the pseudo-game display is displayed above the operation unit that receives the game operation of the player and at a position that can be seen during the game (in this embodiment, the main display device 210 and the sub display device 220 are above the operation unit, so either can be used). In addition, the pseudo-game display has a certain surface area including the explanation part (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm, and if the display screen is less than 7 inches, the surface area exceeds 642 square mm) , if the display screen is 7 inches or more, the surface area is 8.2% or more of the entire screen, etc.). In addition, the description part of the pseudo-game display is a description that can be recognized as a display for notifying that the pseudo-game display is in the middle of a pseudo-game (for example, "FREEPLAY", "pseudo-game effect", Alternatively, it is desirable to have a description such as "reel automatic rendering", etc.), and it is desirable to have a size that can be read by the player without being concealed.

Also, for example, during the pseudo-game (for example, after the pseudo-game is started in the above-described (1) situation until the random delay process is started in the above-described (4) situation), the instruction monitor It is desirable to configure so that the information of the stop operation is not reported (if it is necessary to display the information of the stop operation on the instruction monitor in the game, the display is started at the timing when the random delay process is started). In this way, it is possible to further prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the actual game is being played during the pseudo-game. It should be noted that, if any of the above measures are taken, during the pseudo-game, even if the sub-side effect device (for example, the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220) is notified of the stop operation information good. Similarly, during the pseudo-game, the sub-side effect device may perform an effect (interlocked with the pseudo-game operation) according to the game result of the pseudo-game.

In addition, in an actual game, a test signal corresponding to the game operation of the player or the state in which the game operation becomes possible is output via the first interface board 301 for testing machine. , no test signal corresponding to the player's pseudo game operation or the state in which the pseudo game operation is possible is output. Therefore, during the pseudo-game, a test signal (pseudo-game signal) may be output so that the test machine can recognize that the pseudo-game is in progress. In addition, when the first interface board 301 for the testing machine receives a pseudo-game signal from the main control board 71, it outputs a signal for pseudo-game progress control to the main control board 71, so that the main control board 71 side simulates A game may progress (that is, the first test machine interface board 301 may have a pseudo-game progress function). In addition, when the first interface board 301 for testing machine is provided with such a pseudo-game progress function, a changeover switch capable of switching on/off of the function may be provided. As a result, it is possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to confirm the performance contents of the pseudo-game in the certification test (test shooting test) of the pachi-slot machine 1 .

[4-10-2. Sub side production]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, the following effects can be performed under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 side (sub-side). As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to notify the stop operation information by the main display device 210 or the like, but this is also included in the production in a broad sense.

(Normal performance)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect that the current game is completed (that is, one game ends) can be performed. Such an effect is called a "normal effect", and is also called a "single effect" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to configure such that such a normal effect is not performed, and it is also possible to configure so that a plurality of types of normal effect can be performed.

(Continuous production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is established, an effect that continues over a plurality of games (that is, continues for a plurality of games) can be performed. Such an effect is called a “continuous effect”, as well as a “continuous effect”. It should be noted that it is possible to configure such that such continuous effects are not performed, and it is also possible to configure so that a plurality of types of continuous effects can be performed.

(Operation linked production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect can be performed in which the content of the effect can be changed according to the player's operation. Such an effect is called an "operation-linked effect", and is also called a "button effect" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to construct such an operation-linked effect not to be performed, or to perform a plurality of types of operation-linked effect. Also, the operation-linked effect can be configured as a normal effect, or can be configured as a continuous effect. Also, the effect operation can include not only the operation to the effect button group but also various game operations.

Note that the various effects described above can be used for various purposes. For example, it can be used to suggest or notify a set value, an internal winning combination, a game state, a game section, details of awarding of a privilege, a period until the awarding of a privilege, and the like. It can also be used to suggest or notify the degree of advantage. Moreover, these uses are only examples.

(Other performances)
The pachi-slot machine 1 can perform effects other than the various effects described above. For example, various notifications to the player or the game parlor (for example, addiction prevention notification, forgotten item prevention notification, error state notification, demonstration state notification, etc.) are also included in the production in a broad sense as what is used for purposes other than the above. . As for the immersion prevention notification, for example, when the advantageous section ends, a warning or the like to that effect can be notified. In addition, for example, when an advantageous section ends or when a checkout operation is performed, a warning or the like indicating that fact can be notified. Further, the error state notification may be such that a warning or the like indicating the error is notified from the occurrence of the error until the error is resolved. In addition, the demonstration state notification can be made such that an empty machine or the like is notified when the period during which no game has been played reaches a predetermined period or when a settlement operation is performed.

[5. First gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 22, a specific example of the specifications relating to game characteristics of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described as a "first game machine". It should be noted that various specifications, functions, etc., described as the first game machine in this embodiment can be partially or wholly applied to other game machines described as other game machines in this embodiment. Various specifications, functions, and the like, which are described as other gaming machines in this embodiment, can be partially or wholly applied to the first gaming machine as described in this embodiment. In other words, an appropriate combination of these can be used as the invention according to the present embodiment.

First, in the first gaming machine, the activated line is defined as only one line of the above-mentioned "center line". In the first gaming machine, a non-bonus state and a bonus state are provided as game states. In addition, the non-bonus state is between 2BB flags in which "F_2BB" (a bonus combination that can be won only when two cards are bet. Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "2BB") described later, and between 2BB flags described later. Between the 3BB flags in which "F_3BB" (a bonus combination that can be won only in a 3-card bet state; hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "3BB") is carried over not flagged). Also, the bonus state includes a 2BB state that shifts when a combination of 2BB symbols is displayed, and a 3BB state that shifts when a combination of 3BB symbols is displayed. be.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to play a game with two medals bet (2 medals bet state) and with three medals bet (3 medals bet state). there is Note that "bet" means that the player inserts two or three medals into the medal insertion slot 5 for use in the game, or that the player operates the MAX bet button 6a or the 1 bet button 6b. 2 or 3 medals are awarded from credits, and 2 or 3 medals are automatically awarded by winning a replay role.

[5-1. Game Features of the First Gaming Machine]
Next, the game flow in the first gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a game state transition flow in a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section in the first gaming machine, and FIG. 6 is for explaining an example of each mode in the first gaming machine. FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 are diagrams showing examples of various tables in the first gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the first gaming machine, the state in which a player plays a game is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section. Increased sections (advantageous sections/pseudo bonuses) are provided. The non-advantageous section is a game state (non-AT state) in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. The performance section is a game state (non-AT state) in which information about the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is not notified, and is similar to the non-advantageous section in that it is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. , differs from the non-advantageous section in that mode transition is performed.

That is, the non-advantageous section is the initial state that is controlled when the game in the advantageous section is completed, when a setting change operation is performed, when other initialization conditions are satisfied, or when the factory is shipped. The effect section is a control state as a normal state in which the player can play a normal game by changing the expectation level of the increase section transition (given) by mode transition or the like.

On the other hand, the increasing section is a game state (AT state) in which information of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and is a game state that is advantageous to the player. That is, the increase interval is a control state as an advantageous state in which the player can increase medals. Note that both the performance section and the increase section are advantageous sections, and a series of advantageous sections are formed by shifting between these sections.

In the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7(a), in the non-advantageous section, a non-advantageous section sub-flag as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to the internal winning combination (see FIG. 10 described later) is determined. It should be noted that the sub-flag indicates an internal winning combination that plays a similar role (whether or not it is a lottery target combination, its winning probability, etc.) in various lotteries (various processes related to advantageous sections) related to game characteristics by the main control circuit 100. By grouping and allocating the same information, this is information for making the group identifiable. Since this eliminates the need to provide various data tables for each internal winning combination, the amount of data can be compressed, and pressure on the capacity of the main ROM 102 can be avoided. In the non-advantageous section, lottery using this non-advantageous section sub-flag is performed.

The non-advantageous section sub-flag “Ripbell” has internal winning combinations of “F_Replay A” (No. “3”), “F_Replay B” (No. “4”), and “F_Bell 123A1” to “F_Bell 321B2”. ” (No. “10” to No. “33”). The non-advantageous section sub-flag “Weak Che” is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_Cherry” (No. “5”). The non-advantageous section sub-flag “Watermelon” is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_Watermelon” (No. “9”). The non-advantageous section sub-flag “definite combination” is determined when the internal winning combination is either “F_definite cherry” (No. “6”) or “F_reach” (No. “8”). The non-advantageous interval sub-flag “Medium Che” is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_Middle Cherry” (No. “7”). It should be noted that, in the non-advantageous section, as in the advantageous section, the winning sub-flag and the winning sub-flag can be determined. Moreover, these correspondence relationships are not limited to those described above.

Further, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7(a), in the advantageous section, an advantageous section winning sub-flag as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to an internal winning combination (see FIG. 10 described later) is determined. Further, in the advantageous section, an advantageous section winning time sub-flag is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the combination of displayed symbols. In the advantageous section, a lottery is performed using these sub-flags for winning an advantageous section and sub-flags for winning an advantageous section.

The sub-flag “Bell” at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is any one of “F_Bell 123A1” to “F_Bell 321B2” (No. “10” to No. “33”). The sub-flag “Weak Che” at the time of winning an advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_Cherry” (No. “5”). The sub-flag “Watermelon” at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_Watermelon” (No. “9”). The sub-flag “fixed combination” at the time of advantageous section winning is determined when the internal winning combination is either “F_fixed cherry” (No. “6”) or “F_reach” (No. “8”). . The sub-flag “middle che” at the time of advantageous section winning is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_middle cherry” (No. “7”).

Advantageous section winning sub-flag "Tsutaribu 1" is set to "Right" when the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" (No. It is determined when the combination of symbols of "rising lips" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "rising lips"). Advantageous section winning sub-flag ``Common replay 2'' is set to ``Parallel It is determined when the symbol combination of "LIP" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "Parallel LIP").

Here, in the first gaming machine, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), the symbol combination of "rising to the right" is between the 3BB flags. Between the 2BB flags and between the non-flags, a combination of "parallel lips" symbols is displayed.

That is, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "Common Replay 1" is determined as a sub-flag at the winning of the advantageous section between the 3BB flags, and is advantageous between the 2BB flags and between the non-flags. As a sub-flag at the time of winning the section, "Tsutaribu 2" is determined. In the first gaming machine, when the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous zone are different in this way, various lotteries (for example, a pseudo-bonus transition lottery using a pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. The degree of advantage in the mode transition lottery using the mode transition lottery table shown in 8(f) is varied.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, for example, depending on whether it is between 3BB flags or between 2BB flags, "F_Replay A" (No. ) has been described as an example, but the manner in which the sub-flags fluctuate at the time of winning the advantageous section is not limited to this. For example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_Bell 123B1" (No. "12"), the stop control is made different between 3BB flags and 2BB flags. Therefore, when such a winning combination is won, the number of medals to be paid out is not changed (or may be changed), and the combination of displayed symbols is made different. A sub-flag may be determined. Then, the degree of advantage in various lotteries, which will be described later, may be changed in accordance with the difference in the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section.

Further, for example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"), regardless of which flag (between non-flags) the pressed position (stop operation timing) ) is appropriate, the combination of "watermelon" symbols is displayed. When a winning combination is won, different advantageous section winning time sub-flags may be determined depending on whether a prize can be won without any omissions or when omissions occur. Then, the degree of advantage in various lotteries, which will be described later, may be changed in accordance with the difference in the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section.

Further, for example, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), between the 3BB flags, the stop operation is in a specific manner (this particular manner is, for example, a predetermined stop operation It may be performed in any manner, such as a manner in which the hitting order (correct pressing order) is performed, a manner in which the pressing position (timing of the stop operation) is appropriate, and a manner in which these are combined), " A combination of symbols of "parallel lips" is displayed, and if it is not performed in a specific manner, a combination of symbols of "rising to the right" is displayed, thereby determining a sub-flag at the time of winning a different advantageous section You may do so. Then, the degree of advantage in various lotteries, which will be described later, may be changed in accordance with the difference in the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section.

That is, in the first gaming machine, it is possible for the final stop display mode to differ depending on the number of bets, the game state, the mode of the stop operation, or a combination of any of these regarding the specific combination, It is possible to apply all modes that make it possible to determine different secondary information according to different stop display modes, thereby varying the degree of advantage.

Returning to the description of the game characteristics of the first gaming machine. In the non-advantageous section, an advantageous section transition lottery is performed for each game. Specifically, the advantageous section transition lottery table shown in (b) of FIG. At a predetermined timing, a transition destination mode or the like is determined according to the non-game section sub-flag. In addition, when making this decision, if only the type of mode when shifting to the advantageous section is determined (in FIG. 5, "advantageous section start"), it is also possible to shift not only to the type of the mode but also to the pseudo bonus. There is a case where it is determined (in FIG. 5, “advantageous section start+pseudo bonus start”). However, in the non-advantageous section, it is also possible to have a specification in which it is not decided to shift to the pseudo bonus.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6, each mode in the first game machine will be described. In the first gaming machine, the mode is control information (which may be called a game state or a control state) for varying the degree of expectation of transition (granting) to the increase section (pseudo bonus) in the production section (normal game). Yes, in the production section (normal game), according to this mode, it is decided whether or not to transition to a pseudo bonus, to maintain the advantageous section, or to end the advantageous section and move to the non-advantageous section It is designed to

The start mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode because it is easy to stay when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (production section), and the expectation of shifting to a pseudo-bonus is relatively low (Fig. 7 (c)), and the likelihood of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see FIG. 8 (f), which will be described later). Although not shown, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games" in the start mode. The number of ceiling games is used to forcibly shift to the pseudo bonus when the period during which the transition to the pseudo bonus is not made reaches a certain period. Therefore, the smaller the number of ceiling games, the more advantageous the player, and the larger the number of ceiling games, the more disadvantageous the player.

The normal A mode is the easiest mode for a player to stay in the game, and is a relatively disadvantageous mode. (see FIG. 8(f)), and the likelihood of shifting to a more advantageous mode is relatively low (see FIG. 8(f) described later). In the normal A mode, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games". In FIG. 6, "approximately 999 G after the pseudo-bonus" means that after the pseudo-bonus is over, the game is shifted to an end A mode or an end-B mode, which will be described later, and 32 games are played in this mode without transitioning to the pseudo-bonus. After a game has been played and the normal A mode is selected when shifting from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section after the game is played, the apparent ceiling number of games is "965 games" + end A. This is expressed because it is the game period "32 games" in the mode or the end B mode + the number of games required to shift from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section. The same applies to the normal B mode, heaven preparation mode, and chance mode.

The normal B mode is relatively easy for the player to stay in the game and is a relatively disadvantageous mode, but it is more advantageous than the normal A mode. It is relatively low (see (c) of FIG. 7 described later), and the degree of expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 8 described later). In the normal B mode, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games".

In the heaven preparation mode, although the expectation of shifting to the pseudo-bonus is relatively low (see (c) of FIG. 7 described later), the number of ceiling games is set to "466 games", and when shifting to the pseudo-bonus , and after that, it is determined that the mode will shift to heaven mode (see (f) in FIG. 8, which will be described later), so in that sense, the mode is relatively advantageous.

Chance mode has a relatively high expectation of shifting to a pseudo-bonus (see (c) of FIG. 7 described later), and the ceiling number of games is set to "222 games", so it is relatively advantageous in that sense. mode. However, the degree of expectation for shifting to heaven mode is not high (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later).

End A mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode because it is easy to stay if you do not transition to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after transitioning to a pseudo bonus, and it is expected to transition to a pseudo bonus. is the lowest (see (c) of FIG. 7 described later), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 8 described later). In the end A mode, when 32 games are played without transitioning to the pseudo bonus after the pseudo bonus ends, the advantageous section itself ends and the game shifts to the non-advantageous section.

End B mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode, but it is more advantageous than End A mode because it is relatively unfavorable because it is easy to stay if you do not shift to Heaven mode (including Heaven preparation mode) after transitioning to a pseudo-bonus. mode, the expectation of shifting to a pseudo-bonus is relatively low (see (c) in FIG. 7 below), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is relatively low (see the diagram below 8 (f)). In the end B mode, as in the end A mode, when 32 games are played without shifting to the pseudo bonus after the end of the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section itself ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section. Note that the end A mode and the end B mode can also be collectively referred to as "end mode".

The security mode is a mode in which the player stays when Heaven C mode ends, and the degree of expectation for shifting to the pseudo-bonus is relatively high (see (c) of FIG. 7 described later), and the number of ceiling games is "32 games." , so it is a relatively advantageous mode in that sense. However, the degree of expectation for shifting to heaven mode is not high (see (f) of FIG. 8 described later). That is, when Heaven C mode ends, it is positioned as a mode for maintaining (guaranteeing) a relatively advantageous state for a certain period of time in order to prevent a decline in interest due to this.

Heaven A mode can also include the extension (addition) in the case of the specification that the pseudo bonus continues (AT state continues by determining extension (addition) during AT state. The same applies hereinafter), the degree of expectation to shift to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) of FIG. 7 described later), the number of ceiling games is set to "32 games", and the ceiling It is a relatively advantageous mode in which the probability of maintaining the mode (heaven mode loop rate) is set to a medium level. Although not shown in FIG. 6, for example, the ceiling mode loop rate may have a set difference. For example, when the set values are odd numbers (1, 3, 5), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 75%, and when the set values are even numbers (2, 4, 6), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 67%. The lottery value can also be set such that the higher the set value, the higher the ceiling mode loop rate. The same applies to Heaven B mode and Heaven C mode, which will be described later, and it is possible to provide a set difference in the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven B mode is a mode in which a series of pseudo-bonuses can be expected. , and the probability that the ceiling mode is maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set high, making it a relatively advantageous mode. That is, in terms of ceiling mode loop rate, this mode is more advantageous than Heaven A mode.

Heaven C mode is a mode in which a series of pseudo bonuses can be expected. ”, and the probability of maintaining the ceiling mode (heaven mode loop rate) is set to be relatively high, making it a relatively advantageous mode. That is, in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate, this mode is more advantageous than Heaven A mode and Heaven B mode. The heaven A mode, the heaven B mode, and the heaven C mode can be generically called "heaven mode".

Each of the modes described above is merely an example, and the configuration of the mode is not limited to this. Modes other than the above-described modes can be set, and some of the above-described modes can be set not to be set.

Further, although the non-advantageous section has been described as being relatively less advantageous than the advantageous section, the relationship between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section is not limited to such a mode. For example, when it is a non-advantageous section, the transition rate to the increased section is higher than when at least one or more modes are set in the advantageous section, or the average number of games required to transition to the increased section is shorter. It is also possible to set the specification such that the non-advantageous section is the most likely to be the increase section. By doing so, an incentive to play a game is generated even in a state where the non-advantageous section is confirmed after a setting change or the like. In addition, even if the lighting of the section lamp ends when 32 games have passed after the end of the pseudo-bonus, the most unfavorable state is not confirmed, so even in such a case, there is a motivation to continue the game. becomes. Also, so far, the presentation section has been described as a game state in which the information of the stop operation that is advantageous for the player is not notified, but compared to the increase section, a disadvantageous aspect (for example, reducing the frequency of notification or ), it is also possible to set the game state in which the information of the stop operation is notified.

Returning to the description of the game characteristics of the first gaming machine. In the performance section (normal game), first, a pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed with reference to the sub-flag at the time of advantageous section winning for each game. Specifically, the pseudo bonus transition lottery table shown in (c) of FIG. 7 is referred to, the internal winning combination is determined, and during the game after the advantageous zone winning sub-flag is determined according to the internal winning combination. At a predetermined timing, it is determined whether or not to shift to a pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag at the time of advantageous section winning. In addition, in (c) of FIG. 7, "non-winning" means not to shift to the pseudo bonus, "winning (current game)" means to shift to the pseudo bonus from the current game, and " "Winning (next game)" means shifting to a pseudo bonus from the next game.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when "winning (current game)" is determined, the game is started at the start of the current game, and when "winning (next game)" is determined, the game is started at the start of the next game. After the operation (stop operation) is disabled for a certain period of time, and during the disabled period, a reel effect (“red 7 aligned” effect) is performed in which “red 7” symbols are displayed in alignment on the main display window 4. , in a game in which a pseudo-bonus has started and a "red 7 matching" effect has been performed, if it is necessary to notify the information of the stop operation, at least the invalid period ends and the game operation (stop operation) is valid. (It may be before that, but not before the start of the random delay process described above), information about the stop operation is notified.

In the performance section (normal game), as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), when it is determined to shift to the pseudo-bonus, a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8 is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning sub-flag. Note that this transition destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus is finished. Also, as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus, and if the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the mode transition lottery described later. (at the time of winning) and mode transition lottery (at the ceiling) are not performed.

In the production section (normal game), as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), if it is not decided to move to the pseudo-bonus, for each game (more specifically, "F_replay A" or "F_replay B”), a pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed with reference to the sub-flag at the time of winning in the advantageous section. Specifically, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. At a predetermined timing (before the start of the game), it is determined whether or not to shift to a pseudo-bonus according to the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

In the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in (c) of FIG. 7, the sub-flag at the time of winning in the advantageous section "Tsut-rep 1" is decided rather than the sub-flag at the time of winning in the advantageous section at "Tsut-rep 1". The percentage of decisions to shift to a pseudo-bonus is higher in the case of However, the mode of giving preferential treatment to "Telephone 2" over "Telephone 1" is not limited to this. For example, when "Common 2" is determined as the sub-flag when winning an advantageous section, it may be decided to shift to a pseudo bonus with a predetermined probability, but "1" is determined as the sub-flag when winning an advantageous section. In this case, the transition to the pseudo-bonus may not be decided.

In the performance section (normal game), as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), when it is determined to shift to the pseudo-bonus, a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8 is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous zone winning sub-flag. Note that this transition destination mode may be a mode including a pseudo-bonus, or a mode after the pseudo-bonus is finished. As a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus, and when the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the later-described mode transition lottery (at the ceiling) is not performed.

In addition, in the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8, "Tsutaribu 2" was determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section rather than when "Tsutaribu 1" was determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section. In this case, the rate at which it is decided to shift to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player is high. However, the mode of giving preferential treatment to "Telephone 2" over "Telephone 1" is not limited to this. For example, when the sub-flag at the time of advantageous section winning is set to "2", it can be determined to shift to a relatively advantageous mode for the player with a predetermined probability. It may be arranged such that, when "pass 1" is determined, it cannot be determined to shift to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player.

In the effect section (normal game), as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), if it is not decided to move to the pseudo-bonus, the number of ceiling games is updated (additional method or subtraction method), and the ceiling game When the number reaches the number of ceiling games associated with the current mode (or predetermined at the time of transition to an advantageous section, etc.), it is decided to shift to a pseudo-bonus. In this case, it is possible to make sure that "win (current game)" is determined, or that "win (next game)" is always determined. Alternatively, any one of these may be determined by lottery.

When it is determined to shift to a pseudo bonus due to the number of ceiling games being reached in the performance section (normal game), a mode transition lottery (at the ceiling) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8 is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode. Note that this transition destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus is finished.

It should be noted that the processing related to the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) differ only in the type of sub-flag, and the rest is the same processing content, so the same lottery table and control flow can be controlled using In addition, the processing related to the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) differ only in the type of sub-flag, and the rest is the same processing content, so the same lottery table and control flow are used. can be controlled by

Further, if "winning (current game)" is not provided as the type of winning of the pseudo-bonus, at the timing when the advantageous zone winning sub-flag is determined, the advantageous zone winning sub-flag has already been determined, Since the number of ceiling games can also be updated, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), and the pseudo-bonus transition process when reaching the ceiling can be performed together in one process. can. Similarly, the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), and the mode transition lottery (at the ceiling) can be collectively performed in one process.

Returning to the description of the game characteristics of the first gaming machine. As described above, in the production section (normal game), it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus, and when the pseudo bonus is started ("pseudo bonus start" in FIG. 5), the shift to the increase section (pseudo bonus) . Also, as described above, in the effect section (normal game), if the end A mode or the end B mode is controlled and 32 games are completed without transitioning to the pseudo bonus (in FIG. 5, "advantageous section end (Via end A/B)”), move to the non-advantageous section. Further, when the conditions for limit processing shown in FIG. 16, which will be described later, are met, the advantageous section is forcibly ended ("advantageous section end (limit processing)" in FIG. 5), and as a result, Move to a non-advantageous section.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), when the pseudo-bonus is started, a ceiling reduction lottery is performed. Specifically, the ceiling reduction lottery table shown in (e) of FIG. 8 is referred to, and whether or not to reduce the number of ceiling games after the end of the pseudo-bonus is determined according to the current mode. In (e) of FIG. 8, "non-winning" means that the ceiling game number is not shortened, and "winning (ceiling game number = 0 update)" means that after the pseudo bonus ends, regardless of the mode , means that the ceiling game number to be set is set to "0" (reduced). Note that the ceiling shortening lottery can be performed not only when the pseudo bonus is started, but also every game during the pseudo bonus.

As a result of the ceiling reduction lottery, if it is decided not to shorten the number of ceiling games, when the pseudo bonus ends, if you do not have the 1G consecutive stock described later, the number of ceiling games will be reduced according to the current mode. is set (in the end mode, it is not set because the advantageous section ends after 32 games have elapsed (it is cleared accordingly), but the number of ceiling games may be temporarily set here) , the pseudo-bonus ends ("pseudo-bonus ends" in FIG. 5), and the game shifts to the production section (normal game). On the other hand, if it is decided to reduce the number of ceiling games as a result of the ceiling reduction lottery, "0 games" is set as the number of ceiling games when the pseudo-bonus ends. As a result, the pseudo bonus is started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus is finished. In this case, since the pseudo bonus is started when the ceiling game number is reached, the above-described mode transition lottery (at the ceiling) is performed.

In the increase section (pseudo bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in a game in which "fixed hand" or "medium check" is determined as a sub-flag at the time of advantageous section winning). . Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8 is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning sub-flag. It should be noted that the transition destination mode may be determined even when a sub-flag at the time of winning an advantageous section other than the above is determined, but in this case, in principle, a relatively disadvantageous mode than the current mode will be transitioned. In order not to be determined as the first mode, another mode transition lottery table having a lottery value different from the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8 may be referred to.

In the increase section (pseudo bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in the game in which "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is won). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8 is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous zone winning sub-flag. In this case, similarly to the above, in principle, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. A different mode transition lottery table may be referred to.

In the increase section (pseudo bonus), 1G consecutive lottery is performed for each game. Specifically, the 1G-run lottery table shown in (d) of FIG. 7 is referred to, and whether or not to generate a 1G-run is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of advantageous section winning or the sub-flag at the time of advantageous section winning. be done. In (d) of FIG. 7, "non-winning" means that 1G-runs are not generated, and "winning (1G-runs + 1)" means that the right to generate 1G-runs (1G-run stock) is one. It means that it is granted (the 1G ream stock counter is incremented by 1). A plurality of 1G ream stocks (up to 255 reams) can be stocked (stored) by a 1G ream stock counter. Therefore, a plurality of 1G ream stocks may be granted during one pseudo-bonus. Also, the 1G-run lottery table can be configured so that a plurality of 1G-run stocks can be awarded in one 1G-run lottery.

When the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G-run stock counter is 1 or more (that is, if you have 1G-run stock), one 1G-run stock is consumed (1G-run stock counter is 1 is subtracted), and the pseudo bonus is started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus is finished. In this case, since the pseudo bonus corresponding to the right of 1G ream stock starts, the mode transition lottery described above is not performed. On the other hand, when the pseudo-bonus ends, if the value of the 1G-run stock counter is not 1 or more (that is, if you do not own 1G-run stock), and if you have not won the above-mentioned ceiling reduction lottery, The ceiling game number is set according to the current mode (in the end mode, the advantageous section ends after 32 games have passed (and is cleared accordingly), so it is not set, but here the ceiling game number is assumed to be may be set), the pseudo-bonus ends (“pseudo-bonus ends” in FIG. 5), and the production section (normal game) is entered.

In addition, if you win the ceiling shortening lottery and you also have 1G consecutive stock, the result of the ceiling shortening lottery will be prioritized, and after the pseudo bonus according to the ceiling shortening is executed, the pseudo bonus according to the 1G consecutive stock will be given. Alternatively, the 1G ream stock may be given priority, and after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G ream stock is executed, the pseudo bonus corresponding to the ceiling reduction may be executed. In the latter case, it is sufficient to separately store information that can carry over the fact that the ceiling is shortened.

In the first game machine, as an example of the configuration of the increase section (pseudo-bonus), it is possible to obtain a maximum of 275 cards by continuing for "55 games", but the configuration of the pseudo-bonus is limited to this. do not have. For example, the pseudo-bonus is configured as a "pseudo BB (big bonus)", and a "pseudo-RB (regular bonus)", which is a pseudo-bonus that continues for "22 games" and allows up to 110 cards to be obtained, is installed. You may do so. In this case, in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, when reaching the ceiling, and 1G consecutive lottery, when it is decided to move to a pseudo-bonus (to grant rights), the type (for example, "pseudo BB" and or "pseudo RB") is determined with a predetermined probability (for example, each 50%). It should be noted that the value of the "pseudo RB" differs from that of the "pseudo BB" (more specifically, the value of the "pseudo BB" is lower than that of the "pseudo BB"). BB", but by lowering the bernavi rate (probability of notification of stop operation information), it is possible to make a difference in the maximum obtainable number of sheets and to make the value different. Further, when the "pseudo RB" is started, a reel effect in which "BAR" symbols are displayed together in the main display window 4, or a reel effect in which "red 7-red 7-BAR" is displayed is performed. You should do it like this. Furthermore, the increasing section is not limited to being configured as a pseudo bonus. For example, it can be configured as an AT state or an ART state in which the number of games to be continued (game period) can be changed.

Also, during the pseudo-bonus, if the conditions for executing limit processing shown in FIG. ), and as a result, it shifts to a non-advantageous section.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the above-described game flow is based on the premise that the game is basically played in a three-coin bet state. Therefore, when a game is played with two bets, various lotteries using, for example, (a) to (d) of FIG. 7, (e) and (f) of FIG. The number of ceiling games is not updated either. Further, when a game is played with two coins bet during the pseudo bonus, the medals are not increased during the pseudo bonus because the medals are not increased in the two bet state. In other words, the first gaming machine is configured such that the player is basically at a disadvantage when playing a game in a two-coin bet state.

Here, when the game is played with two bets, lotteries related to the advantageous section (AT) (for example, (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. 8, etc. are used). Although various lotteries and processing (for example, updating the ceiling game number, etc.) are not performed, the advantageous section game number counter for the above-mentioned game number limiter and the advantageous section payout number counter for the above-mentioned payout number limiter are updated. should be carried out. These limiters have the function of appropriately suppressing gambling by limiting the upper limit of the number of games you can stay in the advantageous section and the number of winning cards, so if you bet two cards, these counters will not be updated. As a result, there may be cases where the upper limit of the number of staying games or the number of winning cards in the set advantageous section is exceeded due to the intervening game with two bets, and as a result, the gambling aspect cannot be suppressed appropriately. in order to obtain Therefore, the limiter counter is desirably configured so that it can be updated every game regardless of the number of bets.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the above-described game flow is basically based on the premise that the game is played in the non-bonus state. Therefore, when a game is played in the bonus state (2BB state and 3BB state), for example, various lotteries using (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. It is not performed, and the number of ceiling games is not updated. In addition, when the bonus state occurs during the pseudo-bonus, the bonus state is configured as a state in which the expected increase in medals is lower than in the non-bonus state (more specifically, in the non-bonus state with three bets). , In some cases, the pseudo bonus does not become an increase section. That is, the first gaming machine is constructed so that the player may be at a disadvantage if he/she plays the game in the bonus state.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, it is recommended to play a game with a 3-card bet state between 2BB flags (in this embodiment, the 3-card bet state between 2BB flags is referred to as a "recommended game state”, and other states may be described as “non-recommended gaming states”). That is, in the first gaming machine, 2BB is a bonus combination that is won only when 2 symbols are bet, and between the 2BB flags, the combination of symbols related to 2BB wins only when 2 symbols are bet, and wins when 3 symbols are bet. It is configured not to Also, 3BB is a bonus combination that is won only when 3 symbols are bet, and between the 3BB flags, the combination of symbols related to 3BB wins only when 3 symbols are bet, and does not win when 2 symbols are bet. In addition, there is no case where 3BB wins between 2BB flags, and there is no case where 2BB wins between 3BB flags.

Then, in the first gaming machine, using these configurations, for example, 2BB is won in the 2-card bet state between non-flags (2BB is not won), and then 3-card bet state after 2BB flags are won. , the game can be played in the above-described recommended game state without worrying about whether or not the bonus combination is won.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the ceiling reduction lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the ceiling shortening lottery table shown in FIG. While the ceiling reduction lottery is won with a probability of /8 (32/256), the ceiling reduction lottery is not won in other modes. That is, in the case of a mode with a ceiling number of games of "32 games", the "32 games" may be shortened to "0 games", and in the case of a mode with a ceiling number of games greater than that, There is no case where the number of ceiling games is shortened.

Note that even in a mode in which the number of ceiling games is greater than "32 games", the number of ceiling games is lower than in a mode in which the number of ceiling games is "32 games" (for example, 1/64). may be determined to be shortened.

Also, the manner in which the number of ceiling games is shortened is not limited to that described above. For example, if the "32 games" are shortened to a smaller predetermined number of games (0 to 31 games), the same action and effect can be achieved. Alternatively, in the ceiling reduction lottery, the number of games to be shortened may be determined in advance.

Further, the trigger for performing the ceiling reduction lottery is not limited to the above. For example, during the pseudo-bonus, a ceiling-shortening lottery may be performed for each game. Also, in the advantageous section (normal game), when the current mode is one of the security mode, heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode, a ceiling shortening lottery will be performed for each game. can be In these cases, the sub-flag for advantageous section winning and the sub-flag for advantageous section winning may be referenced to determine whether or not the ceiling reduction lottery is won.

Further, as described above, in the first gaming machine, a 1G consecutive lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the 1G run lottery table shown in (d) of FIG. 7, 1G run stock may be awarded regardless of the current mode. That is, the right to continue the pseudo-bonus can be granted regardless of whether the mode is the ceiling game number of "32 games" or not.

Note that the mode of granting the right is not limited to the one described above. For example, when the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the 1G consecutive lottery is not performed in consideration of the fact that the ceiling short lottery is performed, and the number of ceiling games is greater than that of "32 games". By performing the 1G consecutive lottery when , it is possible to prevent the gambling aspect of the game from becoming excessively high.

Further, the trigger for performing the 1G consecutive lottery is not limited to the one described above. For example, a 1G run lottery may be performed even in an advantageous section (performance section) other than the pseudo bonus, and the 1G run stock stocked as a result may be consumed in the next pseudo bonus.

Although illustration is omitted in FIGS. 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when the current mode is heaven mode at the start of the pseudo-bonus or during the pseudo-bonus, it is in an advantageous state. A special bonus mid-effect for suggesting something is executed with a predetermined probability. Therefore, when the special bonus middle effect is executed, it is possible to expect that the ceiling reduction lottery will be executed. In addition, the effect during the special bonus may be executed with a probability of 100% when the ceiling reduction lottery is won. In this way, for example, when the special bonus mid-effect is executed at the start of the pseudo-bonus, it is suggested that the player is staying in the heaven mode at least, and furthermore, it is expected that the player may have won the ceiling reduction lottery. can make you feel. Further, the effect during the special bonus may be executed at a predetermined probability or at a probability of 100% even when the 1G consecutive lottery is won during the pseudo bonus. In this way, (1) heaven mode only, (2) heaven mode + ceiling short lottery, (3) heaven mode + 1G consecutive lottery, (4) heaven mode + ceiling short lottery + 1G consecutive lottery, (5) 1G consecutive lottery Various possibilities, such as winning only, can be suggested, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Thus, in the first gaming machine, when it is determined that the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) ends and the control is again made to the advantageous state within a predetermined period (for example, 32 games) (for example, , heaven mode), the period can be further shortened. It is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game by allowing the game to be played in a state where the degree of advantage is as high as possible.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, even if it is not confirmed that the advantageous state will be controlled again within a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends (for example, in the end mode), the right (for example, , 1G ream stock) may start the advantageous state again, so the player's expectation can be heightened and the interest in the game can be improved.

Also, although not shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when a “fixed combination” is determined as a sub-flag at the time of winning an advantageous section (that is, “F_fixed cherry” or “F_ If "reach" is determined as an internal winning combination), and as a result of the above mode transition lottery, if it is determined to shift to heaven C mode, the probability is 1/2 (this probability is arbitrary ), a special lock effect can be executed. It should be noted that even when the advantageous section winning sub-flag "Medium Che" is determined (that is, when "F_Middle Cherry" is determined as the internal winning combination), the player can set the advantageous section winning sub-flag "Fixed hand". ” is determined, so if the sub-flag “Medium Che” is determined when winning the advantageous section, it is possible to receive the same benefits as when “fixed hand” is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section. Similarly, a special lock effect may be made executable.

Here, since the "fixed combination" is a combination that also confirms the transition to the pseudo-bonus (see (c) in FIG. 7), when the special lock effect is executed, the player can transition to the pseudo-bonus and heaven C mode. It is possible to recognize that there was a problem, and the interest of the player is greatly increased. The special lock effect is, for example, an effect in which the game operation (stop operation) is disabled for about 20 seconds at the start of the game. During this period, a special reel effect may be performed in which each reel vibrates or rotates in the reverse direction, or a special image or the like that is not normally displayed may be displayed on the main effect display section 21. can be Also, a special piece of music that is not normally output may be output. Of course, it is also possible to produce an effect by combining these. In addition, the game operation is not invalidated, but these effects can be performed until the player performs the next game operation (that is, the effect can be executed to the end or canceled halfway). The player may be allowed to decide whether to proceed with the game).

However, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 16, which will be described later, for example, even if the user stays in Heaven C mode, the execution of limit processing may force the advantageous section to end. , it may not be desirable to perform the special lock effect described above many times.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special lock effect is executed only once within the same series of advantageous sections. Specifically, in a series of advantageous sections, when it is decided to execute a special lock effect first, the special lock effect is executed, but after that, within the same series of advantageous sections, the same conditions are applied. To control so that a special lock performance is not executed even when it is established. In addition, as a method, when the special lock effect is executed once, information indicating that is stored, and after that, if the information is stored in the same series of advantageous sections, the special lock effect is performed in the first place. The decision as to whether or not to execute the effect may not be made, or the decision may be made, but if the information is stored, the result of the decision indicates that the effect will be executed. may be rewritten to indicate that it is not executed. Then, the stored information may be cleared when the advantageous section ends.

Note that the manner in which execution of the special lock effect is restricted is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit number of times that the execution of the special lock effect is restricted may be set as "two times" or "three times" instead of "one time". That is, the execution of the special lock effect is limited, but the upper limit may be set as multiple times. This can be appropriately set according to the expected value of the number of balls to be released per special lock effect.

Further, the conditions for determining whether or not the special lock effect is to be executed are not limited to those described above. That is, in the above, the mode transition is performed with the winning of the "fixed combination" as a trigger, and on the condition that the mode is Heaven C mode, it is determined whether or not the special lock effect is to be executed. However, for example, there are cases where the transition to heaven C mode is triggered by a trigger other than the winning of the "fixed hand" (see (f) in FIG. 8), so the special lock effect is executed in these cases as well. A special lock effect is executed with a predetermined probability (the probability may be the same as in the case of winning a “fixed hand”, or the probability may be different). It may be determined that

Further, for example, it is assumed that, with the winning of the "fixed combination" as a trigger, first, whether or not the special lock effect is to be executed is determined, and when it is determined that the special lock effect is to be executed, the heaven You may make it transfer to C mode. That is, the special lock effect may be executed in response to the determination to shift to the heaven C mode, or the heaven C mode may be executed in response to the determination to perform the special lock effect. You may make it shift to .

Further, for example, the degree of progress of the game during the advantageous section may be employed as the condition for determining whether or not the special lock effect is to be executed. For example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter, which will be described later, is less than "750", or when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, or the control game number counter, which will be described later is less than "1201". , it is determined whether or not the special lock effect is to be executed as described above, and when the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter described later becomes "750" or more, or when the advantageous game number counter described later becomes "750" or more When the value of the section payout number counter or the payout number counter for control reaches '1201' or more, it is not determined whether or not the special lock performance is to be executed in the same series of advantageous sections thereafter. can also

Thus, in the first gaming machine, the game period of the series of advantageous sections is limited to a fixed period (see FIG. 16 described later). In the same series of advantageous sections, even if control information with a high degree of advantage for the player (for example, heaven C mode) is set multiple times, a special effect (for example, a special lock effect) is generated each time. is controlled so as not to occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting while preventing the gambling aspect of the game from becoming excessively high.

Further, in the first gaming machine, in a series of advantageous sections, it is determined that control is performed in an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) upon winning of a specific combination (for example, a "fixed combination"). , control information that is highly advantageous to the player (for example, Heaven C mode) may be set. Even if such a case occurs multiple times within the same series of advantageous sections, control is performed so that the special effect (for example, special lock effect) is not performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting while preventing the gambling aspect of the game from becoming excessively high.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine secondary information (for example, a sub-flag at the time of advantageous section winning) according to the determined internal winning combination, and secondary information according to the combination of displayed symbols ( For example, it is possible to determine an advantageous zone winning sub-flag), and whether or not to give an advantageous state (for example, pseudo bonus) in which information about the player's stop operation is notified according to the determined secondary information It is determinable.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, not only when the internal winning combination is determined, but also when the combination of symbols is displayed, it is possible to give a sense of expectation regarding the provision of an advantageous state. It is possible to diversify the playability related to giving.

Further, in the first gaming machine, information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination and information corresponding to the combination of displayed symbols are both managed as common secondary information. It is possible to suppress an increase in the control load and the amount of information regarding provision.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when the gaming value bet is the first amount (for example, 3 coins), the first special role (for example, 3BB) can be won, while the second special role (for example, , 2BB) are not allowed to be won. Further, when the gaming value bet is the second amount (for example, 2), the second special combination is allowed to be won, but the first special combination is not allowed to be won. Further, when a specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is won, if the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags) is displayed, a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, "rising right") is displayed. If there are two special permission states (for example, between two BB flags), it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lips") (see FIG. 15, which will be described later).

In the first gaming machine, different secondary information can be determined depending on whether a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed or a combination of specific symbols is displayed. That is, in the first gaming machine, even if the same special role is determined, the content of the decision regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed according to which special permission state it is in. It is possible to further diversify the playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information regarding the provision of states.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not to provide an advantageous state at least when a specific combination is won and a combination of specific symbols is displayed.

Here, in the first gaming machine, since both the combination of the predetermined symbols and the combination of the specific symbols are combinations of symbols related to replay, even if either one is displayed, it is called an operation of replay. The same benefits will be granted.

Note that the manner in which the same privilege is granted is not limited to the above. For example, the specific winning combination is configured as a specific small winning combination for giving a game value. Then, when a specific minor combination is won, for example, in the first special permission state, one coin (this value is arbitrary, and may be another value equal to or lower than the bet gaming value, or bet display a combination of predetermined symbols (combination of symbols pertaining to the granting of game value corresponding to "rising to the right") to which a game value is awarded (which may be a value exceeding the game value of the second special permission); If so, the combination of specific symbols (combination of symbols related to the granting of game value equivalent to "parallel lip") that gives the same number of game values as when the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed is displayed. may

In addition, both the combination of predetermined symbols and the combination of specific symbols are combinations of “lost” symbols (however, since it is possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state, a different symbol from the case of pure “losing”) A combination of identifiable symbols may be used). Even in this case, the value remains the same.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, even when the same special combination is determined, depending on which special permission state it is in, the content of determination regarding the provision of an advantageous state can be varied. , it is possible to diversify the playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information regarding the provision of the advantageous state. In addition, in a game in which a specific combination is determined, the same privilege is granted regardless of the special permission state, so even if the game characteristics are changed, the player will not be directly disadvantaged. It is possible to prevent it from being covered.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when the specific combination is won, when the second special permission state is established, when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, the combination of the specific symbols can be displayed. It may be configured so as not to allow the combination of specific symbols to be displayed when the stop operation is not performed in the mode.

Then, it may be possible to decide whether or not to give an advantageous state at least when a specific combination is won and a combination of specific symbols is displayed. If the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, even if it is possible to make the degree of advantage in giving an advantageous state different between when the combination of specific symbols is displayed and when the combination of specific symbols is not displayed. good.

Further, when a specific combination is won, if the first special permission state is established, a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and if the second special permission state is established, the stop operation is performed in a specific mode. is performed, a combination of specific symbols may be displayed, and when a stop operation is not performed in a specific mode, a combination of predetermined symbols may be displayed.

In this case, the specific combination is determined when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate for at least one reel (in this embodiment, this may be described as "pressed position ○" or "correct pressed position"). When a combination of specific symbols is displayed and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (in this embodiment, this may be described as "pressed position x" or "incorrect pressed position"), the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. Can be configured as displayed. As a result, the degree of advantage in giving an advantageous state can be varied due to (the timing of) the player's stop operation, so the player can concentrate more on the game, and the interest in the game can be improved. can.

Further, as described above, the specific combination can also be configured as a specific small combination. In this case, when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate for at least one reel (in the case of the pressed position ◯), the specific symbol is displayed. A combination is displayed and a predetermined number of game values are awarded, and when the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (in the case of the pressed position x), a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values are awarded. can do. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same privilege). Also, a predetermined number of game values may be awarded that is greater than the specific number. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game values may be awarded that is smaller than the specific number. Also, at least one of the combination of the specific symbols and the combination of the predetermined symbols may be used as the combination of symbols when a failure occurs. That is, either the predetermined number or the specific number may be set to "0". As a result, it is possible not only to change the degree of advantage related to the provision of an advantageous state due to (the timing of) the player's stop operation, but also to directly change the content of the privilege, so that the player can The player can concentrate more on the game, further diversify the playability, and improve the amusement of the game.

Also, if there is only one type of specific combination, the timing at which the stop operation is appropriate is limited, so it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations with different timings at which the stop operation is appropriate. For example, in one reel, when the timing of the stop operation is the first timing, an appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the first timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed. When the timing of the stop operation is the second timing different from the first timing, the proper stop operation is performed and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed. When the timing is other than the second timing, there is no proper stop operation and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and the timing of the stop operation is the first timing and the second timing. When the third timing is different, an appropriate stop operation is performed and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the third timing, the appropriate stop operation is not performed and the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed. A third special combination may be provided, and these may be won with the same winning probability.

Also, in this case, for the specific combination, a combination of specific symbols is displayed when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of correct pressing order), and a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed when the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of incorrect pressing order). Can be configured as displayed. As a result, the degree of advantage for giving an advantageous state can be changed due to the player's stop operation (procedure), so the player can concentrate more on the game, and the interest in the game can be improved. can.

In addition, the specific combination can be configured as a specific small combination as described above. In this case, when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of the correct pressing order), a combination of specific symbols is displayed and a predetermined number of games are played. Values are given, and when the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of incorrect answer pressing order), a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values are given. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same privilege). Also, a predetermined number of game values may be awarded that is greater than the specific number. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game values may be awarded that is smaller than the specific number. Also, at least one of the combination of the specific symbols and the combination of the predetermined symbols may be used as the combination of symbols when a drop occurs. That is, either the predetermined number or the specific number may be set to "0". As a result, it is possible not only to change the degree of advantage related to the provision of an advantageous state due to the player's stop operation (procedure), but also to directly change the content of the privilege, so that the player can The player can concentrate more on the game, further diversify the playability, and improve the amusement of the game.

Also, if there is only one specific combination, the appropriate batting order is also limited, so it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations with different appropriate batting orders. For example, when it is the first stop on the left, an appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when it is the first stop on the center and right, an appropriate stop operation is not performed and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed. When it is the first specific combination and the middle first stop, the combination of specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when it is the left/right first stop, the specific symbols are displayed without an appropriate stop operation. The second special combination is not displayed, and when it is the first stop on the right, it is an appropriate stop operation and the combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when it is the first stop on the left and middle, it is not an appropriate stop operation. A third specific combination in which a combination of specific symbols is not displayed is provided in the third combination, and these can be won with the same winning probability.

Up to this point, in the unit game in which the specific role is won, due to the stop operation mode (at least one or both of the timing of the stop operation and the batting order), the transition determination process to the advantageous section in the non-advantageous section, and the advantageous section (Including pseudo-bonus transition lottery, mode transition lottery, and other processing for changing the advantage of the gaming situation in the advantageous section) regarding the granting of an advantageous state. Of these, changes that are relatively disadvantageous to the player (which may be disadvantageous as a result) can be regarded as the aforementioned penalty. Therefore, when such a change occurs, the configuration may be such that an arbitrary effect (warning notification) for calling attention can be generated.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a specific winning combination is won, the possibility of providing an advantageous state is higher when a combination of specific symbols is displayed than when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. It's becoming That is, assuming that three cards are bet, the second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags) is a state in which an advantageous state is given more preferentially than the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags). is.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a predetermined combination (for example, "push order bell B" described later) is won, if the first special permission state is met, the combination of given symbols (for example, 8 payouts) regardless of the batting order While the combination of symbols to become) is displayed, in the second special permission state, if the hitting order is the predefined correct answer pressing order, the combination of the given symbols is displayed, but the hitting order is predefined If it is not in the given correct order of pressing, the combination of given symbols is not displayed, and the game value is not given, or only a smaller amount of game value is given than when the combination of given symbols is displayed. It is configured to display a combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols that results in one payout). That is, if the operation of the advantageous state is not taken into consideration, the first special permission state is a state in which the provision of game value is given more preferentially than the second special permission state.

That is, even if the player is in the non-recommended gaming state, if the player plays the game with three bets between the 3BB flags, the probability of giving the advantageous state is not favored, but the game value when the advantageous state is not activated is increased. Since the award probability is given preferential treatment, the game can be played in a state in which the difference in slope value between when the advantageous state is activated and when it is not activated is relatively small. In this way, a state in which the player's game value is less likely to decrease, although the possibility of the player's game value being able to increase rapidly decreases, can be defined as, for example, a "stable state".

On the other hand, if the player plays the game in the recommended game state, the probability of giving the advantageous state is preferential, but the probability of giving the game value when the advantageous state is not activated is not favored, so the advantageous state is activated. The game can be played in a state in which the difference in the tilt value between when it is activated and when it is not activated is relatively large. In this way, a state in which the player is likely to be able to rapidly increase the game value, but the game value of the player is likely to decrease can be defined as, for example, a “stormy state”.

Here, the method for creating the two states of the stable state and the rough sea state is not limited to the one described above. For example, in the "stable state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, while raising the probability of transition of the pseudo-bonus more than "rough sea state", in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the probability of transition to heaven mode is higher than "rough sea state" Lower. In addition, in the "rough sea state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, while lowering the transition probability of the pseudo-bonus than in the "stable state", in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the transition probability of heaven mode Increase. In this way, it is possible to create a state in which it is easy to hit the pseudo-bonus at the beginning in the "stable state" but it is difficult to make a succession. state can be created. As described above, the predetermined combination stop control may vary between the 2BB flags and the 3BB flags, or may be different (that is, no preferential treatment between the 3BB flags).

[5-2. Symbol arrangement configuration of the first gaming machine]
Next, referring to FIG. 9, the symbol arrangement configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of the symbol arrangement table of the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first gaming machine, "red 7", "BAR", "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", "red blank", "yellow blank", " 10 kinds of patterns of "white blank 1" and "white blank 2" are arranged at the positions shown in FIG. 9 on each of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R. Further, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol.

[5-3. Internal Winning Combination Configuration of First Gaming Machine]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15, the internal winning combination configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the internal lottery table of the first gaming machine. 11 to 14 are diagrams showing an example of the symbol combination table of the first gaming machine. Also, FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, the display combination, etc., of the first gaming machine. That is, hereinafter, which symbol is selected according to the type of internal winning combination that is drawn by lottery in the first gaming machine, and the stop operation mode (that is, the batting order, stop operation timing, etc.) when each internal winning combination is won. (which can also be rephrased as a display combination, a winning combination, a stop display mode, a display result, etc.) will be displayed.

First, in the first gaming machine, in the internal lottery process (see FIG. 26) described later, each internal winning combination shown in FIG. 10 is won with the probability shown in FIG. Combinations of symbols permitted to be displayed when each internal winning combination is won are as shown in "corresponding symbol combination" in FIG. In FIGS. 11 to 14, "BB" indicates a combination of symbols for a bonus hand, "REP" indicates a combination of symbols for a replay hand, and "FRU" indicates a combination of symbols for a small hand. is shown.

"F_2BB" can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags) in a 2-coin bet state, while a game is played in a 3-coin bet state. It is configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination when the winning combination is determined. In a game in which "F_2BB" is won in a two-bet state, or in a game in which "losing" between 2BB flags, "BB01" is displayed if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, and a 2BB state (based on 2BB) is displayed. bonus status). On the other hand, even between two BB flags, "BB01" is not displayed when three cards are bet.

"F_3BB" can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags) in a 3-coin bet state, while a game is played in a 2-coin bet state. It is configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination when the winning combination is determined. In a game in which "F_3BB" is won in a three-bet state, or in a game in which "lost" between 3BB flags, "BB02" is displayed if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, and a 3BB state (based on 3BB) is displayed. bonus status). On the other hand, even between the 3BB flags, "BB02" is not displayed when two cards are bet.

In the 2BB state and the 3BB state, the lottery value in the "bonus state" column in FIG. 10 is referred to determine the internal winning combination (the number of possible coins to start the game is only 3 bets). During the 2BB state and the 3BB state, it is always controlled to the state (RB state) in which the RB, which is the first class special item, is in operation. In addition, in the RB state, control is repeated such that when winning occurs twice or the game is played twice after activation, the control is once terminated and then activated again. In addition, in the first gaming machine, the condition for ending the 2BB state is that more than one medal has been paid out in the 2BB state, and the condition for ending the 3BB state is that more than 176 medals have been paid out in the 3BB state. has been paid out.

Here, when the 2BB state or the 3BB state ends, special mode transition processing is performed. For example, when transitioning to the bonus state (during the bonus state, the mode transition is not performed, so it is synonymous with when the bonus state ends), that is, if the current mode is the "start mode", the transition destination mode is "start mode". Also, if the current mode is one of the "normal A mode", "normal B mode", "paradise preparation mode", and "chance mode", the transition destination mode is the "normal A mode". Also, if the current mode is either "end A mode" or "end B mode", the transition destination mode is "end A mode". Also, if the current mode is any one of "guaranteed mode", "heaven A mode", "heaven B mode", and "heaven C mode", the destination mode will be "guaranteed mode".

"F_Replay A" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, between non-flags and between 2BB flags, regardless of the stop operation mode, one of "REP64" to "REP72" Since these are to be displayed, they can be collectively called “parallel lips.” Also, “REP64” to “REP71” can be collectively called “lower stage lips.” ) is displayed and replay is awarded. On the other hand, between the 3BB flags, regardless of the stop operation mode, "REP73" (because this is to display the "Replay" symbol in an upward-sloping manner, this can be called an "upward-sloping lip"). It is displayed and replay is granted.

"F_Replay B" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that the internal winning combination can be determined in the 3-coin bet state, but it can be configured so that the internal winning combination is not determined in the 2-coin bet state. When the internal winning combination is determined, "parallel replay" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode in any state, and a replay is awarded.

"F_Cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that the internal winning combination can be determined in the 3-coin bet state, but it can be configured so that the internal winning combination is not determined in the 2-coin bet state. When the internal winning combination is determined, in the double-bet state, the "middle stage reply" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-card bet state, any one of "REP28", "REP60" to "REP63" if the pressed position is ○ for at least the left reel 3L (these are for displaying the "cherry" symbol on the lower row of the left reel 3L). Therefore, these can be collectively referred to as "cherry lips") are displayed, and a replay is granted. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, other replies (for example, "REP57" to "REP59") are displayed and a replay is granted.

"F_definite cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that the internal winning combination can be determined in the 3-coin bet state, but it can be configured so that the internal winning combination is not determined in the 2-coin bet state. When the internal winning combination is determined, in the double-bet state, the "middle stage reply" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-card bet state, if the pressing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", at least for the left reel 3L, if the pressing position is ○, any of "REP42" to "REP56" (these are The symbol "Cherry" is displayed in the lower part of the left reel 3L. For example, symbols such as "REP42" are also displayed on the other reels to increase the expectation of the player. (which can be collectively referred to as "determined cherry slip") is displayed, and a replay is granted. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, other replies (for example, the above-mentioned "Cherry Lip" or "REP29" to "REP41") are displayed, and a replay is awarded. In addition, when the pressing order is either "Battering order 5" or "Battering order 6", the "middle stage reply" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded.

"F_middle cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that the internal winning combination can be determined in the 3-coin bet state, but it can be configured so that the internal winning combination is not determined in the 2-coin bet state. When the internal winning combination is determined, in the double-bet state, the "middle stage reply" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-card bet state, if the pressing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", at least for the left reel 3L, if the pressing position is ○, any of "REP15" to "REP19" (these are Since the "cherry" symbol is displayed in the middle row of the left reel 3L, these can be generically called "middle stage cherry lips") are displayed, and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, other replies (for example, "REP20" to "REP27") are displayed, and a replay is awarded. In addition, when the pressing order is either "Battering order 5" or "Battering order 6", the "middle stage reply" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded.

"F_Reach" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that the internal winning combination can be determined in the 3-coin bet state, but it can be configured so that the internal winning combination is not determined in the 2-coin bet state. When the internal winning combination is determined, in the double-bet state, the "middle stage reply" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-bet state, if the pressing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", regardless of the stop operation mode, any of "REP01" to "REP14" (these are customarily used by players It is configured as a combination of symbols that can confirm (or suggest) a transition to a state that is advantageous to the player, and these can be collectively referred to as "reach eyes") is displayed, and replay is possible. Granted. In addition, when the pressing order is either "Battering order 5" or "Battering order 6", the "middle stage reply" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded.

"F_Watermelon" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, if the pressed position is ◯ for each reel, one of “FRU10” to “FRU12” (since these are displayed side by side with “watermelon” symbols, these are selected). "watermelon") is displayed, and three medals are paid out if three medals are bet, and two medals are paid out if two medals are bet. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, either "FRU08" or "FRU09" (because these are not displayed with "watermelon" symbols side by side, they can be collectively called "watermelon spill"). is displayed and one medal is paid out. In addition, in the case of the pressed position x, it is also possible to cause a dropout to occur so that no medals are paid out.

"F_bell 123A1", "F_bell 123A2", "F_bell 132A1", "F_bell 132A2", "F_bell 213A1", "F_bell 213A2", "F_bell 231A1", "F_bell 231A2", "F_ "Bell 312A1", "F_Bell 312A2", "F_Bell 321A1", and "F_Bell 321A2" can be determined as internal winning combinations regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that these can be collectively referred to as "push order bell A".

As shown in FIG. 15, "push order bell A" is a small push order combination with 6 choices (any one of "hitting order 1" to "hitting order 6" is the correct hitting order). , and when it is determined as an internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct order of pressing, "Right falling bell" ("FRU03"), "Upper bell" ("FRU01" and "FRU02") ), "middle bell" ("FRU04"), "right rising bell" ("FRU05"), "mountain bell" ("FRU06"), and "lower bell" ("FRU07") is displayed, and 8 medals are paid out if 3 coins are bet, and 2 coins are paid out if 2 coins are bet. On the other hand, when the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct order of pressing, if the first stop operation is correct, the rest of the stop operations have a probability of 1/2 at the pressed position ◯, and at the pressed position ◯. If there is, one of the winning "one-coin" ("FRU13" to "FRU116") is displayed, and one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, a drop occurs and medals are not paid out. Also, if the first stop operation is not correct, the rest of the stop operations have a probability of 1/8 that the pressed position will be ◯, and if the pressed position is ◯, which one of the winning “one-card roles” will be displayed. , one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, a drop occurs and medals are not paid out.

"F_bell 123B1", "F_bell 123B2", "F_bell 132B1", "F_bell 132B2", "F_bell 213B1", "F_bell 213B2", "F_bell 231B1", "F_bell 231B2", "F_ "Bell 312B1", "F_Bell 312B2", "F_Bell 321B1", and "F_Bell 321B2" can be determined as internal winning combinations regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that these can be collectively referred to as "push order bell B".

As shown in FIG. 15, the "push order bell B" does not have a small push order win between the 3BB flags in the 2-bet state and the 3-bet state. When an internal winning combination is determined, one of the above-described "bells" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and if 3 medals are bet, 8 medals are paid out, and if 2 medals are bet, 2 medals are paid out. medals are paid out.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the "push order bell B" is pressed in states other than between the 3BB flags in the 3-bet state (between the non-flags in the 3-bet state and between the 2BB flags in the 3-bet state). If the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct order, one of the above-described "bells" will be displayed and eight medals will be awarded. paid out. On the other hand, when the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct order of pressing, if the first stop operation is correct, the rest of the stop operations have a probability of 1/2 at the pressed position ◯, and at the pressed position ◯. If there is, one of the winning "one-coin roles" is displayed, and one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, a drop occurs and medals are not paid out. Also, if the first stop operation is not correct, the rest of the stop operations have a probability of 1/8 that the pressed position will be ◯, and if the pressed position is ◯, which one of the winning “one-card roles” will be displayed. , one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, a drop occurs and medals are not paid out.

"F_RB combination 8 cards" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination in the bonus state. When the internal winning combination is determined, one of the above-described "bells" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and 8 medals are paid out.

"One F_RB combination" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination in the bonus state. When it is determined as an internal winning combination, one of the above-mentioned "one-card combinations" (more specifically, "FRU117" to "FRU120" are added) is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and one card is displayed. medals are paid out.

The internal lottery table shown in FIG. 10, the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, and the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the display combination shown in FIG. It is not limited to the embodiment.

For example, in the first gaming machine, in a 2-bet state in which ``BB01'' can be displayed when ``losing'', ``BB02'' can be displayed when ``BB01'' is missed and ``losing''. In the 3-bet state, when ``BB02'' is missed and ``losing'' occurs, and when ``losing'' occurs due to 3-betting between 2BB flags, it is 2-betting between 3BB flags. "Loss" may occur in various situations, such as when "losing" due to an event, or "losing" due to missing a "lower winning combination". Therefore, in order to make the combinations of symbols displayed as "lost" different in some or all of these cases, combinations of these different symbols are defined in advance in the symbol combination table, and the determined internal winning combinations are determined. By allowing these to be displayed as ``combination of corresponding symbols'' depending on the condition, the combination of symbols related to ``missing'' to be displayed according to the state or the like can be changed.

[5-4. Limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of each limit process in the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 16, in the first gaming machine, normal limit processing (number of games), normal limit processing (number of payouts), special limit processing (number of games), special limit processing (number of payouts), semi-limit processing ( Number of games) and semi-limit processing (number of payouts) are executed. Note that this is an example of executable limit processing, and limit processing other than each of these limit processing can be executed. You can also prevent it from happening.

The normal limit process (the number of games) is executed when the value of the advantageous interval game number counter becomes "1500" or more (that is, when the games in the advantageous interval are played 1500 times in succession). In addition, the advantageous section game number counter starts counting the number of games played when the advantageous section (including the effect section) starts, and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit process) It is designed to be cleared (initialized) after completing the counting. Also, the number-of-games-in-advantage-zone counter counts whether the number of bets is two or three. In addition, the advantageous section game number counter performs the counting even in the 2BB state and the 3BB state.

When the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated), regardless of whether it is during the production section or during the increase section (pseudo bonus), the advantageous section is forcibly ended, and the non-advantageous section move to Also, at this time, information about the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling the effect section or the increase section, information regarding the current mode, information regarding the game period of the pseudo bonus, information regarding the number of ceiling games and whether or not the ceiling is shortened) Information, various information obtained during the advantageous interval such as the value of the 1G ream stock counter, and various information necessary for controlling the advantageous interval) are all cleared (initialized).

The normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes "2401" or more (that is, when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section exceeds 2400). The advantageous section payout number counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, "net increase (difference number)") from the start of the advantageous section (including the performance section). When the interval ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit processing), the count is ended and cleared (initialized). Also, the advantageous section payout number counter counts both when the number of bets is 2 and 3. In addition, the advantageous section payout number counter performs the counting even in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. In addition, the advantageous section payout number counter counts appropriately according to the actual number of payouts (for example, "-2" or "-3") when, for example, "lose" or "dropout" occurs during the advantageous section. value is subtracted. Therefore, if the number of medals does not increase and decreases after the advantageous section starts, the value may be negative (or if the value is negative, "0" is always maintained). can also be configured to be That is, the advantageous section payout number counter can count the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section from the lowest point to the defined highest point (difference number: 2400 medals).

When the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (actuated), regardless of whether it is in the production section or in the increase section (pseudo bonus), the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, and the non-advantageous section move to Also, at this time, all the information about the above-mentioned advantageous section is cleared (initialized).

The special limit process (the number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter becomes "1445" or more (that is, when the games in the advantageous section are played 1445 times in succession). In addition, the control game number counter starts counting the number of games played when the advantageous section (including the performance section) starts, and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit process) It is designed to be cleared (initialized) after completing the counting. Also, the control game number counter counts when the number of bets is three, and does not count when the number of bets is two. In addition, the control game number counter performs the counting in the non-bonus state, and does not perform the counting in the 2BB state and 3BB state. Of course, the control game number counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section game number counter.

When the special limit processing (the number of games) is executed (activated), if it is during the pseudo bonus (that is, if it is during the increase section), the pseudo bonus is performed without forcibly ending the pseudo bonus in the middle. is terminated, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated and shifted to the non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all the information about the above-mentioned advantageous section is cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if it is not during the pseudo bonus (that is, if it is during the performance section), first, the game is forcibly shifted to the pseudo bonus. That is, even if the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery is not won, the special limit process (the number of games) is executed to transfer to the pseudo-bonus. Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus is finished, the advantageous section is forcibly ended and transferred to the non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all the information about the above-mentioned advantageous section is cleared (initialized).

Here, the value of the advantageous section game number counter for which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed (activated) is "1500", whereas the special limit process (number of games) is executed (activated). Focusing on the point that the value of the control game number counter is "1445", the maximum number of games (continuable period) during the pseudo-bonus is "55 games" in the first gaming machine (Fig. 5), this difference takes into consideration the playable period during the pseudo bonus.

That is, the normal limit processing (the number of games) is executed when the game is played for a predetermined regulation period in the advantageous section in order to suppress the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit processing (the number of games) is executed immediately after or during the start of the pseudo-bonus, the player will have a sense of distrust and loss, and the interest in the game will decrease. Sometimes. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special limit processing (the number of games) is performed in the game that is before the game in which the normal limit processing (the number of games) is executed by the continuation possible period (55 games) per increase section. By executing this, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust or a sense of loss due to the fact that the pseudo bonus ends in the middle.

From this point of view, the timing at which the special limit process (the number of games) is executed (activated) is not limited to the above. For example, the special limit processing (number of games) is executed in the game that is before the normal limit processing (number of games) by the continuation possible period (55 games x 2 sets = 110 games) per two increases. may be made. In addition, for example, in order to give a slight grace period, the continuation possible period (55 games) + grace period (2 games) per increase section is before the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. Special limit processing (the number of games) may be executed in the game of . Also, for example, in the case of specifications such as passing through a precursor state before transitioning to a pseudo bonus, and if the maximum number of games in this precursor state is "4 games", normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. The special limit process (the number of games) may be executed in a game that is before the game in which the continuation possible period (55 games) per increase section + the maximum sign period (4 games) is before the game. That is, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (actuated) may be any timing before the timing at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. It is assumed that it can be set as appropriate according to the game specifications.

The special limit process (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the number-of-payouts counter for control becomes "2126" or more (that is, when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous interval exceeds 2125). Note that the payout number counter for control starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, "net increase (difference number)") from the start of the advantageous section (including the performance section). When the interval ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit processing), the count is ended and cleared (initialized). Also, the control payout counter counts when the number of bets is 3, and does not count when the number of bets is 2. Also, the control payout number counter performs the counting in the non-bonus state, and does not perform the counting in the 2BB state and 3BB state.

In addition, the control payout number counter is decremented by a value that is appropriately counted according to the actual payout number (for example, "-3", etc.) when a "loss" occurs during the advantageous interval. However, the control payout number counter does not cause a "dropout" (or a difference) when a "dropout" occurs during the advantageous section (at least when a difference occurs from the maximum value of the medal payout number). count the number of medals paid out. Specifically, for example, in a game in which "push order bell A" is won with a three-bet, if the batting order is appropriate, the payout number (maximum value) of medals is "8" (the difference is "8"). +5”), while if the batting order is not appropriate, if the pressing position is appropriate, the number of medals paid out will be “1” (“-2” as the difference), and if the pressing position is not appropriate. The number of medals to be paid out will be "0" ("-3" as the difference number) due to the occurrence of a dropout, but the control payout counter will indicate the difference number " +5 sheets" are counted.

Further, for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout counter becomes larger than the value of the control payout counter due to the activation of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, etc., the value of the control payout counter becomes the advantageous section payout counter. Corrected to the value of the section payout number counter. It should be noted that the control payout number counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section payout number counter.

When the special limit processing (the number of payouts) is executed (actuated), if it is during the pseudo bonus (that is, if it is during the increase section), the pseudo bonus is not forcibly terminated in the middle. is terminated, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated and shifted to the non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all the information about the above-mentioned advantageous section is cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if it is not during the pseudo bonus (that is, if it is during the performance section), first, the game is forcibly shifted to the pseudo bonus. That is, even if the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery is not won, the special limit process (the number of payouts) is executed to transfer to the pseudo-bonus. Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus is finished, the advantageous section is forcibly ended and transferred to the non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all the information about the above-mentioned advantageous section is cleared (initialized).

Here, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter for which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed (operated) is "2401", whereas the special limit process (payout number) is executed (operated). Focusing on the fact that the value of the number-of-games-for-control counter is "2126", in the first gaming machine, the maximum number of coins obtained in the pseudo bonus (amount of game value that can be given) is "275". (See FIG. 5), this difference takes into consideration the amount of game value that can be given in the pseudo bonus.

That is, the normal limit processing (the number of payouts) is performed when a predetermined amount of game value is granted in the advantageous section in order to suppress the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit processing (payout amount) is executed immediately after the start of the pseudo-bonus or during it, the player will have a sense of distrust and loss, and the interest in the game will decrease. may be lost. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, a game value amount that is less than the game value amount for which the normal limit processing (payout number) is executed is given by the amount of game value that can be given per increase section (275 coins). By executing special limit processing (the number of payouts) at times, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust or loss due to the pseudo bonus ending in the middle.

From this point of view, the timing at which the special limit process (number of payouts) is executed (actuated) is not limited to the above. For example, when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount for which normal limit processing (payout number) is executed is given by the amount of game value that can be granted per two increases (275 coins x 2 sets = 550 coins) A special limit process (number of payouts) may be executed. Also, for example, in order to give a slight grace period, the amount of game value that can be granted per increase section (275 coins) + grace period is greater than the amount of game value for which normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed. The special limit process (the number of games) may be executed when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount (8 cards) to be played is awarded. That is, the timing at which the special limit processing (payout amount) is executed (actuated) may be any timing before the timing at which the normal limit processing (payout amount) is executed. It is assumed that it can be set as appropriate according to the game specifications.

In semi-limit processing (the number of games), the value of the control game number counter is added to the value of the 1G consecutive counter (if the ceiling reduction lottery is won and the ceiling is shortened, "1" is added). ) is multiplied by “55” (that is, the period during which the pseudo bonus can be continued), and the result is “1390” or more. For example, if the value of the 1G run counter is "1" and "the ceiling is shortened", the value of the latter is "55×2=110", so the value of the control game number counter is "1280". , semi-limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated).

In the semi-limit process (number of payouts), the value of the control payout counter is added to the value of the 1G counter (if the ceiling reduction lottery is won and the result is "with ceiling reduction", "1" is added ) is multiplied by “275” (that is, the amount of gaming value that can be imparted with the pseudo bonus), and is executed when the result of the addition becomes “1851” or more. For example, if the value of the 1G counter is ``1'' and ``with ceiling reduction'', the value of the latter is ``275×2=550'', so the value of the payout number counter for control is ``1301''. ”, the quasi-limit process (the number of payouts) is executed (actuated). In addition, since the semi-limit process (number of games) and the semi-limit process (number of payouts) both regulate the same content, after one operating condition is satisfied and activated, the other operating condition Even if is established, it is not necessary to operate redundantly.

When semi-limit processing (number of games) or preparation limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (activated), the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery and ceiling reduction lottery are executed during the pseudo bonus in a series of subsequent advantageous sections. will not be. That is, the extension of the game period in the increasing interval is suppressed. Note that the method of suppressing the extension of the game period in the increasing interval is not limited to this. For example, in the above-mentioned 1G run lottery, the winning probability of the 1G run may be lower than usual, and in the above-mentioned ceiling reduction lottery, the winning probability of the ceiling reduction may be lower than usual. . That is, although the above-described 1G consecutive lottery and ceiling reduction lottery itself are executed, it may be made difficult to win these lotteries. Further, for example, in the performance section after execution of the semi-limit process (the number of games), the lottery value to be won in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery may be lowered to make it difficult to shift to the pseudo-bonus. Alternatively, the lottery value for determining a mode transition advantageous to the player in the mode transition lottery may be lowered to make it difficult for the pseudo bonuses to continue.

In addition, when semi-limit processing (number of games) or semi-limit processing (payout number) is executed (operated), in a series of subsequent advantageous sections, during the production section, the "fixed hand" (( Special processing is performed when a) is won. In the following, this special processing will be described by taking as an example a case where the "fixed hand" is "F_fixed cherry" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "fixed cherry").

When neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated, if the "fixed cherry" is won during the production section (may be during the increase section), a pseudo-bonus transition lottery At , "win (next game)" is determined (see (c) in FIG. 7). In addition, in the first gaming machine, since the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L is a symbol that the player has a high degree of expectation for, in a game in which the information of the stop operation is not reported, the player is left first. It is a general procedure to perform a stop operation with one stop and aiming at a "cherry" symbol (aiming at a "BAR" symbol as a guideline). Therefore, when a game is played according to a general procedure, when a "fixed cherry" is won, first, the "cherry" symbol is stopped on the lower stage of the left reel 3L at the left first stop. In addition, when neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated, if the "fixed cherry" is won, the left first stop ("batting order 1" and "batting order 2") ”) may be notified. Further, "win (next game)" is not limited to the pseudo bonus starting from the next game, but may be the pseudo bonus starting from the next game.

Here, a skillful player stops aiming at the "BAR" symbol also on the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, for example, in order to further discriminate whether it is a "weak che" or a "determined cherry". perform an operation. As a result, the "BAR" symbols are aligned in the middle of each reel, and it can be recognized that the "definite cherry" has been won (see, for example, "REP42" in FIG. 11). On the other hand, an unskilled player, for example, does not perform the stop operation aiming at the "BAR" symbols on the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, or is unable to perform the stop operation, and is thus "weak" from the stop display mode. In some cases, it may not be possible to determine whether it is a "fixed cherry" (see, for example, "REP28" in FIG. 11).

In the first gaming machine, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (payout number) is in operation, the "fixed cherry" is won and the "fixed cherry" is won. symbol combination is displayed, a special winning sound is output. In addition, when "Definite Cherry" was won, the combination of "Definite Cherry Lip" symbols was not displayed, but even if the combination of "Cherry Lip" symbols was displayed, the special winning sound It is designed to be output. Note that the special winning sound may be output with a probability of 100%, or may be output with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50%).

In any case, when neither semi-limit processing (number of games) nor semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, if the "fixed cherry" is won, "red 7 matching" will be performed at the start of the next game. ' effect is performed to inform that the pseudo bonus is to be started, and the pseudo bonus is to be started.

On the other hand, after either the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (payout number) has been activated, if the "fixed cherry" is won during the production section (may be during the increase section), the pseudo-bonus transition Although "winning (next game)" is determined once in the lottery (see (c) in FIG. 7), this determination result is rewritten to "winning (current game)" by executing special processing. Then, at the start of the game this time, it is notified that the pseudo bonus is started by performing the "red 7 matching" effect, and the pseudo bonus is started.

At this time, in this game, the stop operation for displaying the symbol combination of "middle stage" without displaying the combination of "determined cherry lips" (including the combination of "cherry lips"). Information notification (special notification) is performed. For example, in the first gaming machine, a special notice to the effect that the right first stop ("batting order 5" and "batting order 6") should be made (see FIG. 15). As a result, when neither semi-limit processing (number of games) nor semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is in operation, the flow of the game such as "Determined Cherry Lip" is displayed → Pseudo bonus starts from the next game. After either the quasi-limit process (number of games) or the quasi-limit process (number of payouts) has been activated, a pseudo-bonus will start from the current game → a stop operation will be performed according to the special notification, resulting in a game called "middle rep" display. is changed to the flow of Note that the special notification may be performed under the control of the main (main control board 71) side. It may be controlled only by the sub (sub control board 72) side.

In addition, after either the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts) has been activated, even if the "fixed cherry" is won, the "fixed cherry" is issued despite the special notification. When the symbol combination of "cherry lips" is displayed, no special winning sound is output.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as an internal winning combination, basically, the stop operation procedure is not reported. For this reason, assuming that the stop operation procedure is notified and the "middle comment" is displayed only when the above-mentioned special notification is performed, if such a state occurs, one of the The player clearly recognizes that the quasi-limit processing has been activated, and as a result, there is a possibility that the interest in the game is reduced. Therefore, during the advantageous section, regardless of whether any semi-limit process is in operation (or after any semi-limit process has been activated), "F_replay A" or When "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the same notification as the special notification may be made with a predetermined probability. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural about the special notification. Also, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as an internal winning combination, the notification similar to the special notification may be performed when the pseudo-bonus transition lottery is won. Further, in this case, in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, even if "winning (current game)" can be determined with a predetermined probability. good.

So far, in order to activate the normal limit process, the special limit process, and the semi-limit process, the explanation has been given by taking the example of monitoring the game period of the advantageous section using the "number of games" and the "number of payouts". The conditions for executing each limit process are not limited to those described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the control payout number counter, and the value of the 1G run counter, when each limit process is executed. And whether or not to shorten the ceiling (that is, variables for activating the semi-limit process) can be appropriately changed according to game specifications, market trends, and the like.

Also, the method for monitoring the game period of the advantageous section is not limited to the one described above. For example, if the "navigation count" is used to monitor the game period of the advantageous section, normal limit processing (navigation count), special limit processing (navigation count), or semi-limit processing (navigation count) number of times) can also be executed. That is, any element (parameter) can be adopted as long as it is an element (parameter) whose value can be counted in order to monitor the gaming period of the advantageous section, and the adopted element is the value for which normal limit processing is performed. , a value for which special limit processing is executed, and a value for which semi-limit processing is executed, each limit processing can be executed in the same manner as described above.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) and the specific state (for example, production section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the game period in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined period (for example, , the value of the advantageous interval game number counter is "1500" or more), or the gaming value given in the series of advantageous intervals reaches a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous interval payout number counter is "2401" or more). ), this series of advantageous intervals is forcibly ended, but the game period in this series of advantageous intervals is a specific period shorter than a predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445"). or more), or when the amount of gaming value given in this series of advantageous intervals becomes a specific amount smaller than a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter is "2126" or more), If it is in an advantageous state, the series of advantageous sections is terminated when shifting to a specific state.

That is, in the first game machine, the series of advantageous intervals is not forcibly ended in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous intervals is ended within a certain period of time in a natural flow upon termination of the advantageous state. It is possible to let As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, so it is possible to consider the player's emotions. and

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) and the specific state (for example, production section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the game period in this series of advantageous sections lasts for a predetermined period (for example, advantageous When the value of the section game number counter is "1500" or more), or when the amount of gaming value awarded in the series of advantageous sections is a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is "2401" or more). When this occurs, the series of advantageous intervals is forcibly terminated, but the game period in the series of advantageous intervals is a specific period shorter than a predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445" or more). , or when the amount of game value awarded in this series of advantageous intervals reaches a specific amount smaller than a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter is "2126" or more), the advantageous state is reached. If not, it is shifted to an advantageous state, and when the shifted advantageous state ends and shifts to a specific state, the series of advantageous sections is terminated.

That is, in the first game machine, the series of advantageous intervals is not forcibly ended in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous intervals is ended within a certain period of time in a natural flow upon termination of the advantageous state. It is possible to let In addition, when ending a series of advantageous sections in this way, if it is not in an advantageous state, it is ended after shifting to an advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, so it is possible to consider the player's emotions. and

Further, in the first gaming machine, the specific period or specific amount is set in consideration of the period during which the advantageous state can be continued (for example, "55 games") or the amount of game value that can be given (for example, "275 cards"). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of game value given to the player from being extremely restricted while considering the player's emotions.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state may be extended by granted rights (for example, "1G consecutive stock" and "ceiling reduction"), but the game period in a series of advantageous sections is limited to a specific period When a special period set according to the number of granted rights is reached (for example, when the value of the control game number counter reaches a value at which semi-limit processing (number of games) is executed), Or when the amount of gaming value granted in a series of advantageous sections is less than a specific amount and becomes a special amount set according to the number of rights granted (for example, the value of the payout number counter for control is a semi-limit When the processing (the number of payouts) reaches a value to be executed), granting of rights is suppressed in a series of subsequent advantageous intervals. As a result, for example, the player is given more rights than they can consume, and as a result of the forced termination of a series of advantageous sections in such a state, the player feels distrust and loss. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming excessively high and to consider the emotions of the player.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, in counting the above-mentioned "specific amount" and "special amount", for example, due to the player's operation error or ignoring the instruction, etc. Even if there is a difference between the amount of game value that was actually given and the amount of game value that was actually given, the calculation is based on the amount of game value that was originally supposed to be given without considering this difference. It is supposed to be done. As a result, a series of advantageous intervals may be extended more than necessary due to such behavior of the player, and unfairness may arise between the player who has performed such behavior and the player who has not. Since it is possible to prevent the game from being put away, it is possible to consider the emotions of the player while suppressing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, a winning combination (for example, "certain cherry") in which the transition to an advantageous state is confirmed in a state where granting of rights is suppressed (for example, after semi-limit processing is activated) is won. When the player does, a special notification is made so as not to display a combination of special symbols (for example, "Determined Cherry Lip") that clearly recognizes the winning of the determined combination. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the winning of the fixed combination was a useless win, for example. That is, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the opportunity to start the advantageous state in a state where the granting of rights is suppressed, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming excessively high. It also makes it possible to consider people's emotions. Note that any effect executing means may be used to perform the special notification.

In addition, in the first game machine, when the special notification is made, the advantageous state that should have been originally started from the next game is started from the current game. As a result, the player can naturally perform the stop operation according to the special notification, thereby preventing the player from having a sense of incongruity even when such a special notification is given. can.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when a winning combination of special symbols is displayed in a state in which granting of rights is not suppressed, a special notification (e.g., output of a special winning sound) is performed. On the other hand, in a state in which the granting of the right is suppressed, it is not possible to make a special notification when a winning combination is won and a combination of special symbols is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the winning of the fixed combination was a useless win, for example. That is, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the opportunity to start the advantageous state in a state where the granting of rights is suppressed, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming excessively high. It also makes it possible to consider people's emotions. Note that any effect execution means may be used to perform the special notification.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is determined whether or not a special notification is to be made, depending on whether or not a winning combination has been won, whether or not a combination of special symbols has been displayed, and whether or not a special notification has been made. I am trying to decide. This makes it possible to more appropriately manage the situation in which the special notification is made.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous interval game number counter and the advantageous interval payout number counter perform counting regardless of the amount of gaming value betted. Normal limit processing (number of games) and normal limit processing (payout number) can be executed.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the control game number counter and the control payout number counter perform counting in the 3-coin bet state, but do not count in the 2-coin betting state. Therefore, in the three-bet state, special limit processing (number of games) and special limit processing (payout number) can be executed, but in the two-bet state, special limit processing (number of games) and special limit It does not allow the transaction (payout number) to be performed. Therefore, in a two-bet state, the execution of the normal limit process (number of games) or the normal limit process (number of payouts) may forcibly end a series of advantageous intervals even during the pseudo bonus.

In the first gaming machine, for example, the odds of winning a small combination and the number of medals to be paid out are different between the 3-coin bet state and the 2-coin bet state (see FIGS. 10 to 15). Playing a game with two bets is more disadvantageous to the player than playing a game with . However, the method in which the player is more disadvantaged when playing a game with two bets is not limited to this. For example, if a game is played with two bets during the pseudo bonus, the procedure for the stop operation may not be reported, thereby disadvantageous to the player.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, when a game is played with a first amount (for example, "three") of game value betted, a series of advantageous intervals is forced in the middle of an advantageous state. A series of advantageous intervals can be ended within a certain period of time in a natural flow following the end of an advantageous state without being terminated suddenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, so it is possible to consider the player's emotions. and On the other hand, when a game is played with a second amount of gaming value (for example, "two") betted, a series of advantageous intervals may be forcibly terminated in the middle of an advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player realize that he or she did not play the game by the intended game method, so that the player can be urged to play the game by the intended game method.

It should be noted that, in the series of advantageous intervals, the case where the game is played with the second amount of game value betted is more disadvantageous to the player than the case where the game is played with the first amount of game value betted. Therefore, by enabling such a warning, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in a more advantageous state, and to prevent the player from playing the game in a game method not intended by the player. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to.

[5-5. Storage area configuration of the first gaming machine]
Next, referring to FIGS. 17 to 22, the storage area configuration of the first game machine will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a winning flag storage area, a winning operation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine. Also, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of the carryover combination storing area of the first gaming machine. Also, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of the game state flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Also, FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of the mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Also, FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the operation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine. Also, FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of the pressing order storage area of the first gaming machine.

(Winning flag storage area, winning operation flag storage area, and pattern code storage area)
First, with reference to FIG. 17, configurations of a winning flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area), a prize operation flag storage area (display combination storage area), and a symbol code storage area will be described. In addition, in the first game machine, the winning flag storage area, the winning operation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area have the same data configuration.

Each storage area described above is composed of storage areas 1 to 26 each represented by 1-byte data. The data stored in each storage area is only 1-byte data in the "data" column in FIG. 17, but for convenience of explanation, in FIG. (In FIG. 17, the symbols of the reel 3L, the symbols of the reel 3C, and the symbols of the reel 3R are described in this order) and the contents thereof (see FIGS. 11 to 14) are also described.

The data stored in the winning flag storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination (that is, the type of symbol combination permitted to be displayed in the current game). is used to For example, when 2BB is won in the current game (when it is carried over), bit 0 of the storage area 1 is stored with "1".

The data stored in the winning operation flag storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the type of combination of symbols corresponding to the display combination (that is, the type of combination of symbols displayed on the activated line in the current game). used to For example, when a combination of 2BB symbols is displayed on the active line in the current game, bit 0 of the storage area 1 is stored with "1".

The data stored in the symbol code storage area enables the main CPU 101 to identify the types of symbol combinations that can still be displayed on the active line in the current game, at least while any of the reels is spinning. used for For example, when at least one of the reels is spinning in the current game, if a combination of symbols related to 2BB can be displayed on the active line, bit 0 of the storage area 1 is set to "1". is stored.

(Storage area for carryover combination)
Next, referring to FIG. 18, the configuration of the carryover combination storing area will be described. The carryover combination storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data.

As a result of the internal lottery process, when a bonus combination of "F_2BB" (2BB) or "F_3BB" (3BB) is determined as an internal winning combination, these bonus combinations are stored as carryover combinations in the carryover combination storage area ( "1" is stored in the corresponding bit). The carryover combination stored in the carryover combination storage area is held without being cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the activated line. Further, while the carryover combination is stored in the carryover combination storage area, the carryover combination (bonus combination) is stored in the winning flag storage area in addition to the internal winning combination (small combination/replay combination) determined by the internal lottery process. be done.

(Game state flag storage area)
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described. The game state flag storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data. For example, if the current gaming state is the 2BB state, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area.

In addition, since the RT state is not provided in the first gaming machine, the area indicating the type of the RT state is not provided in the game state flag storage area shown in FIG. If so, "1" is stored in the bit of the storage area corresponding to the current RT state. In the first game machine, data indicating the type of game state (mode) during the advantageous section is separately stored in a mode flag storage area described later, and is stored and managed in this game state flag storage area. You can also The same applies to the non-advantageous and advantageous game sections. It can be managed by providing an advantageous section flag storage area (not shown), or it can be stored and managed in this game state flag storage area. The same applies to game states such as AT state and ART state. An AT state (ART state) flag storage area (not shown) may be provided for management, or may be stored and managed in this game state flag storage area.

(mode flag storage area)
Next, the configuration of the mode flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The mode flag storage area is composed of a storage area 1 and a storage area 2 each represented by 1-byte data. For example, if the current mode is the start mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1; Also, for example, if the current mode is the heaven A mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area 2. FIG. In the first gaming machine, the pseudo-bonus state is also managed as one of the modes.

(operation stop button storage area)
Next, referring to FIG. 21, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described. The operation stop button storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data. Bits 0 to 2 of the operation stop button storage area store data indicating the type of stop button that has already been operated (type of reel that has stopped), and bits 4 to 6 store data indicating the type of stop button that has not yet been operated. Stores data indicating the type (type of spinning reel).

For example, if the stop button 8L is the stop button pressed this time, ie, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, if the stop button 8L is a stop button that has not been pressed yet, that is, if it is a valid stop button, bit 4 stores "1". The main CPU 101 identifies the stop button that has been pushed this time and the stop button that has not been pushed yet based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

(Press order storage area)
Next, referring to FIG. 22, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described. The pressing order storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data. The pressing order indicates the pressing order of the stop buttons, that is, the pressing order (hitting order).

For example, when all the reels are rotating, "1" is stored in bits 0 to 5 of the pressing order storage area. Then, when the stop button 8L is pressed (because it is the "left" first stop), bits 0 and 1 will still contain "1", but bits 2-5 will contain "0". will be stored. Next, when the stop button 8C is pressed (because of the "left" first stop and the "middle" second stop), bit 0 remains stored with "1", but bit 1 "0" is stored. The main CPU 101 identifies the pressing order of the current game based on the data stored in the pressing order storage area.

[6. Processing by main control circuit]
Next, contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 using each program will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 32. FIG. In addition, in the explanation of the various processes shown below, there are cases where one specific example of the processing contents is explained using the specifications of the first gaming machine, but the processing contents of the various processes shown below are limited to this. not a thing

[6-1. Main processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 23, main processing (main operation processing) executed by main CPU 101 of main control circuit 100 will be described. Note that FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing. FIG. 23 also shows power-on processing that is executed prior to the start of the main processing.

First, when power is supplied to the pachi-slot machine 1 (when the power is turned on), the main CPU 101 performs power-on processing (S1). In this process, various processes required when the power is turned on are performed. The details of the power-on processing will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing when one game ends (S2). In this process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. Here, the designated storage area is, for example, a storage area such as a winning flag storage area or a winning operation flag storage area that requires data to be erased for each unit game (game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs medal acceptance/start check processing (S3). In this process, for example, the input states of the medal sensor 31S, the bet switch 6S, the start switch 7S, etc. are checked, and various processes necessary at the start of the game are performed. The details of the medal acceptance/start check process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs random number acquisition processing (S4). In this process, random numbers for internal lottery (for example, the range of 0 to 65535) and random numbers for effects used in various lotteries related to game characteristics (other random numbers for lottery) (for example, the range of 0 to 65535, or 0 to 255 range), etc., and stores the various extracted random numbers in a random number storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103 . It should be noted that the manner in which various random numbers are obtained is not limited to the one described above. A necessary number of random numbers can be appropriately obtained from each predetermined numerical range (for example, the range of 0 to 65535, the range of 0 to 32767, the range of 0 to 255, or the range of 0 to 127). .

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs internal lottery processing (S5). In this process, various processes necessary for determining the internal winning combination are performed based on the internal lottery table and the internal lottery random number value corresponding to the current gaming state and the like. Details of the internal lottery process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a game start state control process (S6). In this processing, when a transition condition is satisfied (for example, based on a determined internal winning combination) at the start of a game, the game state is transitioned according to the satisfied transition condition. Alternatively, various processes necessary for managing the game period of the current game state are performed. The details of the game start state control process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs start command generation and storage processing (S7). In this process, start command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103 . The data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see S204 in FIG. 32), which will be described later. Also, the methods of generating, storing, and transmitting data for other commands are basically the same.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a game start main effect control process (S8). In this process, when various effects are to be performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side) when the game is started, various processes necessary for performing the effects are performed. For example, when a lock effect is performed at the start of a game, execution of the lock effect is controlled. Also, if this includes a pseudo-game, it controls the progress of the pseudo-game (or notification about the pseudo-game). Further, for example, in the AT state, when the information of the stop operation is notified by the instruction monitor, the notification mode is controlled. Although details are omitted, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed in this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop initialization processing (S9). In this process, based on the internal winning combination, game state, etc., various information necessary for stop control such as the type of stop table used in the current game and the type of attraction priority table are set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs reel rotation start processing (S10). This processing requests the start of rotation of all reels. When all the reels are requested to start rotating, the reel control process (see S203 in FIG. 32), which will be described later, controls the driving of the stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R, thereby causing the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R to rotate. rotation is started. Each reel that has started to rotate is accelerated and controlled until its rotational speed reaches a constant speed, after which the constant speed is maintained. Although details are omitted, reel rotation start command generation and storage processing is performed in this processing.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs attraction priority storage processing (S11). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) of the rotating reel (all reels in this case), the set internal winning combination and the set attraction priority table are referred to determine the attraction priority. The data shown is acquired and stored in an attraction priority data storage area (not shown). Although illustration is omitted, a pattern code storage process, which will be described later, is performed prior to this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop control processing (S12). In this process, the rotation of the relevant reel is stopped based on the determined internal winning combination (or information related to various stop controls set accordingly) and the stop operation mode of each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R. perform various processing necessary for Details of the reel stop control process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs winning operation determination processing (S13). In this process, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line is any combination of symbols defined in the symbol combination table. For example, it is determined whether or not there is a bit in which "1" is stored in the winning operation flag storage area. Although the details are omitted, in this process, a winning actuation command generating and storing process is performed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs medal payout/re-game operation processing (S14). In this process, if the combination of symbols determined in the above-described winning operation determination process is a combination of symbols related to a minor combination, the corresponding number of medals is paid out. Various processes necessary for activating a replay in a game are performed. It should be noted that, for example, if the combination of symbols determined in the above-described winning operation determination process is the combination of symbols related to the replay combination, the same value as the number of bets in the current game is set in the automatic insertion medal counter, which will be described later. process. Also, in this process, a medal payout signal corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out is output from the external centralized terminal board 55 .

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a game end state control process (S15). In this processing, when a transition condition is satisfied (for example, based on a combination of displayed symbols) at the end of a game, the game state is transitioned according to the satisfied transition condition. Alternatively, various processes necessary for managing the game period of the current game state are performed. The details of the state control process at the time of game end will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a main effect control process at the end of the game (S16). In this process, when various effects are performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side) when the game ends, various processes necessary for performing the effects are performed. For example, when the lock effect is performed at the end of the game, the execution of the lock effect is controlled. Also, if this includes a pseudo-game, it controls the progress of the pseudo-game (or notification about the pseudo-game). Although details are omitted, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed in this process.

Thus, in the pachi-slot machine 1, one unit game is controlled by performing the processes of S2 to S16 described above, and progress of the game is controlled by repeating these processes. It should be noted that it is possible to configure so that processes other than these processes are appropriately performed as necessary, or it is possible to configure so that some of these processes are not performed. In other words, the various types of processing described above are merely examples.

(Processing at power-on)
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the power-on processing performed in S1 of the main processing described above will be described. Note that FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the power-on process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process (not shown) when the power is turned on, and then performs a write test of the main RAM 103. As a result of the test, it is determined whether or not writing to the main RAM 103 was performed normally ( S21). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 103 .

When the main CPU 101 determines that writing to the main RAM 103 has been performed normally (YES in S21), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the ON state (S22). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting change is possible.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the ON state (YES in S22), the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing when changing the setting (S23). In this process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. The designated storage area here is, for example, a storage area for carryover combinations, a game state flag storage area, a mode flag storage area, or the like, in which data must be erased when settings are changed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs initialization command generation and storage processing (S24). In this process, data of an initialization command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 indicating that the setting change process has started is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs setting change processing (S25). In this process, after the main RAM 103 is initialized by accepting the above-described set value determination operation or set value confirmation operation, a new set value is set (stored) in a set value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. be done. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key-shaped switch 52 is turned off (S26). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting changeable state has ended after the setting value is newly set.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is not in the OFF state (NO in S26), the main CPU 101 waits the processing until the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the OFF state. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is turned off (YES in S26), an initialization command generation and storage process is performed (S27). In this process, the data of the initialization command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 indicating that the setting change process is completed is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S22 that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is not in the ON state (NO in S22), it determines whether or not the backup data is normal (S28). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the various information backed up when the power supply to the pachi-slot machine 1 is interrupted (at the time of power failure) is normal.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the backup data is normal (YES in S28), the main CPU 101 performs game return processing (S29). In this process, the process of restoring the pachi-slot machine 1 to the state before the power interruption is performed. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S21 that the writing to the main RAM 103 was not performed normally (S21 is NO), and if it determines in S28 that the backup data is not normal (S28 is NO), an error occurs when the power is turned on. Processing is performed (S30). An error generated by this power-on error processing is not resolved by the reset operation described above, but is resolved by setting a new set value. Therefore, after the power-on error processing, the main CPU 101 turns off the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 once, and thereafter, until the setting value is newly set (until the above-described processing of S22 to S26 is performed), the main CPU 101 operates normally. It does not move to the processing (from S2 in FIG. 23).

(Medal reception/start check processing)
Next, referring to FIG. 25, the medal acceptance/start check process performed in S3 of the main process described above will be described. Note that FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the medal reception/start check process procedure.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the automatically inserted medal counter is "0" (S41). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a replay combination has been won in the previous unit game (whether or not a replay has been activated).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatically inserted medal counter is not "0" (NO in S41), the main CPU 101 performs automatic inserted medal processing (S42). In this process, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted. Also, although the details are omitted, when automatic insertion is performed, a medal insertion command generation and storage process is performed in this process. Also, in this process, a medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55 .

When the main CPU 101 determines in S41 that the value of the automatically inserted medal counter is "0" (YES in S41), and after the processing in S42, the main CPU 101 performs medal auxiliary storage switch check processing (S43). In this process, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S is in the ON state (that is, whether or not a certain number or more of medals are stored in the auxiliary medal storage 33). If it is determined to be on, a medal auxiliary storage error is generated. In this case, the processing waits until the error is resolved. Also, if it is determined that the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is not in the ON state, this processing is terminated.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs medal insertion state check processing (S44). In this process, the current number of bets and the number of credits are checked. A state in which acceptance is possible (a state in which betting operations can be accepted) is established (acceptance of medals is permitted). If a selector error has occurred, the process waits until the error is resolved.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not medals can be accepted (S45). When the main CPU 101 determines that medals can be accepted (YES in S45), the main CPU 101 performs medal insertion check processing (S46). In this process, the number of bets and the number of credits are updated based on the detection result of the medal sensor 31S and the detection result of the bet switch 6S. Further, although the details are omitted, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command generation and storage process is performed in this process. Also, in this process, a medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55 .

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is possible to insert medals or credit (S47). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is not "50". When the main CPU 101 determines that medal insertion or credit is not possible (that is, the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is also "50") (NO in S49). , the reception of medals is prohibited (S48). That is, the main CPU 101 sets a state in which it is not possible to accept medals (a state in which it is not possible to accept betting operations).

If the main CPU 101 determines in S45 that medals cannot be accepted (NO in S45), if it determines in S47 that medals can be inserted or credited (YES in S47), and After the process of S48, it is determined whether or not the number of inserted coins is the game startable number (S49). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the current number of bets is "2" or "3".

When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of inserted coins is the game-startable number (YES in S49), it determines whether or not the start switch 7S is turned on (S50). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the player has performed a start operation.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 7S is turned on (YES in S50), it prohibits acceptance of medals (S51). After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the medal acceptance/start check process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S49 that the inserted number is not the game startable number (NO in S49), and if it determines in S50 that the start switch 7S is not in the ON state (NO in S50), the main CPU 101 processes is returned to S44.

(Internal lottery process)
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the internal lottery process performed in S5 of the main process described above will be described. Note that FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs setting value/number of inserted medal check processing (S61). In this process, the set value and the number of bets in the current unit game are checked. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 sets an internal lottery table according to the set values, the number of bets, the game state, etc. (S62). Subsequently, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number for internal lottery from the random number storage area (S63). That is, the main CPU 101 acquires the internal lottery random number data acquired in S4 of the main processing described above. In this process, if it is determined that the set value is other than "1" to "6" or the number of bets is other than "1" to "3", the main CPU 101 determines that a serious error has occurred. Then, the above-described power-on error processing (see S30 in FIG. 24) is executed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs internal winning combination determination processing (S64). In this process, the acquired random number for internal lottery is sequentially updated (for example, updated by addition) using the lottery value of each internal winning combination specified in the set internal lottery table, and the update result becomes a predetermined result. (for example, overflow). When a predetermined result is obtained, the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination of the current unit game. It should be noted that, if the predetermined result is not obtained even if all the internal winning combinations are determined, the result of the current unit game is "loss" ("loss" is determined as the internal winning combination).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an internal winning combination has been determined (S65). When the main CPU 101 determines that the internal winning combination has not been determined (NO in S65), the process returns to S64. That is, the main CPU 101 sequentially updates the internal winning combinations to be determined (and also sequentially updates the random number for the internal lottery) until determination is made for all internal winning combinations (or until the internal winning combination is determined halfway through). The process of S64 is repeated until it is determined).

If the main CPU 101 determines that an internal winning combination has been determined (YES in S65), the main CPU 101 determines whether the determined internal winning combination is a non-carryover combination (i.e., not a bonus combination that is a carryover combination, but a small combination or a replay combination). (S66). When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is the carryover non-target combination (YES in S66), it updates the winning flag storage area (S67). In this process, the data in the winning flag storage area is updated based on the internal winning combination determined in the process of S64. That is, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit of the data corresponding to the combination of symbols allowed to be displayed corresponding to the determined internal winning combination in the winning flag storage area.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S66 that the determined internal winning combination is not the carryover non-target combination (NO in S66), and after the process of S67, determines whether the determined internal winning combination is the carryover target combination ( That is, it is determined whether or not it is a bonus combination that is a carryover combination (S68).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is the carryover combination (YES in S68), it determines whether or not the data in the carryover combination storage area is "0" (S69). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not any bonus combination has been carried over. When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover combination storing area is "0" (YES in S69), the main CPU 101 updates the carryover combination storing area (S70). In this process, the data in the carryover combination storage area is updated based on the internal winning combination determined in the process of S64. That is, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit of the data corresponding to the combination of symbols whose display is permitted corresponding to the determined internal winning combination in the carryover combination storing area.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S68 that the determined internal winning combination is not the carryover-target combination (NO in S68), or determines in S69 that the data in the carryover combination storing area is not "0" (NO in S69). ), and after the processing of S70, it is determined again whether or not the data in the carryover combination storing area is "0" (S71).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover combination storing area is not "0" (NO in S71), it updates the winning flag storing area (S72). In this process, the data stored in the carryover combination storing area is reflected in the data in the winning flag storing area. That is, when a bonus combination is carried over (or a win is made in the current unit game), the main CPU 101 stores data corresponding to the combination of symbols permitted to be displayed corresponding to the bonus combination in the winning flag storage area. store "1" in the bit.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S71 that the data in the carryover combination storing area is "0" (YES in S71), and after the processing in S72, the main CPU 101 performs sub-flag setting processing (S73). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a non-advantageous interval sub-flag and an advantageous interval-winning sub-flag are set based on the internal winning combination. In this process, for example, information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor may be set in the AT state. After this process, the main CPU 101 terminates the internal lottery process.

(State control process at game start)
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the game start state control process performed in S6 of the main process described above will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game start state control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition satisfaction check process (S81). In this processing, when starting a game, it is checked whether or not a transition condition for shifting from one game state to another game state is established. For example, in the case of shifting to a flag state as a predetermined RT state based on winning of a predetermined bonus combination, whether or not a predetermined bonus combination has been won is checked in this process. In the case of the first gaming machine, the interval between flags is not configured as an RT state (that is, as a game state stored in the game state flag storage area), so checking here is unnecessary. Also, for example, if there is a specific RT state that starts or ends by playing a specific number of games after a specific transition condition is established, this specific number of games can be managed in this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a transition condition for transitioning to any game state is established (S82). When the main CPU 101 determines that the transition condition for shifting to any game state is established (YES in S82), it updates the game state flag storage area (S83). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the game state according to the established transition condition. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set game state (S84). In this process, it is necessary to set, for example, the game period of the game state, or set the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, in response to the transition of the game state. In this case, such setting processing is performed as appropriate.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S82 that the transition condition for transitioning to one of the game states is not established (NO in S82), and after the processing in S84, the current game section is a non-advantageous section. It is determined whether or not there is (S85). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current game section is a non-advantageous section (YES in S85), the main CPU 101 performs advantageous section start condition establishment check processing (S86). In this process, when starting a game, it is checked whether or not a transition condition (advantageous section start condition) for shifting from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section is established. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-described advantageous interval transition lottery is performed, and it is checked whether or not the lottery result is for starting the advantageous interval.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the condition for starting the advantageous section is satisfied (S87). When the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous interval are not satisfied (NO in S87), the main CPU 101 ends the state control process at the start of the game. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the condition for starting the advantageous interval is satisfied (YES in S87), the main CPU 101 performs setting processing at the start of the advantageous interval (S88). That is, the main CPU 101 starts (sets) an advantageous section. In this process, in response to the start of the advantageous interval, for example, various counters (see FIG. 16) relating to various limit processes start counting (that is, start monitoring the game period of a series of advantageous intervals). is set as appropriate.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S89). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the advantageous interval that has started. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this processing, for example, the transition destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-described advantageous zone transition lottery is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S90). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. Such setting processing is appropriately performed when necessary. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this processing, for example, when shifting to the pseudo bonus according to the set destination mode, "55 games" is set as the game period, and the processing shifts to the end mode. In this case, "32 games" is set as the game period, and in the case of shifting to other modes, the number of ceiling games corresponding to each mode is set. In addition, lottery values (lottery table) in various lotteries (see FIGS. 7 and 8) are set. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S85 that the current game section is not a non-advantageous section (that is, it is an advantageous section) (NO in S85), the main CPU 101 performs a game start processing during an advantageous section (S91). The details of the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous interval will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs advantageous section end condition satisfaction check processing (S92). In this processing, when starting a game, it is checked whether or not a transition condition (advantageous section end condition) for shifting from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section is established. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, if the operation conditions for various limit processes are satisfied based on the number of games in the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), or if the current mode is the end mode, , it is checked whether 32 games have passed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied (S93). When the main CPU 101 determines that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied (YES in S93), the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process at the end of the advantageous section (S94). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section and sets the non-advantageous section. In this process, depending on the end of the advantageous interval, for example, various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processing, the mode (game state) during the advantageous interval, and the game period of the mode (the number of ceiling games, etc.) ) etc. (that is, information on the advantageous section) is cleared. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the condition for ending the advantageous section is not satisfied (NO in S93), the main CPU 101 ends the state control process at the start of the game.

(Processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section)
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the process at the start of the game during the advantageous section, which is performed in S91 of the above-described state control process at the time of game start, will be described. Note that FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the process at the start of a game during an advantageous interval.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter updating processes (at the start of the game) (S101). In this process, for example, various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processes based on the number of games played during the advantageous interval, various counters for managing the game period such as various modes (game states) during the advantageous interval, or other counters Various counters for managing the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, decrement (add) 1 each game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in the specific mode (AT state) (S102). When the main CPU 101 determines that it is in the specific mode (YES in S102), the main CPU 101 performs AT period management processing (at the start of the game) (S103). In this process, for example, when the AT state game period can be extended (for example, the number of games to be extended, the number of sets to be added, etc.) at the start of the game, it is determined whether or not such an extension execution condition is established. or extend the game period based on this determination result (if the game period in the AT state can be shortened, the shortening process is performed). In addition, in this process, the AT state game period may be managed regardless of whether it is extended, or the AT state game period is managed in the process of S101 described above, and only the process related to extension is performed in this process. may be performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-described 1G consecutive lottery is performed based on the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, the 1G consecutive lottery is performed, and the pseudo bonus is extended according to the lottery result. processing is performed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs navigation setting processing (S104). In this process, information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor, information corresponding to the stop operation information to be included in the start command, and the like are set. In addition, in this process, it may be possible to determine whether to generate navigation. That is, when the notification target role is won in the AT state, there may be cases where navigation does not necessarily occur. occurrence probability).

If the main CPU 101 determines in S102 that the specific mode is not in progress (NO in S102), and after S104, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the mode transition condition is satisfied (S105). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the transition destination mode is determined according to the lottery result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is satisfied (YES in S105), the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S106). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the transferred advantageous section. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the transition destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-described mode transition lottery based on the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S107). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. Such setting processing is appropriately performed when necessary. In addition, in the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the same process as the above-described process of S90 is performed. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start process during the advantageous interval. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is not satisfied (NO in S105), the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the time of starting the game during the advantageous interval.

27, the state control processing at the end of the game shown in FIG. 30, the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous interval shown in FIG. 28, and the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous interval shown in FIG. Basically, they have almost the same processing configuration. This process may be performed either when the game is started or when the game is finished (for example, a game state or mode transition, etc., which refers to a determined internal winning combination. As for the processing that should be reflected until the current game ends (or until the next game starts), it means that it can be performed on either side, and the same applies to both. It does not mean that the processing of is performed redundantly. Therefore, such processing may be performed either when the game is started or when the game is finished.

On the other hand, those that need to be processed when starting the game (for example, the above-mentioned navigation setting processing, etc.) are assumed to be executed when the game starts, and when the game ends. Those that need to be processed (for example, the process of referring to the combination of displayed symbols, etc.) may be executed when the game ends. Further, for example, a process that needs to be performed at a predetermined time after the start of the game but before the end of the game, or a process that should be performed (for example, a process that refers to the stop operation mode of the first stop operation, etc.) ) can be assumed to be performed at that time.

(reel stop control process)
Next, referring to FIG. 29, the reel stop control process performed in S12 of the main process described above will be described. Note that FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the rotational speeds of all the reels have reached a predetermined constant speed (for example, 80 rpm/1 minute) (that is, whether they are rotating at a constant speed) (S111). When the main CPU 101 determines that all the reels are not rotating at a constant speed (NO in S111), the main CPU 101 waits until all the reels are rotating at a constant speed. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the reels are rotating at a constant speed (YES in S111), each reel is permitted to stop (S112). That is, the main CPU 101 activates each stop button. Also, along with this, the operation stop button storage area is updated (in the case of the first game machine, for example, bits 4 to 6 of the operation stop button storage area are stored with "1").

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been operated (S113). When the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has not been operated (NO in S113), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until a valid stop button is operated. In the case of performing automatic stop control, it is possible to measure this standby time and perform automatic stop control when the measurement result reaches a predetermined time.

When determining that a valid stop button has been operated (YES in S113), the main CPU 101 updates the operation stop button storage area and the pressing order storage area (S114). In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, when the first stop operation is performed on the reel 3L (when the stop button 8L is pressed), in this process, the operation stop button storage area bit "1" is stored in 0, and bit 4 is updated to "0". Also, bits 2 to 5 of the pressing order storage area are updated to "0".

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines the reel to be controlled from the operation stop button (S115). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the reel 3L is determined as the reel to be controlled.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position from the symbol counter (S116). The symbol counter is configured as a counter for grasping symbol position data (for example, "0" to "19"). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the symbol position data of the middle area of the reel 3L when the stop button 8L is pressed is stored as the stop start position.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs the number of sliding symbols determination process (S117). In this process, for example, the number of sliding symbols specified in the above-mentioned stop table and the data in the above-mentioned attraction priority data storage area are referred to determine the most appropriate number of sliding symbols (symbol movement amount).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 stores the expected stop position from the stop start position and the number of sliding symbols (S118). In this process, the symbol position data of the position where the symbol finally stops is stored as the expected stop position based on the stop start position stored in the process of S116 described above and the number of sliding symbols determined in the process of S117 described above. .

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop command generation and storage processing (S119). In this process, the reel stop command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103 . Note that the reel stop command can include parameters that can specify not only the expected stop position but also the stop start position and the number of sliding symbols.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs pattern code storage processing (S120). In this process, the symbol code storage area is updated while also referring to the symbol type (symbol code) of the expected stop position on the reel for which the expected stop position has already been determined. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a valid stop button (S121). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is still a spinning reel (whether or not all the reels have been stopped).

When the main CPU 101 determines that there is a valid stop button (YES in S121), the main CPU 101 performs control change processing (S122). In this process, according to the player's stop operation mode so far, for example, when it is necessary to change the stop table or the attraction priority table set in the above reel stop initial setting process, such a Reconfigure various information necessary for stop control.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs attraction priority storage processing (S123). In this process, each symbol (symbol position) on the rotating reel is set as a set internal winning combination while also referring to the type of symbol at the expected stop position on the reel whose expected stop position has already been determined. The attraction priority order table is referenced to obtain data indicating the attraction priority order, and the acquired data is stored in the attraction priority order data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 returns the process to S113. Further, when determining that there is no effective stop button (NO in S121), the main CPU 101 ends the reel stop control process.

(State control process at game end)
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the state control process at the end of the game, which is performed in S15 of the main process described above, will be described. Note that FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the state control process at the end of the game.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition establishment check process (S131). In this processing, it is checked whether or not a transition condition for shifting from one game state to another game state is established when the game ends. For example, when shifting to a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state based on the display of a predetermined combination of symbols, it is checked in this process whether or not the predetermined combination of symbols has been displayed. In addition, in the case of a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state, it is checked in this process whether or not conditions for terminating these game states are established. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this processing, for example, it is checked whether or not a combination of 2BB or 3BB symbols is displayed. Further, for example, in the case of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, it is checked whether or not the end condition of these game states is established by paying out medals.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a transition condition for transitioning to any game state is established (S132). When the main CPU 101 determines that the transition condition for shifting to any game state is established (YES in S132), it updates the game state flag storage area (S133). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the game state according to the established transition condition. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, when a combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed, "1" is stored in bit 0 or bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area, and 2BB is displayed. Set state or 3BB state. Further, for example, in the case of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, if the end conditions for these game states are met, bit 0 or bit 1 of the game state flag storage area is updated to "0".

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set game state (S134). In this process, it is necessary to set, for example, the game period of the game state, or set the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, in response to the transition of the game state. In this case, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, if the 2BB state is set, the number of payouts as the end condition is set to "1", and if the 3BB state is set, the number of payouts is set to "1". If so, "176" is set as the number of payouts as the termination condition.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S132 that the transition condition for transitioning to one of the game states is not established (NO in S132), and after the processing in S134, the current game section is a non-advantageous section. It is determined whether or not there is (S135). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current game section is a non-advantageous section (YES in S135), the main CPU 101 performs advantageous section start condition establishment check processing (S136). As described above, only the process referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible in the non-advantageous section, so this process is the same as the above-described process of S86 (game start state control process).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the conditions for starting the advantageous section are satisfied (S137). When the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous interval are not satisfied (NO in S137), the main CPU 101 ends the state control process at the end of the game. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the condition for starting the advantageous interval is satisfied (YES in S137), the main CPU 101 performs setting processing at the start of the advantageous interval (S138). As described above, only the process referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible in the non-advantageous section, so this process is the same as the above-described process of S88 (game start state control process).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S139). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the advantageous interval that has started. As described above, only the process referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible in the non-advantageous section, so this process is the same as the above-described process of S89 (game start state control process).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S140). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. Such setting processing is appropriately performed when necessary. As described above, only the process referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible in the non-advantageous section, so this process is the same as the above-described process of S90 (game start state control process).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S135 that the current game section is not a non-advantageous section (that is, it is an advantageous section) (NO in S135), the main CPU 101 performs processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section (S141). The details of the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs advantageous section end condition satisfaction check processing (S142). In this process, when the game ends, it is checked whether or not a transition condition (advantageous section end condition) for shifting from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section is established. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, if the operating conditions for various limit processes are satisfied based on the number of payouts in the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), or if the current mode is the end mode , it is checked whether 32 games have passed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied (S143). When the main CPU 101 determines that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied (YES in S143), the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process at the end of the advantageous section (S144). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section and sets the non-advantageous section. In this process, depending on the end of the advantageous interval, for example, various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processing, the mode (game state) during the advantageous interval, and the game period of the mode (the number of ceiling games, etc.) ) etc. (that is, information on the advantageous section) is cleared. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the end condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied (NO in S143), the main CPU 101 ends the state control process at the end of the game.

(Processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section)
Next, referring to FIG. 31, the process at the end of the game during the advantageous interval performed at S141 of the above-described state control process at the time of game end will be described. Note that FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the process at the end of the game during the advantageous interval.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter updating processes (at the end of the game) (S151). In this process, for example, various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processes based on the number of payouts during the advantageous interval, various counters for managing the game period such as various modes (game states) during the advantageous interval, or other Various counters for managing the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, the number of payouts, the number of times a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed, the mode of stop operation, etc.).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in the specific mode (AT state) (S152). When the main CPU 101 determines that it is in the specific mode (YES in S152), the main CPU 101 performs AT period management processing (at the end of the game) (S153). In this process, for example, when the game period in the AT state is allowed to be extended (for example, the number of games to be extended or the number of sets to be added) at the end of the game, it is determined whether or not such an extension execution condition is established. or extend the game period based on this determination result (if the game period in the AT state can be shortened, the shortening process is performed). In addition, in this process, the AT state game period may be managed regardless of whether it is extended, or the AT state game period is managed in the process of S151 described above, and only the process related to extension is performed in this process. may be performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-described 1G consecutive lottery is performed based on the sub-flag for winning the advantageous section, and the process for extending the pseudo bonus is performed according to the lottery result.

When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not in the specific mode (NO in S152), and after S153, it determines whether or not the mode transition condition is satisfied (S154). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the transition destination mode is determined according to the lottery result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the sub-flag at the time of advantageous zone winning.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is satisfied (YES in S154), the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S155). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the transferred advantageous section. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the transition destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-described mode transition lottery based on the advantageous zone winning sub-flag is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S156). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. Such setting processing is appropriately performed when necessary. In addition, in the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the same process as the above-described process of S140 is performed. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game end process during the advantageous interval. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is not satisfied (NO in S154), the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous interval.

[6-2. Periodical interrupt processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 32, the periodic interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described. Note that FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the periodic interrupt process.

Here, in the present embodiment, the periodic interrupt process cycle (one interrupt time) is set to "1.1172 ms". However, the periodic interrupt processing cycle is not limited to this. For example, the periodic interrupt processing may be executed at a cycle different from this, or even if the same cycle is set as this, some or all of the processing may be interrupted by an actual processing. By setting the number of times of interruption to "2" or more, the periodical interruption process may be executed at a period different from this.

First, the main CPU 101 saves a register (S201). Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs input port check processing (S202). In this process, the input states (on state or off state) of various sensors and switches connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) are checked. For example, the input state at the time of the previous interrupt is compared with the input state at the time of the current interrupt to check whether or not there has been a change in the input state. The change is stored in the port storage area 0 (not shown), and the input state not related to the change is stored in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 as it is.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs reel control processing (S203). In this processing, the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R are controlled to be driven, and the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are controlled to rotate and stop. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs communication data transmission processing (S204). In this process, each parameter of each command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 . In this process, if no command data is stored in the communication data storage area, the data stored in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 are sent to the sub control circuit 200 as an input state command.

In the present embodiment, after various command data are once stored in the communication data storage area, they are transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 in the periodic interrupt process. Alternatively, the data may be directly stored in a communication circuit (not shown) provided in the main control circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 without being stored. Further, although detailed description is omitted in this embodiment, various command data are transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by serial communication. may be configured to be transmitted to

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs 7-segment LED drive processing (S205). In this process, the display contents of, for example, the information display device 14 connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) are controlled. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing (S206). In this process, various timers managed by the main control circuit 100 are updated.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs error detection processing (S207). In this process, it is detected whether or not various error states have occurred based on the input state and the like checked in S202 described above. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs door open/close check processing (S208). In this process, for example, based on the input state of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, the opening/closing state of the lower door mechanism DD is checked. A security signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55 when various error states occur and when the input state of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is in the open state (off state).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs register restoration processing (S209). After this process, the main CPU 101 terminates the periodic interrupt process.

[7. Processing by sub control circuit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, an overview of the sub-side control processing executed by the sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 using each program will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an outline of sub-side control processing.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, various restrictions are placed on the main control circuit 100 side (including the main control board 71 and the main control board case) from the viewpoint of preventing fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications. The 200 side (including the sub-control board 72 and the sub-control board case) is not so restricted. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 (and the sub-control circuit 200) can be used in various ways depending on the type and number of connected production devices, the type of production performed by the production device, and the manufacturing cost. configuration can be used. This is the reason why the term "outline" is used in FIG.

First, when the power is turned on, the sub CPU 201 performs the power-on processing similarly to the main CPU 101 (S301 and S302). In this process, it detects whether or not an abnormality has occurred when the power is turned on, initializes the data stored in the sub RAM 203, and performs various tasks necessary for performing various production execution control processes described later. is executed.

Further, when receiving a command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the sub CPU 201 performs control processing for effect execution at the time of command reception (S303 and S304). In this processing, for example, when an initialization command is received, the parameter information of the received initialization command is referred to, and if the setting has been changed, the initialization processing is executed as appropriate on the sub side, and the setting has not been changed. If so, the sub-side also performs a process of returning to the state before the power interruption.

Also, for example, when a start command is received, the parameter information of the received start command is referred to, and if the non-AT state, the content of the effect that suggests or notifies the internal winning combination, game state, etc. (as necessary (by lottery), and controls various production devices so that the production of the decided content is executed. In addition, if it is in the AT state, it determines the content of the effect for notifying the advantageous stop operation mode, and controls various effect devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

In addition, for example, when a lock command is received, the parameter information of the received lock command is referred to, the content of the effect linked with the content of the lock effect is determined, and various effects are performed so that the effect of the determined content is executed. control the device. Also, for example, when a reel stop command is received, the parameter information of the received reel stop command is referred to, and the stop start position and the planned stop position (or simply what stop operation was performed, etc.). To determine the content of performance and control various performance devices so that the performance of the determined content is executed. Further, for example, when a winning operation command is received, the parameter information of the received winning operation command is referred to, and when a privilege is granted, the content of the effect linked with the privilege to be granted is determined, and the determined content Control various production devices so that the production of is executed.

Further, the sub CPU 201 is connected to the sub-control board 72 (including those connected via the sub-relay board 74), for example, when the production buttons 10a and 10b are operated, the production is executed when the production button is operated. Control processing is performed (S305 and S306). In this process, for example, when an effect button is operated in accordance with the effect during execution of the operation-linked effect, various effect devices are controlled so that the content of the operation-linked effect changes. Further, for example, when a presentation button is operated to call up a user menu, which will be described later, during a non-game, control is performed to display the user menu. Also, when a presentation button is operated for selection/decision operation while the user menu is being displayed, control is performed according to these operations.

In addition, the sub CPU 201 performs other effect execution control processing when a trigger other than the above-described trigger is established (S307). In this process, for example, when the non-operation period during which no game-related operation or user-menu-related operation is performed reaches a predetermined period (for example, about 30 seconds), the content of the effect related to the demonstration state notification is determined and determined. Various production devices are controlled so that the production of the content is executed.

[8. Other functions of the pachislot machine]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has various functions for controlling games, various functions for controlling effects, and various configurations for realizing these functions. It can also have functions. An example of other functions on the player side and an example of other functions on the amusement arcade side will be described below.

[8-1. Player side]
For example, when a user menu is displayed by a player's performance operation, a desired menu is selected in the user menu, and further selection/decision operations are performed on the selected menu as appropriate, the player can obtain various information. , various settings can be made.

For example, when the "arrangement/payout table" is selected and determined, it is possible to confirm the game information indicating the arrangement of symbols in the pachislot machine 1, the specified combination of symbols, and the payout (details of benefits) at the time of winning. is displayed in the effect display section.

Also, for example, when "volume/light intensity adjustment" is selected/determined, the brightness of various display devices in the pachislot machine 1, the volume of sound output from the speaker group, or the light intensity of the lamp/LED group, etc. are set. A possible setting screen is displayed in the effect display section. In order to enable more detailed settings or to accept operations related to settings more easily at the time of such settings, various operation units for receiving the game operations of the player are can be used as a part of the operation unit that receives the operation related to (that is, the operation unit that receives the effect operation).

Further, for example, when "custom" is selected and determined, the performance mode in the pachislot machine 1 (for example, the type of character used for the performance (the type of the character (display mode) itself, the voice corresponding to the character or the type of costume or item (individual display mode) related to the character), the probability of occurrence of production (including the type of expectation at the time of occurrence of production, etc.), or the mode of suggestion or notification (performance execution timing etc.) is displayed in the effect display section. In order to enable more detailed settings or to accept operations related to settings more easily at the time of such settings, various operation units for receiving the game operations of the player are can be used as a part of the operation unit that receives the operation related to (that is, the operation unit that receives the effect operation).

Also, for example, when "Unimemo" is selected and determined, it is possible to receive information providing services using the player's portable terminal (for example, mobile phone, smart phone, etc.). In such an information providing service, for example, a player performs a login operation to start a game (the game may be started without a login operation), and when the game ends, a logout operation is performed to obtain game history information (for example, , how many games have been played in total, how many times an advantageous game state has occurred, how many cards have been obtained at maximum, etc.).

In addition, for example, the game history information includes information indicating the types of characters that can be displayed during the game and the types of music that can be output according to the result of the game (satisfaction of the release condition). It also includes information about accompanying benefits, such as information indicating the types of characters that can be displayed on the mobile terminal and the types of music that can be output.

It should be noted that various methods can be employed for the login/logout method in such an information providing service. For example, login/logout may be performed by using the player's terminal and having the player read a two-dimensional code displayed on the effect display unit, or the player may enter a password. or store the password (specifically, for example, when logging out at the end of the game, instead of the two-dimensional code, a character string of about 4 to 10 digits can be displayed as the password for the next input, and The password can be obtained by the player taking notes on paper or taking a picture with a mobile terminal, etc., and the password obtained in this way can be entered at the next login before the start of the game). - Logout may be performed. Further, it is also possible to perform login/logout by appropriately combining these methods.

[8-2. Amusement store side]
For example, a hall menu is displayed by a setting confirmation operation (setting change operation or other operation by the amusement hall manager) by the manager of the game parlor, and a desired menu is selected in the hall menu. Furthermore, when the selection/decision operation is appropriately performed for the selected menu, the manager of the game parlor can obtain various information and make various settings.

For example, when "time setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section, which enables setting of the date and time in the pachi-slot machine 1. FIG. Note that the date and time can be configured to be automatically updated, for example, in the sub-side power-on process (see S302 in FIG. 33).

Further, for example, when "total medal information" is selected/determined, history information indicating the number of inserted and the number of dispensed within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for seven business days) in the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed. An information screen that can be confirmed is displayed in the effect display section. Note that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in the user menu.

Further, for example, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected/determined, the number of setting change operations and setting confirmation operations within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for seven business days) in the pachislot machine 1 An information screen is displayed in the effect display section, in which history information indicating is recognizable. In addition, for example, when "error information history" is selected and determined, history information indicating the date and time of occurrence of an error in the pachislot machine 1 within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for 7 business days) and the content of the error. is displayed in the effect display section.

Further, for example, when "monitoring history" is selected and determined, the history information indicating the date and time when the door is opened within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for seven business days) in the pachi-slot machine 1 and the period thereof is displayed. An information screen that can be confirmed is displayed in the effect display section. Further, for example, when "warning setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section, which enables setting of various warning notification modes and frequencies in the pachi-slot machine 1 .

Further, for example, when the "power saving mode setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section to allow setting of whether or not to activate the power saving function of the pachi-slot machine 1, and the like. Note that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in the user menu. In addition, in order to enable more detailed settings at the time of such settings, or to enable reception of operations related to settings more easily, various operating units for receiving game operations of the player are can be used as a part of the operation unit that receives the operation related to (that is, the operation unit that receives the effect operation).

Further, for example, when "stop setting" is selected/determined, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section to enable setting of whether or not to activate the stop function of the pachi-slot machine 1, and the like. It should be noted that the stop function is a function that, when a predetermined operating condition is met, disables the game until the manager of the game parlor performs a release operation (for example, a reset operation). Further, the predetermined operating condition may be satisfied, for example, when the advantageous interval is forcibly terminated by executing the limit process described above, or may be established in a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increase interval, or an advantageous condition). It may be established when the section (any of the sections (including the effect section)) ends. Further, when the stop function is set to ON state, an automatic settlement function, which will be described later, may be set to ON state in conjunction with this.

Further, for example, when "automatic settlement setting" is selected/determined, a setting screen is displayed in the effect display section to enable setting of whether or not to activate the automatic settlement function in the pachi-slot machine 1, and the like. Note that the automatic settlement function is a function of automatically settlement of credits (that is, all of the credited gaming value is automatically returned) when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied. Further, the predetermined operating condition may be satisfied, for example, when the advantageous interval is forcibly terminated by executing the limit process described above, or may be established in a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increase interval, or an advantageous condition). It may be established when the section (any of the sections (including the effect section)) ends. Further, when the automatic settlement function is set to ON state, the stop function may also be set to ON state in conjunction with this.

In addition, when setting the stop function and automatic settlement function, in order to enable more detailed settings, or to enable reception of operations related to settings more easily, various operation units that accept game operations of the player can be used as part of the operation unit that receives the operation related to the setting (that is, the operation unit that receives the effect operation). However, in this case, it is not desirable to unnecessarily increase the number of operation units that can be accepted, so only a specific operation unit (for example, a stop button) should be used as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to the setting. It is good to be able to do it.

[9. Extension example]
So far, the pachislot machine 1 has been described as an example of a gaming machine to which the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied, but the gaming machine to which the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can be applied to gaming machines such as so-called "pachinko machines" and "slot machines", and similar effects can be obtained. That is, the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied to all gaming machines as long as they are capable of performing a game (performing game control) in accordance with a game action (operation) of a player. Also, the configuration and functions of the gaming machine including the pachi-slot machine 1 are not limited to those described above, and various modifications and extensions are possible. Although it is only an example, such an extension example will be described below.

(Medalless machine)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the betting operation of the player (that is, the operation of inserting the medals on hand into the medal insertion slot 5 to bet, or the MAX bet button 6a or the 1 bet button of the credited medals) 6b to bet) is one of the start conditions, and if medals are to be paid out when the game is over, the hopper device 32 is driven to open the medal payout port 11. Although a form in which medals are paid out or credited is explained, the configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not limited to this.

For example, the game player bets the game value necessary for the game, the game is played based on the bet, and a privilege is given (for example, the game value is given) based on the result of the game. The invention according to is applicable. In other words, not only is medals physically thrown in and paid out by the action of the player, but also the gaming value possessed by the player is electromagnetically managed within the pachislot machine 1 ( Alternatively, even if it is not electromagnetic, at least it is managed in a manner that prevents the player from directly contacting the game value), and it can be applied to a game that can be played without medals. Here, such a pachi-slot machine 1 is referred to as a "medalless game machine". Note that the medal-less gaming machine is sometimes referred to as a "managed gaming machine" or an "enclosed gaming machine".

It should be noted that it may be the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) itself that electromagnetically manages the gaming value held by the player, or it may be attached to the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71). It may be a (connected) game value management device (hereinafter, such a management device may be referred to as a "medal count control board"). An example in which this game value management device is provided will be described below.

The gaming value management device comprises at least ROM and RWM (or RAM), is provided in the pachi-slot machine 1, and is a communication device (hereinafter, when such a communication device is referred to as a "connection terminal board" ) to an external game value providing device (hereinafter, such a game value providing device may be referred to as a “communication dedicated unit”) so as to be capable of two-way communication. The gaming value management device carries out necessary communication with an external gaming value providing device to perform a gaming value lending operation (i.e., to provide the gaming value necessary for the player to bet on the gaming value). action to give the game value), action to give the game value (that is, action to provide the game value to the player in the case of winning the role (the win is established), etc.), and these It is possible to perform an operation of electromagnetically recording the game value provided by the operation of . Note that the game value providing device may be called a "game value (game medium) handling device", a "game value (game medium) lending device", or a "sandwich".

Also, the external game value providing device is connected to an external ball output management device (ball output management server). It is configured to be able to transmit the payout management information via the providing device. Here, the paid ball management information is composed of various kinds of information necessary for enabling an external paid ball management device to manage the paid balls. An example of the paid ball management information will be described later. Also, the external game value providing device and the external ball management device are connected via, for example, an internet line.

Here, the term "balls paid out" directly means the number of game media paid out. (for example, how much the player has become positive (how much the game store has become negative), or how much the player has become negative (how much the game store has become positive) ), the degree of continuation of advantageous states (for example, bonus state, AT state, or a series of advantageous sections, etc.), or the degree of gambling assumed by a combination of these.

Further, for example, a possessed game value number display device (not shown) for displaying the number of possessed game values is provided on the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1, and the game value management device controls the number of game values based on the management result of the number of game values. The game value number displayed on the possessed game value number display device of the lever may be managed. That is, the gaming value management device may not only record the total number of gaming values that a player can use for gaming by an electromagnetic method, but may also be configured to be able to control the display of the recording result. . In this case, the gaming value management device has the ability for the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded gaming values to the external gaming value providing device. It has the performance that the recorded game value cannot be reduced except when it is operated directly, and the signal indicating the recorded game value can be transmitted only through a communication device. is desirable.

It should be noted that the gaming value management device not only has the function of electromagnetically managing the gaming value of the player using an external gaming value providing device, but also the number of gaming values betted by the physical actions of the player and the number of gaming values of the pachislot machine 1. It may have a function of managing the number of game values paid out by the physical action of the player. That is, it may also be possible to manage the actual insertion and payout of medals in the conventional pachi-slot machine 1 . In this way, the pachi-slot machine 1 can be controlled by a conventional method, or by a method such as the above-mentioned medalless game machine, so that the pachi-slot machine 1 can be controlled with any specification. Even if there is, it can be set as a common configuration. Further, in this case, the game value management device may adopt a method of directly controlling the selector 31 and the hopper device 32, which are controlled by the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71), It is also possible to adopt a method of indirectly controlling by transmitting the control result.

In addition to the above, the pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with various operation means necessary for the operation of the medalless game machine, such as a player-operable lending operation means and return (settlement) operation means. In addition, the game value providing device includes various devices such as an insertion slot for valuable values such as bills, an insertion slot for recording media (such as IC cards), and a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal. In addition, various operation means necessary for the operation of the medalless game machine, such as a lending operation means and a return operation means that can be operated by the player, may be provided (none of them are shown). Note that the insertable recording medium includes not only non-member recording media issued on the day at the game parlor, but also member recording media owned by members of the amusement parlor. The game value recorded in the non-member recording medium is valid only on the day (and becomes invalid after the next day), but the game value recorded in the member recording medium is valid from the next day.

An example of the game flow in this case will be described. For example, first, the player deposits valuable value into the game value providing device by any method. The game value providing device subtracts a predetermined number of value values in response to the operation of any of the lending operation means by the player, and provides the pachi-slot machine 1 with the game value corresponding to the value value thus subtracted. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operation when the game value is required. After that, the player operates one of the return operation means when ending the game after acquiring a predetermined number of game values according to the result of the game. The game value management device transmits the number of game values to the game value providing device according to the player's operation of any of the return operation means. The game value providing device ejects the recording medium recording the transmitted game value number. The game value management device clears the game value number stored by itself when the game value number is transmitted. The player can take the ejected recording medium to a prize exchange place or the like to exchange it for a prize, or the ejected recording medium can be sent to a game value providing device corresponding to another pachi-slot machine 1. By inserting it, the board can be moved and the game can be continued. Also, if the ejected recording medium is a member's recording medium, it is valid from the next day onwards, so the game can be stopped here.

In the above example, the game value management device transmits the total number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's return operation. Only the number of game values desired by the player may be transmitted. That is, the game value owned by the player may be divided. In addition, although the game value providing device records the transmitted game value number on a recording medium and discharges it, the above-mentioned non-contact communication antenna or the like is used to transfer the same value and value to the player's mobile terminal. For example, cash or cash equivalents may be dispensed as long as it provides something of equal value to the player.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 or the game value providing device is provided with lock operation means that can be operated by the player, and communication between the game value management device and the game value providing device is disabled according to the operation of the lock operation means. It may be possible to control the state (locked state). In this case, in the pachi-slot machine 1 or the gaming value providing device, for example, setting a personal identification number (and inputting the set personal identification number), issuing a one-time password (and inputting the issued one-time password), or biometric authentication and so on, and the locked state is released when the result of the authentication process is normal.

According to the medalless gaming machine described so far, compared to the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, for example, a part of the external structure such as the medal insertion slot 5 and the medal payout opening 11, or the selector 31, etc. Since it is no longer necessary to provide some internal structures such as the hopper device 32, it is possible not only to reduce the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine, but also to reduce the power consumption of the game machine. In addition, since it becomes more difficult to access the inside of the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the gaming machine. Furthermore, since the player does not come into direct contact with the game medium, the game environment is improved and noise can be reduced. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

(Configuration example of a medalless game machine)
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a configuration example when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medalless gaming machine. In the following, a configuration example in which a medal count control board (game value management device) is provided will be mainly described.

As described above, the medal number control board is connected to the main control board 71 and manages the number of medals (game value number) owned by the player. Also, the medal number control board is connected to a dedicated communication unit (game value providing device) via a connection terminal board (communication device). Further, the medal number control board transmits the paid ball management information to the paid ball management device via the connection terminal board and the dedicated communication unit. A medal count control circuit (not shown) is mounted on the medal count control board. The medal number control circuit includes, for example, a medal number control CPU (not shown), a medal number control ROM (not shown), and a medal number control RWM (not shown).

The ball-out management device is, for example, a server for management of ball-out managed by (the information center of) an association to which the gaming machine maker joins, and the transmitted ball-out management information is accumulated in the ball-out management device. Thus, it is provided for the purpose of making it possible to monitor whether the gambling nature of each gaming machine is appropriate (ball output performance).

Therefore, from such a point of view, the medal count control board and the connection terminal board, like the main control board 71, carry out important functions in the pachi-slot machine 1, so that they are arranged in a manner that can prevent fraudulent acts and illegal modifications. It must be provided inside the pachi-slot machine 1. Configuration example 1 and configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 34 show an example of such a mode.

<Configuration example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 34 shows that the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are accommodated in the main control board case, like the main control board 71 . Here, the main control board case is usually subjected to various sealing processes to make it difficult to open (or remove) or to make it possible to recognize the traces of opening (or the number of times it has been opened). (for example, sealing by crimping, affixing a sealing seal, or affixing a crimping seal that describes a record of cutting the crimping, etc.).

Therefore, if the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are accommodated in the main control board case, the same security effect as that of the main control board 71 can be obtained, and fraudulent acts and illegal alterations can be properly prevented.

<Configuration example 2>
In configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 34, unlike configuration example 1 described above, the medal count control board and the connection terminal plate are accommodated in a medal count control board case provided separately from the main control board case. indicates that there is The medal count control board case is configured as a transparent (or substantially transparent) resin case similar to the main control board case. The plate shall be housed in a readily visible condition.

Here, in the medal number control board case of configuration example 2, the same sealing process as in the main control board case can be performed, or at least a part of the sealing process can be performed. can also For example, the medal number control board case may be sealed by caulking in the same manner as the main control board case, but no sealing seal is attached. Also, for example, in the main control board case, it is obligatory to use a predetermined crimped seal, but in the medal number control board case, any seal may be used as the crimped seal.

<Example of accumulated data>
The accumulated data example shown in FIG. 34 shows an example of various data accumulated in the paid-out ball management device. That is, it shows an example of the payout ball management information that the medal number control board transmits to the payout ball management device via the connection terminal board and the dedicated communication unit. It should be noted that this is only an example, and it is possible to adopt a configuration in which some of the various types of information shown in FIG. 34 are not transmitted, or a configuration in which information other than the various types of information shown in FIG. 34 is transmitted. can also

Also, the timing for the medal count control board to transmit information to the communication dedicated unit is arbitrary, and the timing for the communication dedicated unit to transmit information to the payout management device is also arbitrary. It may be transmitted at any timing as long as the ball payout management device can monitor the ball payout performance of each gaming machine for at least one unit (for example, one business day of the game parlor). . For example, the timing at which the medal count control board transmits information to the communication-dedicated unit and the timing at which the communication-dedicated unit transmits information to the ball management apparatus may be different timings. Also, for example, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication dedicated unit may be different timing depending on the type of information.

The accumulated data “total number of inserted coins” is the accumulated number of inserted coins per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on. For example, the medal number control board sends information on the number of game values betted by the player's betting operation to the communication dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game), excluding the bets made by the replay operation. The dedicated communication unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business hours of the amusement arcade).

The accumulated data "total number of payouts" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the number-of-medals control board sends the information on the number of game values given by the payout process of the gaming machine to the communication dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game), excluding those given by the operation of replaying. The dedicated communication unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business hours of the amusement arcade).

Accumulated data "MY" is the maximum number of difference generated in one unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on (in other words, the number of difference obtained during the period when the game value increased most in one unit. (referred to as "MY"). For example, the medal number control board calculates such a maximum number of difference number, and transmits the calculated information to the communication dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, when the amusement arcade closes), and the communication dedicated unit receives the information is transmitted to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business hours of the amusement arcade).

The accumulated data "total payout number of accessories" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on, and the cumulative number of payouts paid out during the operation of various accessories. . For example, the medal number control board is dedicated to communication of information on the number of game values given by the payout process of the gaming machine during operation of various roles at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game during operation of various roles). unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the pay-out management device at a predetermined timing (for example, when the amusement arcade closes).

Accumulated data "total number of continuous bonuses paid out" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since the power of each gaming machine was turned on, and continuous bonuses (RB, including RB during BB operation). It is the cumulative number of payouts paid out during the operation of. For example, the medal number control board is dedicated to communication of information on the number of game values given by the payout process of the gaming machine during operation of the continuous role at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game during operation of the continuous role). unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the pay-out management device at a predetermined timing (for example, when the amusement arcade closes).

In addition, the medal number control board transmits various information that can be displayed on the role ratio monitor device 54 to the communication dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of calculation by the role ratio monitor device 54), and the communication dedicated unit The information is transmitted to the ball management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of transmission from the medal count control board). Note that the accumulated data “Role Product Ratio” corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned role product ratio information, the accumulated data “Continuous Role Product Ratio” corresponds to, for example, the above-described continuous role product ratio information, and the accumulated data “Advantageous "Section ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned specific section ratio information, and the accumulated data "Instructed role product ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned role product ratio information that is subject to aggregation and calculation even during the AT state. , the accumulated data "ratio of state of accessories, etc." corresponds to the above-mentioned specific section ratio information, which is subject to aggregation and calculation even during operation of various accessories, for example.

The accumulated data “number of times played” is the accumulated number of times played per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal number control board transmits information on the number of games played at a predetermined timing (for example, each unit game) to the communication dedicated unit, and the communication dedicated unit calculates the cumulative total of the information at a predetermined timing ( For example, it is transmitted to the pay-out control device at the end of business hours of the amusement arcade.

The accumulated data "main control chip ID number" is the individual identification number (also called "CPUID", which is called "chip ID number") of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board transmits various information to the communication dedicated unit, it transmits information including this individual identification number. Information including this individual identification number is transmitted.

The accumulated data "main control chip maker code" is a maker code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board transmits various information to the communication dedicated unit, it transmits information including this manufacturer code, and the communication dedicated unit transmits this transmitted information when transmitting various information to the ball management device. Send information including the manufacturer code.

The accumulated data "main control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board transmits various information to the communication dedicated unit, it transmits information including this product code. Send information, including product codes.

The accumulated data “medal number control chip ID number” is the individual identification number of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board transmits various information to the communication dedicated unit, it transmits information including this individual identification number. Information including this individual identification number is transmitted. If the main control board 71 is configured to transmit various information to the communication dedicated unit without providing the medal number control board, the information becomes "0".

The accumulated data "medal number control chip maker code" is a maker code recorded in the management area of the medal number control ROM of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board transmits various information to the communication dedicated unit, it transmits information including this manufacturer code, and the communication dedicated unit transmits this transmitted information when transmitting various information to the ball management device. Send information including the manufacturer code. If the main control board 71 is configured to transmit various information to the communication dedicated unit without providing the medal number control board, the information becomes "0".

The accumulated data "medal number control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the medal number control ROM of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board transmits various information to the communication dedicated unit, it transmits information including this product code. Send information, including product codes. If the main control board 71 is configured to transmit various information to the communication dedicated unit without providing the medal number control board, the information becomes "0".

In this way, the paid-out ball management device can store various information (discharged-ball management information) transmitted from the gaming machine. The ball management information also includes a plurality of pieces of individual identification information (for example, the above-described “main control chip ID number” to “medal number control chip product code”) that can identify individual gaming machines. Therefore, the ball management device can identify the gaming machine that is the transmission source by these pieces of individual identification information. are different, it is possible to recognize the possibility that one of the control boards has been replaced (that is, the possibility of fraud or unauthorized modification).

In addition, the put-out ball management information includes a plurality of pieces of put-out ball information (for example, the above-described “total number of inserted balls” to “number of times played”) that can identify the performance of one unit of put-out balls. Therefore, the paid-out ball management device can recognize whether the gambling nature of the gaming machine of the transmission source is within an appropriate range based on the paid-out ball information. For example, if the "total number of payouts" or "instructed accessory ratio" becomes extremely high from a certain point, there is a possibility that fraudulent acts or unauthorized modifications have been made, or that there is some flaw in the specification design in the first place. It is possible to recognize the possibility that there was

Then, when the above-mentioned possibility is recognized by the paid-out ball management device, it can be expected that the result will be notified to the game parlor or the game machine maker, and appropriate countermeasures will be taken. That is, a plurality of management gaming machines, a game value providing device (communication dedicated unit) that transmits the payout management information transmitted from the management gaming machines to the payout management device, and based on the transmitted payout management information, each By constructing a management system including a payout management device that manages the payout performance of managed gaming machines, it is possible to appropriately manage all managed gaming machines.

<Modification 1>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured so that the number of game values possessed by the player is managed by the medal number control board. Therefore, the medal count control board may be provided with a medal count monitor device (not shown) so that the administrator of the game parlor can grasp such management status or other information.

The medal number monitor device is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and is provided inside the medal number control board case. The medal number monitor device displays various information (for example, part or all of the above-described ball output management information) regarding the number of game values aggregated and calculated by the medal number control CPU (or may be the main CPU 101). Display sequentially. If the display contents of the role ratio monitor device 54 are all displayed by the medal number monitor device, the role ratio monitor device 54 may not be provided. Alternatively, the role ratio monitor device 54 may also be used as the medal count monitor device.

Further, the medal count monitor device may be mounted on the medal count control board, or may be mounted on another board (for example, a connection terminal board) connected to the medal count control board. good too. Moreover, as long as it is inside the cabinet G, it may be provided in another place. For example, it may be provided on the medal count control board case. Also, a management switch may be provided in the cabinet G for starting the display on the medal number monitor device or for switching the content, and various information may be displayed when this switch is operated. Further, on the premise of using such a management switch, for example, the information display device 14 may also be used as a medal number monitor device.

The medal number monitor device may display the type of error state that has occurred when various error states related to itself have occurred. For example, when a communication error occurs with the main control board 71, when a communication error occurs with the connection terminal board, when a communication error occurs with the game value providing device, or when an abnormality occurs in the token number control RWM. In some cases, a numerical value corresponding to this may be displayed. In this case, in order to make it possible for the manager of the game parlor to easily recognize which error state the displayed numerical value corresponds to, the corresponding relationship is displayed in or near the medal number control board case. It is sufficient to provide a descriptive section (affixing a sticker, printing, etc.) to indicate.

<Modification 2>
As described above, in the medalless game machine, the medal number control board can be configured to transmit the ball output management information to the outside via the connection terminal board. Here, in this embodiment, an external collective terminal board 55 is additionally provided for transmitting information to the outside. Therefore, the connection terminal plate and the external collective terminal plate 55 can be configured, for example, as follows.

For example, the connection terminal board and the external collective terminal board 55 are configured as a common terminal board. As a result, not only can the number of parts be reduced, but also the number of wires directed to the outside can be reduced, so that the security effect can be enhanced.

Also, for example, the connection terminal plate and the external collective terminal plate 55 are configured as one unit. Also, for example, the connection terminal plate and the external collective terminal plate 55 are arranged at least in the cabinet G in close proximity. As a result, the work efficiency at the time of connection can be improved. Moreover, the length of the wiring can be made constant, and the wiring locations can be limited, so that the security effect can be enhanced.

<Modification 3>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured to transmit the paid ball management information to the paid ball management device. In addition, in the payout management device, it is possible to appropriately manage the payout performance of each medalless game machine based on the received payout management information. Therefore, on the premise that ball output performance can be appropriately managed in this manner, the above-described limiter may not be provided. That is, it may not have the function of forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the establishment of a certain regulation condition.

Alternatively, the medal number control board may be provided with a function to appropriately manage the ball payout performance, and on the premise that the ball payout performance can be appropriately managed in this manner, the above limiter may not be provided. . That is, it may not have the function of forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the establishment of a certain regulation condition.

For example, the medal count control board is configured to include a ball output monitoring RWM (which may be the medal count control RWM described above, or may be another RWM). The ball-out monitoring RWM is initialized, for example, when the setting is changed, but is not initialized at the end of the advantageous section to monitor the ball-out. Then, when the monitored ball output exceeds a certain threshold, for example, the advantage section itself is not forcibly terminated, but the navigation occurrence probability is lowered, the AT state is extended, the probability is lowered, Alternatively, it is assumed that the AT state itself can be terminated to reduce the performance of putting out balls. Even in this way, it is possible to appropriately manage the ball output performance. In this case, it may be possible to transmit such a control result to the paid ball management device as the paid ball management information. That is, both the medal count control board and the ball management device may be configured to manage the ball output performance of each medalless game machine.

(Configuration example of the main control board of a pachislot machine)
Next, a configuration example of the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the main control board 71. As shown in FIG. In the following, a configuration example for reusing the main control board 71 will be mainly described.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, there are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71, one of which is that the manufacturer's name and board control number must be printed on the main control board 71. It's becoming The manufacturer name is the name of the gaming machine manufacturer that manufactures the pachi-slot machine 1, and the control number is a number for identifying the model of the main control board 71. FIG.

<Configuration example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35 indicates that the manufacturer's name and the board control number are printed in characters on the main control board 71 in the conventional manner. Here, in configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, first, it is assumed that BB Co., Ltd. manufactures the pachi-slot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "model A") on which the main control board 71 is mounted. At this time, only the name of the manufacturer "BB Co., Ltd." and the board management number "BB-00-11-22" in the lower row are initially printed. After that, when model A is removed from the amusement arcade, for example, when AA Co., Ltd. reuses the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "model B"), the company AA deletes the printed manufacturer name and board control number in the lower row by laser engraving, and inserts the manufacturing number and board control number (for example, the upper manufacturer in the configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35) in a different space. The name “AA Co., Ltd.” and board control number “AA-00-11-22”) must be newly printed.

After that, model B was withdrawn from the amusement arcade, and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. attempted to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "model C"). In this case, BB Co., Ltd. has to delete the printed manufacturer name and board control number by laser engraving, and newly print the manufacturing number and board control number related to the company in a different space. However, in the configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, since there is no more empty space, the main control board 71 can be reused due to the restrictions described above, although the hardware can still be sufficiently reused. There was a problem that it may not be possible.

This is the same even when a plurality of manufacturer names and board control numbers are printed from the beginning. For example, even if the serial number and board control number for both AA Co., Ltd. and BB Co., Ltd. are printed in advance, the serial number and board control number for AA Co., Ltd. are laser-engraved at the time of manufacturing model A. This is because it will be deleted. Therefore, although there is a possibility that BB Co., Ltd. can reuse it, AA Co., Ltd. cannot reuse it. On the other hand, in Configuration Examples 2 and 3 described below, it can be expected that the problems described above can be resolved. That is, the reusability of a board used for game control, such as the main control board 71, can be enhanced.

<Configuration example 2>
Configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35 indicates that a code including the manufacturer's name and board control number is printed. Note that in configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, a QR code (registered trademark), which is a two-dimensional code, is used as an example of a code containing a manufacturer name and a board management number. code can be used. That is, the code may be of any kind as long as it includes information that enables the confirmer to uniquely identify the manufacturer name and board control number by some means (e.g., mobile terminal, etc.). good too.

In configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, first, assuming that model A is manufactured by BB Corporation, the first code from the right is printed. The first code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number of BB Corporation. After that, when model A is withdrawn from the amusement arcade and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. intends to manufacture model B, the second code from the right is printed and the first code from the right is deleted by laser engraving. The second code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number of AA Co., Ltd.

After that, when the model B is withdrawn from the amusement arcade and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. tries to manufacture the model C, the third code from the right is printed and the second code from the right is deleted by laser engraving. The third code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number of BB Corporation. After that, even when model C was withdrawn from the amusement arcade and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. reused the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. was the third from the right. The code of is deleted by laser engraving, the fourth code from the right is printed, and the fourth code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number related to AA Co., Ltd. If so, it becomes possible to reuse the main control board 71 in a new pachi-slot machine 1 .

That is, in the configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, by printing the code including the manufacturer name and the board control number, the manufacturer name and the board control number are printed (printed) per one on the surface of the main control board 71. ) Since the space can be saved, it is possible to improve the reusability as compared with the configuration example 1 shown in FIG.

<Configuration example 3>
Configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35 indicates that a code including a manufacturer name and a board control number is printed in the same manner as in configuration example 2 described above. Note that, in configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, a plurality of (for example, four) codes are printed from the beginning. For example, it is assumed that two each of AA Co., Ltd. and BB Co., Ltd. are printed. In addition, on the surface of the main control board 71 (or on the corresponding main control board case), the code is read by crimping a portion corresponding to each code with, for example, a belt-like member. It makes it possible to fix an impossible state. Further, for example, by cutting the belt-like member or the like, it is possible to release the fixation and make the code readable.

In configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, first, assuming that model A is manufactured by BB Co., Ltd., only the first code from the right is readable, and the second to fourth codes from the right are readable. is rendered unreadable. The first code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number of BB Corporation. After that, when model A was withdrawn from the amusement arcade and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. tried to manufacture model B, only the second code from the right was made readable, and the first, third and fourth codes from the right were made readable. The second code is rendered unreadable. The second code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number of AA Co., Ltd.

After that, when model B was withdrawn from the amusement arcade, for example, when BB Co., Ltd. tried to manufacture model C, only the third code from the right was made readable, and the first, second, and fourth codes from the right were made readable. The second code is rendered unreadable. The third code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number of BB Corporation. After that, even when model C was withdrawn from the amusement arcade and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. reused the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. was the fourth from the right. can be read, and the first to third codes from the right cannot be read, the main control board 71 can be reused in a new pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, in the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, at least one code can be read and other codes cannot be read. can be reused by game machine manufacturers. Also in the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, only caulking holes may be provided, and a code may be printed at a location corresponding to the caulking holes each time the device is reused.

[10. Second gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 to 60, another specific example of the specifications relating to the playability of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described as a "second game machine". It should be noted that various specifications, functions, etc., described as the second gaming machine in this embodiment can be partially or wholly applied to other gaming machines described in this embodiment, and Various specifications, functions, etc., described as other gaming machines in the present embodiment can be partially or wholly applied to the second gaming machine described in the present embodiment. In other words, an appropriate combination of these can be used as the invention according to the present embodiment.

In addition, the second gaming machine differs from the first gaming machine in terms of its game playability, but the basic control for the progress of the game and the basic control for the execution of the effects are the same as those of the first game machine. It is similar to the machine. That is, in the second gaming machine as well, the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 executes various processes, examples of which are shown in FIGS. Performs game state transitions, updates of information on various counters and various flags required for various controls, various controls related to execution of effects and information notification on the main side, and the like. Further, the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 executes various processes, an example of which is shown in FIG. It should be noted that the main CPU 101 and sub CPU 201 may appropriately perform the control processing necessary for realizing the gaming properties described below, and the method thereof can be changed as appropriate without departing from the gist of the invention. , in the second gaming machine, individual detailed descriptions of such various processes are omitted.

In the second gaming machine, the activated line is defined as only one predetermined irregular line connecting the middle area of the reel 3L, the middle area of the reel 3C, and the upper area of the reel 3R. In addition, in the second gaming machine, as a game state (see FIGS. 48 and 49 described later) related to the lottery probability of the internal winning combination, a non-bonus state "F_2BB" described later is carried over between two BB flags. , between 3BB flags in which "F_3BB" described later is carried over, between non-flags in which no bonus combination is won (not carried over), and in the RB gaming state (BB gaming state) which is a bonus state. Consists of

Since the BB game state is always controlled to the RB game state, for example, "RB" shown in FIG. 49 which will be described later indicates the RB game state as well as the BB game state. Also, the bonus state includes a 2BB state that shifts when a combination of 2BB symbols is displayed, and a 3BB state that shifts when a combination of 3BB symbols is displayed. be. The 2BB state ends when more than one medal is paid out during this state, and the 3BB state ends when more than 53 medals are paid out during this state. . Further, when the setting is changed between the 2BB flags, the information indicating that the 2BB is carried over (the information of the carryover combination storage area related to the 2BB) is not cleared, so that even after the setting is changed, the gap between the 2BB flags is not cleared. continue. On the other hand, when the setting is changed between the 3BB flags, the information that the 3BB is carried over (information in the carryover combination storage area related to the 3BB) is cleared, so after the setting is changed, it becomes between the non-flags.

In addition, in the second gaming machine, it is possible to play a game with two medals bet (two bet state) and three medals bet (three bet state). there is More specifically, in the non-bonus state, the game can be played in both the 2-bet state and the 3-bet state, and in the bonus state, the game can be played only in the 3-bet state. configured to In addition, in the second gaming machine, as in the first gaming machine, it is recommended to play the game in a 3-coin bet state between the 2BB flags. That is, the 3-coin bet state between the 2BB flags is the "recommended gaming state". Therefore, unless otherwise specified, the following description is based on the premise that the game is played in the recommended game state.

[10-1. Game Features of Second Gaming Machine]
Next, the game flow in the second gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 46. FIG. 36 to 39 are diagrams showing an example of the game state transition flow in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section in the second gaming machine, and FIG. 40 explains an example of the detailed game flow in the CZ2 state. FIG. 41 is a diagram for explaining an example of a detailed game flow from the AT state to the judge state, and FIGS. 42 to 46 show examples of various tables in the second gaming machine. FIG. 10 shows.

In the second gaming machine, as in the first gaming machine, the state in which the player plays the game is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section. A standby state is provided as a game state related to the nature, and a normal state, a sign state, a CZ state, an RB state, a BB state, an AT state, a judge state, and an ending state are provided as game states related to the game nature of the advantageous section. is provided.

First, with reference to FIG. 36, the general game characteristics of the second game machine will be described. Players usually start the game from the normal state. In the normal state, first, the game is played with the aim of shifting to the RB state or BB state, which is a pseudo-bonus state. In the meantime, the state may shift to the precursor state or the CZ state. In the case where the pseudo-bonus state that has been shifted is the RB state, if the RB state ends as it is, the advantageous section ends and the state shifts to the standby state of the non-advantageous section. The standby state is positioned as a state in which transition to the advantageous section (that is, the gaming aspect of the advantageous section is exhibited) is on standby. In other words, shifting to the standby state means that it is necessary to play the game with the aim of shifting to the RB state or BB state, which is a pseudo-bonus state, again in the same flow.

When the pseudo-bonus state shifted to is the BB state, or when the RB state is promoted to the BB state, when the BB state ends, the state shifts to the AT state. The AT state consists of 1 set (1 unit) of 30 games, and when one set of games is completed, the state shifts to the judge state. In the Judge state, an extension determination is made to determine whether to extend the AT state. When it is decided to extend the AT state in the judge state, the AT state may be extended to the next set via the BB state, or the AT state may be extended to the next set as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined not to extend the AT state in the judge state, the advantageous section ends and the state shifts to the standby state of the non-advantageous section. That is, the series of advantageous states composed of the BB state and the AT state ends.

The second gaming machine is also equipped with a game number limiter of "1500 (times)" and a payout number limiter of "2400 (pieces)". becomes 1500 games or more, or when the net increase in the number of cards in the advantageous section (the value of the counter for the number of payouts in the advantageous section) exceeds 2400, the advantageous section is forcibly ended and the non-advantageous section is on standby. transition to However, in the BB state, AT state, and judge state, when the net increase in the number of sheets in the advantageous section becomes 1800 or more, the ending transition condition is satisfied and the transition to the ending state is performed until the advantageous section is forcibly ended. The ending state continues. When one of the limiters is activated in the ending state, the advantageous section ends and the game shifts to the standby state of the non-advantageous section.

That is, the player aims to shift to the BB state, and after that, the AT state is extended (prolonged via the BB state to achieve a more favorable game result). In addition, when the AT state has shifted to the ending state as a result of a continuous run, medals can be obtained until the limiter is activated. The above is the rough playability.

(standby state)
Next, the standby state of the second gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. As described above, the standby state is configured as a non-advantageous section gaming state.

In the standby state, for example, an advantageous section transition lottery, a ceiling bonus type lottery, a ceiling game count lottery, and an initial NP lottery are performed. It should be noted that these lotteries are merely examples, and it is possible to construct other lotteries to be performed, or to not perform any of these lotteries.

<advantageous section transition lottery>
In the standby state, an advantageous zone transition lottery is performed for each game to determine whether or not to transition to an advantageous zone. 42 to 46, which will be described later, the description of a specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted. Special" is not determined to shift to the advantageous section, and when the internal winning combination is other, it is always determined to shift to the advantageous section. Also, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section, whether the advantageous section to be shifted to is a normal state or a precursor state (that is, through each precursor state, CZ state, RB state, or BB state) can be determined. Of course, in the lottery, it is also possible to decide to shift to the CZ state, the RB state, or the BB state without going through the precursor state.

Although this is only an example, in the lottery, for example, when the internal winning combination is either "push order bell" or "common bell" described later, it is determined that the transition to the normal state of the advantageous section is performed. When the winning combination is any of "cherry", "watermelon" and "chance eye" described later, it is decided to shift to the CZ state of the advantageous section, and when the internal winning combination is "strong bell" described later, it is advantageous. It is possible to configure such that when it is decided to shift to the RB state of the section and the internal winning combination is a "fixed combination" to be described later, it is determined to shift to the BB state of the advantageous section. In this case, it may also be determined whether or not to go through the precursor state. Also, in either case, it may be decided to shift to one of the states by lottery based on a predetermined probability. In either case, the number of precursory games in the precursory state is determined by the lottery (or the lottery for the number of precursory games, which is another lottery), from within a predetermined number of games (for example, a maximum of 32 games). It may be determined, or a predetermined number of games may be set.

<Ceiling bonus type lottery>
In the standby state, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section as a result of the advantageous section transition lottery, a ceiling bonus type lottery is performed. The second game machine is also equipped with a so-called ceiling function, and when the number of games played without shifting to the pseudo-bonus state in the advantageous section reaches the ceiling game number, the game machine shifts to the pseudo-bonus state. It is a thing. The lottery determines the type of pseudo-bonus state of the transition destination in this case. The number of ceiling games starts counting, for example, when the game transitions to the advantageous section, and the count is cleared when the game transitions to the pseudo-bonus state. 42 to 46 to be described later omit the description of a specific lottery table related to the lottery. The type of the pseudo-bonus state at the time is determined to be the RB state, and the type of the pseudo-bonus state at the time of reaching the ceiling is determined to be the BB state with the remaining 50% probability.

<Ceiling game number lottery>
When the ceiling bonus type lottery is performed in the standby state, the ceiling game number lottery is performed. 42 to 46 to be described later omit the description of a specific lottery table related to the lottery. One game number is determined. Further, in the lottery, the result of the ceiling bonus type lottery may be referred to. For example, when the result is the RB state, it may be easier to determine a relatively shorter number of games than when the result is the BB state. In addition, in the lottery, a plurality of games such as 1 to 128 games, 129 to 256 games, 257 to 384 games, 385 to 512 games, 513 to 640 games, etc. are provided so that the player can easily estimate the degree of expectation. Zones may be defined, and the number of games played within a predetermined zone (eg, 129-256 games or 385-512 games) may be relatively easily determined as the number of ceiling games.

<Initial NP lottery>
In the standby state, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section as a result of the advantageous section transition lottery, an initial NP lottery is performed. In the second gaming machine, information that contributes to the determination of whether or not to shift to a more advantageous state (for example, CZ state or pseudo-bonus state) in the normal state (in other words, to change the degree of advantage in the normal state information), it is possible to give a point "NP". Then, when the advantageous section starts, it is possible to give the initial value of NP. The lottery determines the initial value of this NP. 42 to 46, which will be described later, the description of a specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted. , "50", "70", or "99". However, it is also possible to set the lottery result to be "0" (that is, no NP is given). Also, it is possible to determine "100" (that is, to give the maximum NP value) as a lottery result.

As described above, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section in the standby state, if the transition destination is in the normal state (advantageous section start (normal)), the transition to the normal state from the next game, and the transition destination is If it is a precursor state (advantageous interval start (precursor)), it will transition to the precursor state from the next game (as described above, if it is possible to transition without going through the precursor state, the target game state will be changed from the next game Transition).

(Normal state)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37, the normal state of the second gaming machine will be described. As described above, the normal state is configured as the game state of the advantageous section.

In the normal state, for example, an NP giving lottery, a lottery at NPMAX, a lottery by established role, a sign game number lottery, and a normal middle state transition lottery are performed. It should be noted that these lotteries are merely examples, and it is possible to construct other lotteries to be performed, or to not perform any of these lotteries.

As described above, the normal state is the game state in which the player normally stays the most, and is the game state in which the information of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is not notified. In this way, even in an advantageous section, a game state that is disadvantageous to the player (in other words, a game state in which medals do not increase or are difficult to increase due to notification of information on the stop operation) is the "effect section" of the advantageous section. , or may also be referred to as a “usually advantageous section” or the like.

<NP giving lottery>
In the normal state, every game, an NP grant lottery for determining whether or not to grant NP is performed. As described above, the NP is a point as information for varying the degree of advantage in the normal state. A lottery is held at NPMAX, and a transition to another advantageous game state may be determined. 42 to 46, which will be described later, the description of a specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted. ” to “99”. However, it is also possible to make it impossible to determine "0" (that is, no NP is given) as a lottery result. Also, it is possible to determine "100" (that is, to give the maximum NP value) as a lottery result. In addition, in the lottery, not only the internal winning combination but also, for example, the "number of bells" (that is, the number of consecutive displays of "bell" (including the case where it is displayed once)), which will be described later, is used. It is also possible to allow the NP grant value to be determined according to the "number".

<NPMAX time lottery>
In the normal state, when the cumulative value of NP becomes "100" or more as a result of the NP giving lottery, the NP MAX lottery is performed. Here, when the lottery is performed, the NP is initialized (cleared to 0) regardless of the lottery result. That is, in the normal state, each time the given NP reaches a predetermined value (100 or more), it is determined whether or not to give a privilege to the player. 42 to 46 to be described later omit the description of a specific lottery table related to the lottery. transition to the BB state via the precursor state (as described above, there are cases where the precursor state may not be passed); transition to the CZ2 state via the precursor state (precursor It is as described above that there is a case where the state may not be passed) is determined.

In addition, the CZ state that transitions according to the given NP reaching a predetermined value (100 or more) basically corresponds to the CZ2 state, but in the lottery, via the precursor state It may also be possible to decide to transition to the CZ1 state (which may not be via the precursor state, as described above). In addition, in the lottery, transition to the RB state via the precursor state is not determined (as described above, there are cases where the precursor state may not be passed), but this can be determined. You may do so.

<Lottery by established role>
In the normal state, every game, a winning combination lottery is performed for determining whether or not to award a privilege according to the determined internal winning combination (achieved combination). 42 to 46, which will be described later, the description of a specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted. state, transition to the BB state via the precursor state (as described above, there are cases where the precursor state may not be transitioned), transition to the CZ1 state via the precursor state. (as described above that there is a case where the precursor state may not be passed) is determined.

It should be noted that the state of CZ that transitions in response to winning in the lottery for each established hand basically corresponds to the state of CZ1, but in the lottery, it is possible to transition to the state of CZ2 via the premonitory state. (as described above that there are cases where the precursor state may not be passed) may be determined. In addition, in the lottery, transition to the RB state via the precursor state is not determined (as described above, there are cases where the precursor state may not be passed), but this can be determined. You may do so.

<Lottery for the number of omen games>
In the normal state, when it is determined by the above-described NPMAX time lottery or the winning combination lottery that the game state is to be shifted to any game state via the portent state, the portent game number lottery is performed. That is, the game period of the precursor state is determined. 42 to 46 to be described later omit the description of a specific lottery table related to the lottery. One game number is determined. Further, in the lottery, the game state of the transition destination may be referred to. For example, when the transition via the precursor state is the CZ state, it may be easier to determine a relatively shorter number of games than in the BB state.

<Normal middle state transition lottery>
In the normal state, in order to change the probability of transition to the CZ state, the CZ1 high probability state in which the transition probability to the CZ1 state is preferential, and the CZ1 low probability state in which the transition probability to the CZ1 state is lower than the CZ1 high probability state There are provided a CZ2 high-probability state in which the probability of transition to the CZ2 state is preferential, and a CZ2 low-probability state in which the probability of transition to the CZ2 state is lower than that of the CZ2 high-probability state.

In addition, various aspects can be adopted as the aspect in which the probability of transition to the CZ1 state is preferentially treated in the CZ1 high probability state. For example, in the CZ1 high-probability state, the probability of being determined to transition to the CZ1 state in the established role lottery may be treated more preferentially than the CZ1 low-probability state, or the transition to the CZ1 state in the NPMAX lottery The probability of being determined may be favored over the CZ1 low-probability state.

Moreover, various aspects can be adopted as aspects in which the probability of transition to the CZ2 state is preferentially treated in the CZ2 high-probability state. For example, in the CZ2 high-probability state, NP granting is preferentially treated in the NP granting lottery (it is easier to win NP grants, or NPs granted when winning are relatively large). However, the probability of being determined to transition to the CZ2 state in the lottery at NPMAX may be treated more preferentially than the CZ2 low-probability state, or the probability of being determined to transition to the CZ2 state in the winning role lottery. may be given preferential treatment over the CZ2 low probability state.

Further, the CZ1 low-probability/high-probability state and the CZ2 low-probability/high-probability state are managed separately. Therefore, in the normal state, (a) CZ1 low-probability state + CZ2 low-probability state, (b) CZ1 high-probability state + CZ2 low-probability state, (c) CZ1 low-probability state + CZ2 high-probability state, (d) CZ1 high-probability state + CZ2 There is a possibility that it will be in one of the high-probability states. In the normal state, the states of the CZ1 low-probability/high-probability state and the CZ2 low-probability/high-probability state may be suggested or notified individually or in combination. That is, in the normal state, an effect may be executed that makes it possible to guess or recognize which of the above states (a) to (d) is, or at least in the case of (a) above. By making the contents of the presentation different between the above-mentioned cases (b) to (d), it is possible to guess or recognize that the player is staying in one of the advantageous states, but the above-mentioned (b) to An effect that makes it difficult to guess or recognize which of (d) the player is staying may be executed.

In addition, the CZ1 high probability state and the CZ2 high probability state may be configured to continue for a predetermined number of games, respectively, and when staying in each, a fall lottery is performed in the normal medium state transition lottery. The duration may be determined as it occurs. In the following, the former case will be described as an example.

In the normal state, when the CZ1 low probability state, a normal medium state transition lottery is performed as a lottery for determining whether to shift to the CZ1 high probability state. 42 to 46, which will be described later, the description of a specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted. It is determined whether or not to shift to the state, and if it is determined to shift, the number of staying games (for example, one of "10", "20" or "30" games) is determined. . In addition, in the normal state, when the CZ2 low probability state, a normal medium state transition lottery is performed as a lottery for determining whether to shift to the CZ2 high probability state. 42 to 46, which will be described later, the description of a specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted. It is determined whether or not to shift to the state, and if it is determined to shift, the number of staying games (for example, one of "10", "20" or "30" games) is determined. .

As described above, when it is determined to shift to the CZ state or the pseudo-bonus state in the normal state, the state shifts to the corresponding precursor state (precursor transition). In addition, as described above, if the transition is possible without going through the precursor state, the target game state is shifted from the next game.

Here, the triggers for shifting from the normal state to another game state will be enumerated and explained again.
(1) When the number of games played without transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state reaches the ceiling game number (in this case, the predetermined number of games before reaching the ceiling game number is shifted to the precursor state). good)
(2) If you win the transition of the game state in the lottery at NPMAX (3) If you win the transition of the game state in the winning combination lottery (decided to move to

That is, in the second game machine, there is always a possibility that the above-mentioned triggers (1) to (3) will be established in the normal state, and the probability of transition to the CZ1 state or CZ2 state may change. Therefore, the player can always play the game with anticipation.

(precursor state)
Next, referring to FIGS. 36 and 37, the premonitory state in the second gaming machine will be described. As described above, the portent state is configured as a game state of the advantageous section.

In the portent state, for example, a lottery for giving NP, a lottery for NPMAX, and a lottery for each established hand are performed. It should be noted that these lotteries are merely examples, and it is possible to construct other lotteries to be performed, or to not perform any of these lotteries.

As described above, the premonitory state is a game state in which transition to the CZ1 state, CZ2 state, RB state, or BB state has been determined, but the transition is on standby, and the stop operation is advantageous to the player. This is a game state in which no information is reported. That is, it is a game state that constitutes the above-described "performance section" or "normal advantageous section". The CZ1 precursor state indicates the precursor state of the CZ1 state, the CZ2 precursor state indicates the precursor state of the CZ2 state, the RB precursor state indicates the precursor state of the RB state, and the BB precursor state indicates the precursor state of the BB state. state.

The NP grant lottery, the lottery at NPMAX, and the lottery for each established hand in the precursor state are basically the same as those in the normal state, so descriptions here will be omitted. When the trigger of (3) is established and a transition destination that is more advantageous than the currently determined transition destination is determined, the precursor state is rewritten to a precursor state corresponding to the transition destination. In this case, the number of precursor games may be newly determined, or may be inherited as it is.

For example, in the CZ1 precursor state or the CZ2 precursor state, when it is decided to shift to the RB state or the BB state, the precursor state is rewritten to the RB precursor state or the BB precursor state. Further, for example, when it is determined to shift to the BB state in the RB precursor state, the precursor state is rewritten to the BB precursor state. In such a case, since the precursor effect is executed in the precursor state, the player may be notified by executing the promotion effect suggesting that the player has been promoted to a more advantageous state. good.

In addition, the CZ1 state and the CZ2 state may or may not be superior or inferior. For example, in the CZ1 precursor state, when it is decided to transition to the CZ2 state, if the CZ2 state is more advantageous than the CZ1 state, even if the precursor state is rewritten to the CZ2 precursor state Well, if the CZ2 state is not inferior to the CZ1 state, or if the CZ2 state is more unfavorable than the CZ1 state, the decision to move to the CZ2 state is discarded and the CZ1 precursor state is discarded. can be left as is. Also, in this case, the result of the decision to shift to the CZ2 state is reserved (stocked) as a right. The reserved entitlement may be consumed to initiate the CZ2 state.

Also, in the RB precursor state, if it is determined to transition to the BB state, the result of the decision to transition to the RB state is discarded when the precursor state is rewritten, but is not limited to this. , the result of the decision to shift to the BB state is reserved (stocked) as a right, and after the RB state is executed, the reserved right is consumed and the BB state is started. may In addition, when it is decided to shift to the BB state in the BB precursor state, rewriting does not occur, and the result of the decision to shift to the BB state later is discarded, but the present invention is not limited to this. After the BB state is executed, the reserved right is consumed and the BB state is started. can be

As described above, when the predetermined number of precursor games are played in the precursor state (the number of precursor G=0), the game state corresponding to each precursor state (CZ start, RB start, or BB start).

(CZ1 state)
Next, the CZ1 state in the second gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 38. FIG. As described above, the CZ1 state is configured as the game state of the advantageous section.

The basic gameplay of the CZ1 state is as follows.
(1) One set (one unit) consists of 7 games, and this is the CZ1 normal state.

(2) In the CZ1 normal state, a BB lottery during CZ1 is performed. The BB lottery during CZ1 is a lottery in which whether or not to shift to the BB state is determined according to a probability determined in advance for each established hand in each game, and when the lottery is won, the CZ is successful and the state is CZ1. is completed, and the state shifts to the BB state from the next game.

(3) In the CZ1 normal state, a CZ1 middle navigation lottery is performed. In the CZ1 middle navigation lottery, each game, whether or not navigation is executed in the final state of CZ1 according to a predetermined probability for each winning hand, and if navigation is executed, the type of navigation (4-choice navigation, 2 selected navigation, all navigation) is determined. That is, in the CZ1 normal state, it is determined whether or not to grant the navigation right in the CZ1 final state.

(4) After completing 7 games in the normal state of CZ1, if the later-described "push order bell" is won (when the push order bell is established), the game moves to the final state of CZ1 (1 game).

(5) In the final state of CZ1, if it has been decided to perform navigation by the CZ1 navigation lottery, navigation is performed with the determined contents, and if it is not decided to perform navigation, navigation is performed. In any case, if the "bell" is displayed, it is determined that the CZ is successful and that the transition to at least the pseudo-bonus state is made. Here, in the CZ1 state, it is possible to loop the flow from the CZ1 normal state to the CZ1 final state described above three times at maximum. ', and the last third is defined as 'Rank 3'.

(6) If CZ is successful in the CZ1 final state, a CZ1 reward lottery is performed. The CZ1 reward lottery is a lottery for determining the content of benefits (type of pseudo-bonus state to be shifted) when the CZ is successful in the CZ1 state, and the higher the rank, the more advantageous benefits are given to the player. It's like

(7) If the CZ is successful at Rank 1, a CZ1 reward lottery will be held to determine the type of pseudo-bonus state to be transitioned to, but will not immediately transition to the pseudo-bonus state and will be ranked up to Rank 2. In this state, the CZ1 normal state is entered again (the second time is started). On the other hand, if CZ fails at rank 1 (that is, if "Bell" is not displayed in the CZ1 final state), the CZ1 state ends without transitioning to the pseudo-bonus state, and transitions to the normal state. (ie the CZ1 state fails and exits). It should be noted that, in this case, normal medium state transition lottery is performed to determine the state (CZ1 low probability/high probability state, CZ2 low probability/high probability state) in the normal state of the transition destination. In addition, since the lottery for transition to the normal state is basically the same as that in the normal state, the explanation here is omitted. In order to save the game, it may be determined that the CZ1 high probability state of a predetermined number of games is always (or with a high probability).

(8) If the CZ is successful at Rank 2, a CZ1 reward lottery is performed with a lottery probability more advantageous than Rank 1, and the type of pseudo-bonus state to be shifted to is determined. However, in this case as well, as in the case of rank 1, the state does not immediately shift to the pseudo-bonus state, but after being ranked up to rank 3, the state shifts again to the CZ1 normal state (the third time is started). On the other hand, if CZ fails at rank 2, the state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state determined by the CZ1 reward lottery for rank 1 (that is, the CZ1 state ends with rank 1 success).

(9) When the CZ is successful at rank 3, the CZ1 reward lottery is performed with a lottery probability more advantageous than that of rank 2, and the type of pseudo-bonus state to be shifted to is determined. It then transitions to the pseudo-bonus state determined by the rank 3 CZ1 reward lottery (that is, the CZ1 state ends with a rank 3 success). On the other hand, if CZ fails at rank 3, the state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state determined by the CZ1 reward lottery for rank 2 (that is, the CZ1 state ends with rank 2 success).

<BB lottery in CZ1>
In the CZ1 state, a BB lottery during CZ1 is performed every game to determine whether or not to shift to the BB state according to the determined internal winning combination (established combination). In FIGS. 42 to 46, which will be described later, description of a specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted. When winning, it is decided to shift to the BB state with a low probability, and when winning a strong rare role ("chance eye" or "strong bell" described later), it is decided to shift to the BB state with a medium probability, When a winning combination ("fixed combination" to be described later) is won, it is decided to shift to the BB state with 100% (or high probability). When it is decided to shift to the BB state, the transition to the BB state may be performed without passing through the precursor state. In the former case, the state is shifted to the BB precursor state after the number of precursor games is completed, and in the latter case, the state is shifted to the BB state from the next game.

<CZ1 navigation lottery>
In the CZ1 state, every game (except for the CZ1 final state), CZ1 navigation for determining whether or not to execute navigation (and its type) in the CZ1 final state according to the determined internal winning combination (established combination). A lottery is held. 42 to 46, which will be described later, the description of a specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted. ", "4-choice navigation", "2-choice navigation", or "all navigation" is determined. It should be noted that, for example, if the right of "2-choice navigation" is granted, the right of "4-choice navigation" is not granted (or even if it is determined to be granted, it is discarded), and the right of "all navigation" is If granted, the right of "four-choice navigation" or "two-choice navigation" is not granted (or even if it is determined to be granted, it is discarded). That is, in the CZ1 normal state, although the CZ1 navigation lottery is performed for each game, the most advantageous navigation right granted during the game period is finally used in the CZ1 final state.

<CZ1 Reward Lottery>
When "bell" is displayed in the CZ1 final state, a CZ1 reward lottery is performed. As described above, in the lottery, the type of pseudo-bonus state to be shifted to is determined according to the current rank. 42 to 46, which will be described later, the description of a specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted. ), the type of reward is determined with the same probability as when the cumulative CP is “5”, and when the rank is 2, the type of reward is determined with the same probability as when the cumulative CP is “8” in the CZ2 reward lottery, When it is rank 3, the type of reward can be determined with the same probability as when the accumulated CP is "15 to 19" in the CZ2 reward lottery.

In this way, in the CZ1 state, for example, in the CZ1 normal state, the CZ1 medium BB lottery and the CZ1 medium navigation lottery are performed, and in the CZ1 final state, the CZ1 reward lottery and the normal medium state transition lottery are performed. These lotteries are only examples, and it is possible to construct other lotteries to be performed, or to not perform any of these lotteries. In addition, it is also possible to make it so that the BB state or the AT state may also transition to the CZ1 state, and in the CZ1 state, the right to extend the BB state or the AT state can be granted (the CZ1 state returns to its original state after the end of

In addition, the CZ1 state is a game state in which the degree of expectation of transitioning to a pseudo-bonus state is higher than in the normal state due to the CZ1 reward lottery being performed, but information on the stop operation, which is basically advantageous to the player, is not notified. It is in play state. Therefore, the CZ1 state is a game state that constitutes the above-described "performance section" or "normal advantageous section" as its overall configuration. However, in the final state of CZ1, there is a possibility that the number of medals will increase due to the notification of the information of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player. It can also be said that it is an "increase interval" which is a game state (in other words, a game state in which medals increase or tend to increase due to notification of stop operation information).

As described above, when the CZ1 state is started, the CZ1 normal state is entered, and in the CZ1 normal state, it is determined that if the BB lottery during CZ1 is won, the state is shifted to the BB state. In addition, if you win the CZ1 navigation lottery, you will be given the right to execute navigation. In this way, after completing 7 games in the CZ1 normal state, if you win the "push order bell" described later, you will enter the CZ1 final state. Nav is executed, and if not granted, no navigation is executed. In either case, when "Bell" is displayed, CZ success is achieved, and the type of pseudo-bonus state to be shifted to is determined by the CZ1 reward lottery. In the case of rank 3, the CZ1 state ends as it is, but in the case of ranks 1 and 2, the CZ1 state is ranked up and continued to the next set. Also, if "Bell" is not displayed in the CZ1 final state, in the case of rank 1, the CZ fails as it is and the CZ1 state ends. Also, if the CZ is successful even once (rank 2 or rank 3), the state is shifted to the pseudo-bonus state of the type determined so far. In this case, if it is determined to transition to the pseudo-bonus state after passing through the portent state, the state is shifted to the corresponding portent state. On the other hand, when the CZ1 state ends, if the CZ fails even once and the CZ fails, the state shifts to the normal state.

Incidentally, in the CZ1 final state, a CZ1 challenge effect is performed to suggest to the player that a privilege will be awarded if "Bell" is finally displayed. The CZ1 challenge effect basically continues until the third stop operation, and when the third stop operation finally displays the "bell", the challenge success effect is performed. However, when the pressing order is incorrect during the first stop operation or the second stop operation, and the stop display mode of the stopped reel is such that the "bell" can no longer be displayed (for example, When the "bell" pattern does not stop in the main display window 4, or when the "bell" pattern does not stop on a specific line, the player recognizes that the "bell" can no longer be displayed. ), the challenge failure effect is performed at that time, and the CZ1 challenge effect ends. On the other hand, when the pressing order is incorrect during the first stop operation or the second stop operation, but the stop display mode of the stopped reel is such that a "bell" can still be displayed (for example, the main When the "bell" pattern stops within the display window 4, or when the "bell" pattern stops on a specific line, the stop display is performed in a manner that the player recognizes that the "bell" can still be displayed. at that time), the challenge failure effect is not performed at that time, and the CZ1 challenge effect continues, and when the "bell" cannot be displayed (for example, the situation occurs at the time of the second stop operation In this case, the challenge failure effect is performed at the time of the second stop operation, or at the time of the third stop operation if the relevant situation occurs at the time of the third stop operation.

That is, in the predetermined expectation effect (CZ1 challenge effect), if the possibility of awarding the privilege disappears from the so-called point of view of the result, the failure effect is executed at that stage (predetermined expectation However, if there is still a possibility that a privilege will be granted, the failure performance is not executed (predetermined expectation performance is not completed) until the possibility disappears. As a result, it is possible to execute an appropriate anticipation effect as the game progresses. It should be noted that the production specification of such an expectation production can be applied not only to the final state of CZ1, but also to productions executed in other states. For example, in another state, when a specific push order (for example, "push order bell") is won, if a specific outcome (for example, "bell") is displayed, some privilege is given, In addition, in a state where "all navigation" may not occur (for example, CZ2 normal state, AT state, or judge state), a similar challenge effect may be executed using the above specifications. .

(CZ2 state)
Next, the CZ2 state in the second gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 36, 38, 40 and 42. FIG. As described above, the CZ2 state is configured as a game state of the advantageous section.

The basic gameplay of the CZ2 state is as follows.
(1) Count the number of times the "bell" is not displayed (the number of times the bell is spilled) in the game in which the "push order bell" described later is won, and count the number of times the bell is spilled 7 times as one set (one unit). (Unlike the CZ1 state, the CZ2 state ends with one set), and this is called the CZ2 normal state.

(2) In the normal state of CZ2, CP grant lottery is performed. In the second gaming machine, information that contributes to determining whether or not to shift to a more advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus state) in the CZ2 state (in other words, information for varying the degree of advantage in the CZ2 state) As a result, it is possible to give points called “CP”. In the CP giving lottery, it is determined whether or not to give this CP. As will be described later, the CZ granting lottery includes an initial CP granting lottery, a normal CP granting lottery, and a special CP granting lottery. Details of the lottery will be described later.

(3) In the CZ2 normal state, a CZ2 mid-navi lottery is performed. In the CZ2 state, basically, CP must be accumulated in the CZ2 normal state, and when the number of bell spills reaches 7 and the transition to the CZ2 final state is made, the CP grant situation must be in a predetermined state (5 points or more). If so, the CZ is successful and the state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state. One of the conditions for awarding CP in the CZ2 normal state is that "Bell" is displayed in a game in which "Press Order Bell", which will be described later, is won. In the CZ2 mid-navigation lottery, when "push order bell" is determined as an internal winning combination in the CZ2 normal state, it is determined whether or not to report the information of the stop operation that is advantageous for the display of "bell". Details of the lottery will be described later.

(4) If it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus state before one set is consumed in the CZ2 normal state, the transition is made to the pseudo-bonus state that has been decided, but the decision is made. If one set is completed without a single game, the final state is CZ2, which consists of one game. In the CZ2 final state, a lottery for CP granting is performed. That is, the CP cumulatively added in the CZ2 normal state may be further added in the CZ2 final state.

(5) In the final state of CZ2, the result of the CP grant lottery in that state is also taken into account, and when the cumulatively added CP is 5 points or more, the CZ2 reward lottery is performed. The CZ2 reward lottery is a lottery for determining the content of the privilege (type of pseudo-bonus state to be shifted) when CZ is successful in the CZ2 state. It is supposed to be granted. On the other hand, in the CZ2 final state, even if the result of the CP grant lottery in the state is taken into account, if the cumulatively added CP is less than 5 points, the CZ2 reward lottery will not be performed, and the CZ will fail. The CZ2 state ends (in this case, in the same way as when CZ fails in the CZ1 state and ends, a normal state transition lottery is performed to determine each state in the normal state of the transition destination. In this case, , In the lottery in the CZ2 state, in order to remedy the fact that the CZ2 state has failed and ended, it may be determined (or with a high probability) that a predetermined number of games will be in the CZ2 high-probability state. ).

<CP grant lottery>
As described above, the CP grant lottery includes the initial CP grant lottery, the normal CP grant lottery, and the special CP grant lottery. The initial CP grant lottery is performed when the CZ2 state is started (for example, when the CZ2 normal state starts a game or when the game shifts to the CZ2 state), and determines the initial value of the CP in the CZ2 state. Further, the normal CP grant lottery is performed in each game during the CZ2 state (including not only the CZ2 normal state but also the CZ2 final state). Also, the special CP grant lottery is performed in the final state of CZ2.

The initial CP grant lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the initial CP grant lottery table shown in FIG. is determined), “1” to “3” are determined as the initial CP with a probability of 32/256, and “5” is determined as the initial CP with a probability of 32/256 (that is, pseudo by CZ2 reward lottery The transition to the bonus state is confirmed). Note that these determination probabilities and determination details are examples. For example, as a lottery result of the lottery, it may be determined that CP exceeding 5 points is awarded with a predetermined probability.

The normal CP grant lottery is performed, for example, in the manner shown in FIG. When the internal winning combination of the game is "strong bell", which will be described later, CP "1" is always given. In these cases, the CP value may be determined by a separate lottery. For example, when the display result is "Bell", it is decided to give CP "1" with a probability of 128/256, and it is decided to give CP "2" with a probability of 128/256, In addition, when the internal winning combination of the game is “strong bell”, it is determined that CP “1” is given with a probability of 64/256, and CP “2” is given with a probability of 192/256. may be determined to do.

In addition, when the internal winning combination of the game is a "fixed combination" described later, the CP "10" is always given. In this case, the CP value may be determined by a separate lottery. For example, when the internal winning combination of the game is a "fixed combination", it is determined that the CP "10" is given with a probability of 128/256, and the CP "20" is given with a probability of 128/256. may be determined to do.

In addition, in the normal CP award lottery, the target roles for awarding CP are the "push order bell", "common bell", "strong bell", and "fixed role", which will be described later, but are not limited to these. It is also possible to provide CPs with a predetermined probability even when "Cherry", "Watermelon", and "Chance Eye" are determined as internal winning combinations. The same applies when an internal winning combination other than the internal winning combination shown here is determined, and when a symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown here is stopped and displayed. In addition, using the "bell run number" (that is, the number of consecutive displays of "bell" (including the case where it is displayed once)) described later, the CP grant value can be determined according to the "bell run number". (that is, the greater the number of times the "bell" is displayed in succession, the greater the CP value).

The special CP grant lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the special CP grant lottery table shown in FIG. When it cannot be determined) and when it is 5 or more (that is, when CZ2 reward lottery is performed and it can be determined to shift to a pseudo-bonus state) CP An award value is determined. It should be noted that the granted CP "= 5 set" indicates that the CP is updated to "5" regardless of the cumulative grant result of the current CP, and the granted CP "+5" or "+10" It shows that each value is added to the cumulative provision result of CP.

That is, for example, when the current CP is 4 or less, the transition to the CZ2 final state is made, and even if this does not become 5 or more due to the result of the normal CP grant lottery, "Cherry" or "Watermelon" described later is won. If possible, "set = 5" is determined with a probability of 232/256, "+5" is determined with a probability of 16/256, and "+10" is determined with a probability of 8/256, so the CZ2 reward A lottery can be made possible. Also, for example, when the current CP is 5 or more, if the transition to the CZ2 final state is made, the CZ2 reward lottery will still be performed, but "Cherry" or "Watermelon", which will be described later, will be won. If it is possible, "+5" will be determined with a probability of 16/256, and "+10" will be determined with a probability of 8/256, so the reward (privilege) obtained by the CZ2 reward lottery may be more advantageous. can enhance sexuality. That is, regardless of the game result in the CZ2 normal state, the CZ2 final state is configured as a state that can significantly improve the player's sense of expectation.

Although illustration is omitted, in the CZ2 state, granting status notification for suggesting or notifying the current CP granting status is performed (basically, the above-described NP and the below-described AP are basically the same). For example, a gauge is displayed in a predetermined area of the main effect display section 21, and in the CZ2 state, the gauge is divided into five. If the display mode of the gauge changes and the current CP is "2", the status of CP provision can be notified by changing the display mode of the gauge for two. Also, if the current CP is "5" or more, the display mode of the five gauges will change, and the current CP is "5" to "9" or "10" to "14". or ``15'' to ``19''. . In addition, in the provision status notification, the result of the initial CP provision lottery may not be taken into consideration, and only the result of the normal CP provision lottery may be reported or suggested, or the results of the initial CP provision lottery may be all included. It may be reported or suggested with consideration, or the result of the initial CP grant lottery may be partially considered (for example, only 1/2 of the grant value is reported). can be

In addition, in the CZ2 final state, in the grant status notification, it is reported that the current CP grant status is 4 points or less, but there is a CP grant value that has not been reported. In the case of points or more, even if the result of the CP grant lottery in the final state of CZ2 is that CP is not granted, it will be notified as if the CP was granted in the final state of CZ2 and became 5 points or more. may be performed. Of course, if it is reported that the current CP grant status is 4 points or less, and the actual CP grant status is also 4 points or less, the CP will be 5 points or more depending on the result of the CP grant lottery in the final state of CZ2. In such a case, similar notification should be made.

<CZ2 middle navigation lottery>
As described above, the CZ2 mid-navigation lottery is performed in each game during the CZ2 normal state, and when the "push order bell" described later is won, the stop operation information (correct press information indicating all or part of the order) is determined. The determination is made by determining the navigation state, which will be described later, in the lottery. Also, when a "common bell" (to be described later) is won, a similar notification is made according to the navigation state (to be described later).

As shown in FIG. 42, in the CZ2 normal state, the navigation states are the navigation state 0, which is the state without navigation, the navigation state 1, which is the 4-option navigation state, the navigation state 2, which is the 2-option navigation state, and the all-navigation state. , Navi state 3 where all navi can occur once (all navi state 4 where all navi can occur twice, all navi state 5 where all navi can occur three times, etc.) The number at the end is added by the number of navigators) is set.

Here, in the second gaming machine, the "push order bell" is configured as 6 options (3 options for the first stop operation x 2 options for the second stop operation x 1 option for the third stop operation). ” indicates that navigation occurs with the first stop operation as two options and the second stop operation as two options. For example, when the correct answer order is ``left, middle, right (123)'' and 4-choice navigation occurs, before the first stop operation, ``left or middle'' including the correct answer ``left'' or ``left or right” is performed (that is, two options), and information on the stop operation is not notified before the second stop operation (that is, two options). Navigation is performed. It is supposed to be That is, in terms of probability, the probability of getting the correct answer by itself in the order of pressing the correct answer is 1/6 in the state without navigation, whereas in the 4-choice navigation state (by following the navigation), it is advantageous in that it improves to 1/4. becomes.

Further, "two-option navigation" indicates that navigation with the second stop operation as two options occurs. For example, when the correct order of pressing is "left, middle, right (123)" and two-choice navigation occurs, before the first stop operation, the stop operation indicating that "left" is the correct order of pressing. Information is notified, and information on the stop operation is not notified before the second stop operation (that is, there are two options). That is, in terms of probability, it is advantageous in that the possibility of answering the correct answer by oneself in the order of pressing the correct answer is improved to 1/2 (by following the navigation) in the two-choice navigation state. Further, "all navigation" indicates that the navigation that notifies all of the correct pressing order is generated. For example, when the correct order of pressing is "left, middle, right (123)" and all navigation occurs, stop operation information indicating that "left" is the correct order of pressing before the first stop operation. is notified, and before the second stop operation, navigation is performed in which stop operation information indicating that "middle" is the correct pressing order is notified. That is, in terms of probability, it is advantageous in that the possibility of answering the correct answer by itself in the order of pressing the correct answer is improved to 1/1 in the full navigation state (following the navigation).

Then, in the CZ2 normal state, for example, referring to each CZ2 intermediate navigation lottery table shown in FIG. 42, the current navigation state (“0”, “1”, “≧2”) ”) determines the result of giving navigation. For example, in the no-navigation state (navigation state 0), when the internal winning combination of the game becomes “lost”, “non-winning” (i.e., maintaining navigation state 0) is determined with a probability of 214/256. , with a probability of 24/256, "4-option navigation" (that is, setting navigation state 1) is determined, and with a probability of 12/256, "2-option navigation" (that is, setting navigation state 2). is determined, and with a probability of 6/256, "all navigation 1" (that is, setting navigation state 3) is determined.

Also, for example, in the 4-choice navigation state (navigation state 1), when the internal winning combination of the game is "lost", there is a probability of 214/256 that "non-winning" (that is, maintaining navigation state 1) ) is determined, with a probability of 24/256 it is determined that “two-choice navigation” (that is, setting navigation state 2) is determined, and with a probability of 12/256, “all one navigation” (that is, that navigation state is set to 3). "to set the navigation state 5" is determined with a probability of 6/256.

When the navigation state 1 (4-option navigation state) is set, if the later-described "push order bell" or "common bell" is determined as an internal winning combination, the 4-option navigation is executed and finally When the "bell" is displayed in the navigation state 1, the navigation state 1 is maintained. no state) is set.

Also, when the navigation state 2 (2-choice navigation state) is set, if the later-described "push order bell" or "common bell" is determined as an internal winning combination, the 2-choice navigation is executed, and finally , the navigation state 2 is maintained, while if the "bell" is not finally displayed, the navigation state 2 ends and the navigation state 0 (navigation state 0) is displayed. no state) is set. However, if the "bell" is not finally displayed when the navigation state 2 is set, the navigation state is dropped by one (the navigation state is decremented by 1 and shifted to the navigation state 1). You can also make

In addition, when the navigation state 3 (1 total number of times of navigation in all navigation states) is set, if the later-described "push order bell" or "common bell" is determined as an internal winning combination, all navigation is executed. , and regardless of whether or not the "bell" is finally displayed, the navigation state is decremented by 1 and shifted to the navigation state 2 (that is, the navigation state is changed to 1 fall down). Of course, if all navigation is executed while the navigation state 3 is set, the navigation state 3 may end and the navigation state 0 (no navigation state) may be set.

In addition, when the navigation state 4 (2 total navigation times in all navigation states) is set, if the later-described "push order bell" or "common bell" is determined as an internal winning combination, all navigation is executed. , and regardless of whether or not the "bell" is finally displayed, the navigation state is decremented by 1 when all navigation is executed once, and the navigation state is shifted to the navigation state 3 (that is, the navigation state is changed to 1 fall down). The same is true when the navigation state is 5 or higher. Thus, for example, in the navigation state 3, execution of all navigation is guaranteed once, in navigation state 4, execution of all navigation is guaranteed twice, and in navigation state 5, execution of all navigation is guaranteed three times. . However, when a navigation state of 4 or more is set, if all the navigation operations are performed the corresponding number of times, the navigation state is terminated and a navigation state of 0 (no navigation state) is set. can also

Further, each navigation state is configured so as not to fall down at least until the later-described "push order bell" or "common bell" is determined as an internal winning combination after being set. That is, for example, once the navigation state 1 is set, the navigation state 1 is maintained until the 4-option navigation is executed at least once (however, if the navigation state is raised by the navigation lottery during CZ2, not limited to this).

In addition, the mode of the CZ2 mid-navi lottery is not limited to the one described above. For example, in a game in which the later-described "push order bell" or "common bell" is determined as an internal winning combination, it is determined whether or not navigation is to be performed, and if so, which navigation is to be performed. good too. Also, for example, similar to the all-navigation state lottery in the AT state described later, the number of games in which 4-choice navigation can occur, the number of games in which 2-choice navigation can occur, and the number of games in which all-navigation can occur can be set as the number of games or set. Numbers may be used for management, and in the CZ2 mid-navigation lottery, a lottery for the number of games and the number of sets may be provided.

<CZ2 Reward Lottery>
As described above, the CZ2 reward lottery is performed when the final cumulative value of CP in the CZ2 state is 5 points or more in the CZ2 final state, and the type of pseudo-bonus state to be shifted is determined. be. The CZ2 reward lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the CZ2 reward lottery table shown in FIG. 42, and the type of pseudo-bonus state is determined with a probability according to the cumulative value of CP (cumulative CP).

For example, when the accumulated CP is "5", it is determined with a probability of 244/256 that the pseudo-bonus state of the transition destination will be "RB state", and with a probability of 8/256 the pseudo-bonus state of the transition destination will be " "Weak BB state" is determined, and with a probability of 4/256, it is determined that the transition destination pseudo-bonus state is "Strong BB state".

Further, for example, when the accumulated CP is "8", it is determined that the pseudo-bonus state of the transition destination is "weak BB state" with a probability of 232/256, and the pseudo-bonus state of the transition destination is determined with a probability of 24/256. The state is determined to be "strong BB state". Also, for example, when the accumulated CP is "10" to "14", it is determined that the pseudo-bonus state of the transition destination is "strong BB state" with a probability of 254/256, and the transition destination has a probability of 2/256. It is determined that the previous pseudo-bonus state will be the "freeze BB state".

Here, the pseudo-bonus state in the second gaming machine will be explained. In the second game machine, roughly classified, RB state and BB state are provided as pseudo bonus states. The BB state includes "weak BB state", "strong BB state", and "freeze BB state". Both the RB state and the BB state are configured as game states that continue for 21 games (the game period is set to 21 games), but in the RB state, the later-described "push order bell" is determined as an internal winning combination. In the game where the correct answer is not necessarily notified (including the case where only a part is notified), the BB state is determined as the internal winning combination "Press order bell" described later. In the game, the correct pressing order is always notified (or at least the correct pressing order may be notified with a higher probability than the RB state), which is more advantageous for the player than the RB state. It is in play state.

Although details are omitted, the strong BB state is more advantageous to the player than the weak BB state, and the freeze BB state is more advantageous to the player than the strong BB state. In other words, the player's advantage is high in the freeze BB state, medium in the strong BB state, and low in the weak BB state. It should be noted that, in each BB state, various methods can be adopted as the method of varying the degree of advantage of the player. For example, the higher the advantage, the longer the game period, or the higher the advantage, the higher the probability of occurrence of all navigation. In addition, in the second gaming machine, after the BB state ends, the AT state is always shifted to, so in the various lotteries described later in the AT state, the AT state is easily extended, and the AT state is extended. It is also possible to set advantageous conditions as appropriate, such as a higher probability of passing through the BB state when the vehicle is in the BB state, or a higher probability of all-navigation occurring in the AT state. Further, in the second gaming machine, if it is simply explained that "it is decided to shift to the BB state", one of the types of the BB state described above is determined according to a predetermined condition. shall be determined.

In addition, in the second gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 58, which will be described later, in the weak BB state, a reel effect (for example, a red 7 matching effect during lock) is executed in which "Red 7" symbols are stopped and displayed. The strong BB state and the freeze BB state are started after a reel effect (for example, a blue 7 match effect during lock) is executed in which the “blue 7” pattern is stopped and displayed. It is a thing. Therefore, from this point of view, between the red 7BB state (weak BB state) that starts with all red 7s and the blue 7BB state that starts with all blue 7s (strong BB state and freeze BB state) You may make it differ in an advantageous degree. In this case, in addition to the method described above, for example, in the red 7BB state, only one execution right for the AT state is granted (that is, although the AT state is transitioned after the end, the AT state may be extended or not). Whether or not it depends on the subsequent game results), on the other hand, in the blue 7BB state, a plurality of AT state execution rights are granted (that is, after that, the AT state is shifted to, and the AT state is executed). is determined to be extended by at least one set) so that the blue 7BB state is more advantageous than the red 7BB state.

In addition, the AT state execution right granted by the blue 7BB state, for example, if the AT state execution right granted by the red 7BB state is one, at least two or more may be granted. can also be set as appropriate. For example, in the blue 7BB state, a predetermined number (for example, two) of AT state execution rights may be granted, or a grant lottery (for example, "2" to "11 ” is determined), and the number of AT state execution rights to be granted according to the lottery result may be granted. In addition, the grant lottery is also performed in the red 7BB state (in this case, for example, one of "1" to "11" is determined as the grant number), and compared to the grant lottery in the red 7BB state, A more advantageous lottery result may be obtained more easily in the given lottery in the blue 7BB state, so that the degree of advantage may be different between the two. Also, by creating a similar difference between the strong BB state and the freeze BB state, the degree of advantage between the two may be made different. In short, when the BB state starts, when the red 7 is aligned, the expectation that the AT state will be extended is relatively low, and when the blue 7 is aligned, it is higher than when the red is aligned 7 To make the degree of expectation that the AT state is extended relatively high. Furthermore, when long freeze occurs when blue 7 is aligned, the expectation that the AT state will be extended can be made relatively higher than in the case where long freeze does not occur.

In the CZ2 reward lottery, as described above, the larger the cumulative value of CP granted in the CZ2 state, the easier it is for the player to determine a more advantageous pseudo-bonus state.

In this way, in the CZ2 state, for example, in the CZ2 normal state, the CP grant lottery and the CZ2 middle navigation lottery are performed, and in the CZ2 final state, the CP grant lottery, the CZ2 reward lottery, and the normal middle state transition lottery are performed. However, these lotteries are only examples, and it is possible to configure other lotteries to be performed, or to configure not to perform any of these lotteries. In addition, it is possible to make it so that the BB state or the AT state may also transition to the CZ2 state, and in the CZ2 state, the right to extend the BB state or the AT state can be granted (the CZ2 state returns to its original state after the end of

In addition, the CZ2 state is a game state in which a CZ2 reward lottery is performed, so that the degree of expectation of shifting to a pseudo-bonus state is higher than in the normal state, and information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified. is. Therefore, it can be said that it is a game state configured as the above-mentioned "increase section", but considering the frequency with which navigation is performed, the possibility of medals increasing is not necessarily high, so the overall configuration is as described above. It is a game state that constitutes a "performance section" or a "normal advantageous section". However, it is possible to configure the entire configuration of the CZ2 state as an "increase interval" by adjusting the frequency at which navigation is performed.

As described above, when the CZ2 state is started, the CZ2 normal state is entered, and in the CZ2 normal state, CP grant lotteries (initial CP grant lottery at the start of the CZ2 state, normal CP grant lottery during the CZ2 state) are performed. Also, when the navigation lottery in CZ2 is won, one of the navigation execution rights (navigation state) is granted, and the information of the stop operation corresponding to the granted navigation execution right is notified. Then, the result of the CP grant lottery also changes accordingly. In the CZ2 normal state, when the number of times the "bell in the pressing order" described later was won but the "bell" could not be displayed reached seven times, the CZ2 final state is reached. In the final state of CZ2, when 5 points or more of CP are finally acquired, the CZ is successful, and the type of pseudo-bonus state to be shifted to is determined by the CZ2 reward lottery, and the state is shifted to the determined type of pseudo-bonus state. . In this case, if it is determined to transition to the pseudo-bonus state after passing through the portent state, the state is shifted to the corresponding portent state. On the other hand, in the final state of CZ2, if 5 or more CP points have not been finally obtained, the CZ fails, and the state shifts to the normal state.

<Example of game flow in CZ2 state>
Next, an example of the game flow in the CZ2 state will be described with reference to FIG. (a) of FIG. 40 is an example of CZ failure in the CZ2 state, and (b) to (d) of FIG. 40 are examples of CZ success in the CZ2 state.

In (a) to (d) of FIG. 40, the "number of games elapsed" indicates the pure number of games played, and the "remaining number of games" indicates the stay in the CZ2 state due to an increase in the number of times the bell is spilled. The "winning combination" indicates the internal winning combination determined in the corresponding game. "CP" indicates the cumulative value of CP, and the corresponding game states are CZ2 normal state and CZ2 final state. It shows which game state it is.

In (a) of FIG. 40, it is assumed that CP "2" is given by the initial CP giving lottery. Also, in the second game (2G), the "push order bell" was won, but the "bell" was not displayed (the bell was dropped), and the number of remaining games decreased. The same applies to the third game (3G), sixth game (6G), seventh game (7G), ninth game (9G), tenth game (10G), and eleventh game (11G). In addition, in the fifth game (5G), the "push order bell" was won and the "bell" was displayed, so it is assumed that the CP "1" was awarded by the normal CP grant lottery. In addition, in the eighth game (8G), the "common bell" was won and the "bell" was displayed, so it is assumed that the CP "1" was awarded by the normal CP grant lottery.

Although illustration is omitted in (a) of FIG. 40 (the same applies to the following (b) to (d) unless otherwise indicated), the game that wins the "push order bell" or "common bell" , there are cases where any one of 4-option navigation, 2-option navigation, and all navigation is being executed, and there are cases where none of them is being executed.

In FIG. 40(a), although "2" is given as the initial value of the CP, in the CZ2 normal state, the CP is "1" each in the 5th game (5G) and the 8th game (8G). It was only granted, and in the 11th game (11G), the number of bell spills became 7 times, and the transition to the CZ2 final state (12th game (12G)), CP was not granted even in the CZ2 final state, Since the final CP is "4", the CZ2 reward lottery is not performed (there is no transition to the pseudo-bonus state), and the CZ is unsuccessful.

In (b) of FIG. 40, first, it is assumed that CP "2" is given by the initial CP giving lottery. Also, in the second game (2G), the "push order bell" was won, but the "bell" was not displayed (the bell was dropped), and the number of remaining games decreased. The same applies to the third game (3G), sixth game (6G), seventh game (7G), ninth game (9G), tenth game (10G), and eleventh game (11G). In addition, in the fourth game (4G), the "push order bell" was won and the "bell" was displayed, so it is assumed that the CP "1" was awarded by the normal CP grant lottery. The same applies to the fifth game (5G). In addition, in the eighth game (8G), the "common bell" was won and the "bell" was displayed, so it is assumed that the CP "1" was awarded by the normal CP grant lottery.

Then, in FIG. 40 (b), "2" is given as the initial value of CP, and in the CZ2 normal state, CP is given "1" each, and in the 11th game (11G), the number of bell spills is 7 times, and it shifts to the CZ2 final state (12th game (12G)), and CP is not given in the CZ2 final state However, since the final CP is "5", the CZ2 reward lottery is performed (it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus state), and the CZ is successful.

In (c) of FIG. 40, first, it is assumed that no CP was granted by the initial CP grant lottery. Also, in the second game (2G), the "push order bell" was won, but the "bell" was not displayed (the bell was dropped), and the number of remaining games decreased. The same applies to the third game (3G), sixth game (6G), seventh game (7G), ninth game (9G), tenth game (10G), and eleventh game (11G). In addition, in the fifth game (5G), the "push order bell" was won and the "bell" was displayed, so it is assumed that the CP "1" was awarded by the normal CP grant lottery. In addition, in the eighth game (8G), the "common bell" was won and the "bell" was displayed, so it is assumed that the CP "1" was awarded by the normal CP grant lottery.

In FIG. 40(c), the initial value of CP is not given, and in the CZ2 normal state, CP is given "1" each in the 5th game (5G) and the 8th game (8G). In addition, in the 11th game (11G), the number of bell spills became 7 times, and the state shifted to CZ2 final state (12th game (12G)), and the CP so far was "2", Since "5" CP was granted by winning "Watermelon" in the final state of CZ2, the final CP became "7", so a CZ2 reward lottery is performed (shifting to a pseudo-bonus state is determined), resulting in CZ success.

In (d) of FIG. 40, first, it is assumed that CP "5" is given by the initial CP giving lottery. That is, at this point, it is determined that CZ will succeed, but the CZ2 state will not immediately end. In addition, in FIG. 40(d), "watermelon" was won in the first game (1G), so that "all 3 navigators" were won in the CZ2 mid-navigation lottery. Also, in the second game (2G), the "push order bell" is won, all navigation is performed (all navigation is reduced to 2 remaining), the "bell" is displayed, and the CP is given by lottery for normal CP "1" ” is assumed to have been granted. In addition, in the third game (3G), the "push order bell" is won, all navigation is executed (all navigation is reduced to one remaining), the "bell" is displayed, and the CP is given by lottery for normal CP "1" ” is assumed to have been granted.

Also, in the fourth game (4G), it is assumed that "strong bell" was won and CP "1" was awarded by the normal CP grant lottery. It should be noted that, here too, a CZ2 medium navigator lottery is performed by winning the "strong bell", and for example, the lottery wins "all navigators one" (the number of all navigators increases to the remaining two). Also, in the fifth game (5G), the "push order bell" is won, all navigation is executed (all navigation is reduced to one remaining), the "bell" is displayed, and the CP is given by lottery for normal CP "1" ” is assumed to have been granted. Also, in the 6th game (6G), "push order bell" is won, all navigation is executed (all navigation is reduced to 0 remaining), "bell" is displayed, and CP is given by lottery for normal CP "1" ” is assumed to have been granted. The cumulative value of CP up to this point is "10".

Then, in (d) of FIG. 40, it is assumed that in the 7th game (7G), the player wins the "fixed combination" and the CP "10" is given by the normal CP giving lottery. In the second gaming machine, when the cumulative value of the CP becomes "20" or more in the CZ2 normal state, the CZ2 state is exceptionally terminated in the game even if the number of remaining games remains, A "freeze BB state" having the highest degree of advantage is determined as the type of the pseudo-bonus state, and the freeze BB state is started from the next game.

<Gaming machine using game features in CZ2 state>
In the second game machine, by using the above-described CZ2 state game property, it is possible to provide a game machine having the following configuration, for example.

For example, a pseudo-bonus state (for example, RB state or BB state) in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and a CZ2 state in which the expectation that the condition for transition to the pseudo-bonus state is met is higher than in the normal state. A game machine including that the prescribed termination condition of the CZ2 state is that the number of times the "bell" is not displayed (the number of times the bell is dropped) reaches seven times in a game in which the "push order bell" is determined as an internal winning combination. is.

It should be noted that the number of times the bell has been spilled, which is the prescribed termination condition, is not limited to seven, and can be set as appropriate. Further, even when a combination other than the "push order bell" (for example, "watermelon" or "cherry") is missed, the number of times may be counted.

Further, for example, in a game in which "push order bell" is determined as an internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the correct order, the "bell" is displayed while the incorrect push order is different from the correct order. When the stop operation is performed in order, a symbol combination different from "bell" is displayed, and when "push order bell" is determined as an internal winning combination in the CZ2 state, it is advantageous to display "bell". This is a gaming machine capable of notifying stop operation information (for example, 4-choice navigation, 2-choice navigation, and all navigation).

The "push order bell" consists of 6 options for the push order, but it may be configured with 3 options (only the type of the first stop operation), 12 options, or 24 options (other than the push order). In addition, the stop operation timing (pressing position) may be configured by providing a correct position and an incorrect position). Also, in the latter case, some navigators report the correct pressing order as the pressing order. ) can be configured such that navigation is not notified.

Further, although the target combination of the prescribed end condition is the minor combination "Push order bell", it can be configured as a replay combination "Push order replay". In this case, for example, when the stop operation is performed in the correct order, a "bell replay" is displayed. ” (for example, “Normal Replay”) can be displayed.

Further, for example, in a game in which "push order bell" is determined as an internal winning combination, when the information of the stop operation that is advantageous for the display of "bell" is reported, "all navigation" in which all correct press orders are reported. and "4-choice navigation" or "2-choice navigation" as partial navigation in which part of the order of pressing the correct answer is reported.

Also, for example, when determining the notification mode of the navigation to be executed, if a "bell" is displayed in a game in which partial navigation is performed, the state in which the partial navigation can be performed (for example, the navigation state 1 or navigation state 2) is continued, and if the "bell" is not displayed, the state in which partial navigation can be performed is terminated.

The end condition for ending the state in which partial navigation can be performed is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to continue for the guaranteed number of games, and to set the ending condition to be that the guaranteed number of games has been completed. In addition, regardless of whether or not the internal winning combination related to "Bell" is determined, a continuation lottery (termination lottery) is performed every game, and if it is determined to continue, it will continue, and if it is determined to end can also have this as an end condition. Also, either one of these end conditions can be used, or a combination thereof can be used.

Further, for example, the game machine can determine a "common bell" as an internal winning combination, in which "bell" can be displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation.

Also, for example, when a "bell" is displayed, the game machine can provide "CP", which is a benefit that contributes to the transition to the pseudo-bonus state.

Also, for example, it is a gaming machine that can provide "CP" in response to the start of the CZ2 state.

In addition, for example, the gaming machine can provide "CP" even when a "fixed combination" in which "bell" cannot be displayed is determined as an internal winning combination.

It should be noted that the condition for assigning "CP" is not limited to this. For example, a CP grant lottery (for example, the same as a normal CP grant lottery) is performed even in the CZ2 precursor state, and when transitioning from the CZ2 precursor state to the CZ2 state (CZ2 normal state), It is also possible to have "CP" carried over to the CZ2 state. Further, for example, even in the normal state of CZ2, if a rare combination other than the "fixed combination" is determined as an internal winning combination, a CP grant lottery different from the normal CP grant lottery (e.g., the same as the special CP grant lottery) is performed. You can also make it so that In addition, in the CZ2 state, a freeze generation lottery is performed, and when the freeze generation lottery is won and freeze is executed, a predetermined value (for example, 5 points) "CP" may be given. can. In other words, when a predetermined condition is satisfied according to some game result, "CP" may be awarded with a predetermined probability.

Further, for example, in the CZ2 state, the game machine is determined to shift to the pseudo-bonus state when the "CP" granting state reaches a predetermined state of 5 points or more.

It should be noted that the number of "CP" points for determining the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is not limited to this, and can be set as appropriate. Further, when the CZ2 state is started, the number of points may be determined by lottery, and the number of points may vary.

In addition, for example, the CZ2 state is configured to be able to continue until the defined termination condition is satisfied even after the “CP” granting situation reaches a predetermined condition, and when the defined termination condition is satisfied, the “CP” is granted. It is configured to shift to a pseudo-bonus state when the granting state is in a predetermined state, and it is possible to grant "CP" even after the granting state of "CP" reaches the predetermined state, and the pseudo-bonus state is , There are multiple types with different degrees of advantage (for example, RB and BB), and when the prescribed termination conditions are met, the more “CP” granted, the more advantageous the pseudo-bonus state. It is a game machine that is easy to transfer.

Also, for example, in the CZ2 state, if the specified termination condition is satisfied before the "CP" grant status reaches the predetermined status, in the CZ2 final state, at least whether the "CP" grant status is set to the predetermined status It is a game machine that can decide.

Note that the condition for determining the transition to the pseudo-bonus state is not limited to this, even if the specified termination condition is satisfied before the "CP" awarding state reaches the predetermined state. For example, when the final state of CZ2 ends with the cumulative value of "CP" being "0" in the CZ2 state, it may be decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus state.

(RB state)
Next, the RB state in the second gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 39. FIG. As described above, the RB state is configured as the game state of the advantageous interval, and is also the gaming state configured as the above-described “increase interval”, which is 21 games per set.

It should be noted that, in the start game in the RB state, in response to the start operation being performed, a reel effect in which a set of "white BAR" symbols is displayed ("reel for RB" with lock number "6" shown in FIG. 58 described later) Action 1” or “RB Reel Action 2” with lock number “7”) is performed, then the game in the RB state is started.

In the RB state, for example, a BB promotion lottery and an RB mid-navigation lottery are performed. It should be noted that these lotteries are merely examples, and it is possible to construct other lotteries to be performed, or to not perform any of these lotteries.

<BB promotion lottery>
In the RB state, every game, a BB promotion lottery is performed to determine whether the pseudo-bonus state should be promoted to the BB state (more specifically, whether the RB state should be shifted to the BB state). In FIGS. 42 to 46, which will be described later, description of a specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted. ” or “Watermelon”), it is decided to shift to the BB state with a low probability, and when winning a strong rare role (“chance eye” or “strong bell” described later), it is determined to be in the BB state with a medium probability. When it is decided to shift, and a winning combination ("fixed combination" to be described later) is won, it is decided to shift to the BB state with 100% (or high probability).

Here, when the BB promotion lottery is won in the RB state and the next game is shifted to the BB state, the game period in the BB state is started from the beginning. For example, after playing 10 games in the RB state, if it is decided to shift to the BB state in the 11th game, the next game will be the 1st game instead of the 12th game in the BB state (that is, the RB state and BB state, the number of games in the set is not carried over). It should be noted that the number of games in the set is not limited to this, and the number of games in the set can be inherited between the RB state and the BB state. For example, after playing 10 games in the RB state, if it is decided to shift to the BB state in the 11th game, the next game may be the 12th game in the BB state.

<RB Mid-Navi Lottery>
In the RB state, in a game in which the later-described "push order bell" is determined as an internal winning combination,
A mid-RB navigation lottery is performed to determine whether or not to notify information of stop operations (information indicating all or part of the order of pressing the correct answer) that is advantageous for displaying the "bell". In FIGS. 42 to 46, which will be described later, description of a specific lottery table related to the lottery is omitted. AP is "less than 80" and the probability is the same as when "push order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination (the probability may be different, but the "increase interval" is maintained probability) determines the type of navigation to be executed.

As described above, the RB state is a game state that constitutes an "increase interval" in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified. It is configured as a game state that may not occur. In addition, although "all navigation" will always occur, by configuring the game state as a game state with a shorter game period (smaller number of games per set) than the BB state, there will be a difference between the BB state and the BB state. Alternatively, the BB state is a game state that can be extended, but the RB state can be configured as a game state that cannot be extended, thereby making a difference from the BB state.

As described above, in the RB state, when it is determined to shift to the BB state before the RB state ends, the state shifts to the BB state (BB promotion), and the RB state does not shift to the BB state. is finished by completing 21 games, the RB is finished, the advantageous section is finished, and the standby state of the non-advantageous section is entered (RB finished).

In the RB state, there may be a case where the number of medals expected by the player or intended by design is not paid out due to bias in the occurrence of navigation. Therefore, when the number of medals paid out in the RB state is equal to or less than a specific amount (threshold value) and the RB state ends, it is decided to exceptionally shift to the BB state. In addition, although the specific amount can be set arbitrarily, it is set to "0 sheets" as an example. Also, as another example, "21 cards" (or "42 cards" if 2 cards or less) indicates that the number of net additions during the RB state was 1 card or less per game, for the same purpose. It is possible to save the player and suppress the decline in interest.

(BB state)
Next, the BB state in the second gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 36, 39 and 43. FIG. As described above, the BB state is configured as the game state of the advantageous interval, and is also the gaming state configured as the above-described "increase interval", which is 21 games per set.

In addition, in the start game in the BB state, in response to the start operation being performed, a reel effect in which a set of "red 7" symbols is displayed (shown in FIG. reel action"), or a reel effect in which "blue 7" pattern is displayed (see "reel action 2 for strong BB" with lock number "11" shown in FIG. 58 described later), and then the BB A game in the state is to be started.

In the BB state, for example, an initial AP lottery and a special AT lottery are performed. It should be noted that these lotteries are merely examples, and it is possible to construct other lotteries to be performed, or to not perform any of these lotteries.

<Initial AP lottery>
In the second gaming machine, in the AT state, points called "AP" are used as information contributing to the determination of whether to extend the AT state (in other words, information for varying the degree of advantage in the AT state). It is possible to grant The initial value of "AP" can be assigned even in the BB state in which the player stays prior to the start of the AT state. The initial AP lottery includes an initial AP mode lottery that is performed at the time of a so-called first win, and an initial AP grant lottery that is performed each time the BB state transitions to the AT state.

The first AP mode lottery is, for example, when the first BB state that has transitioned from the precursor state, CZ state, or RB state (not including the case of transitioning from the judge state to the BB state as a result of the extension of the AT state) is started. This is performed to determine the AP mode for varying the degree of advantage of the initial AP grant lottery (to be described later) (for example, when the game is started in the BB state or when the game is shifted to the BB state). It should be noted that the AP mode once determined is maintained until the advantageous section ends without extension in the judgment state. That is, the AP mode constitutes one piece of information for determining the degree of advantage of giving "AP" in a series of advantageous states composed of the BB state and the AT state (including the judge state).

The first AP mode lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the first AP mode lottery table shown in FIG. is to be determined.

Here, the advantageous section mode will be explained. The advantageous section mode is information determined as one of the lottery elements of the aforementioned advantageous section transition lottery when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section. It is configured as information for varying the degree of advantage (especially the degree of advantage in the AT state) of the advantageous section until transition to the advantageous section. In the second gaming machine, as an example, three types of modes, an advantageous interval mode A, an advantageous interval mode B, and an advantageous interval mode C, are provided. mode is set. Which mode is advantageous depends on the lottery (see FIGS. 43 to 46 described later), but relatively the advantageous section mode A seems to be the most advantageous mode. (This is not limited to the illustrated lottery values. Which lottery wins which advantageous section mode is advantageous can be changed as appropriate).

Next, the AP mode will be explained. As shown in FIG. 43, each AP mode is associated with lottery pattern information (“1” to “4”) in the initial AP provision lottery for each AT set number. As will be described later, in the initial AP provision lottery, the lottery pattern "4" is the most advantageous, the lottery pattern "3" is the second most advantageous, and the lottery pattern "2" is the lottery pattern " Although it is more disadvantageous than the case of lottery pattern "3", it is more advantageous than the case of lottery pattern "1", and the case of lottery pattern "1" is the most disadvantageous. Therefore, each AP mode associated with a more advantageous lottery pattern is more advantageous to the player.

For example, "AP mode 1" is associated with the lottery pattern "3" in the "5th set", but is associated with the lottery pattern "1" in the other number of AT sets. 4 sets continue, and if it is decided to extend the AT state via the BB state in the judge state after the 4th set is completed, the initial stage will be the lottery pattern "3" (assuming that the next set is the 5th set). In other cases, only the initial AP grant lottery based on the lottery pattern "1" can be received. Also, when the BB state first shifts to the AT state (first set), the initial AP grant lottery can always be received. It is something that can only be received by lottery.

On the other hand, for example, in "AP mode 9", there are no AT sets associated with the lottery pattern "1", and the odd-numbered set is associated with the lottery pattern "3", so there are multiple AT states. Continuing, when it is decided to extend the AT state via the BB state in the judge state after the end of the even-numbered set, the initial AP provision lottery is performed according to the lottery pattern “3” (with the next odd-numbered set). It is possible to receive Also, when the BB state first shifts to the AT state (first set), the initial AP grant lottery can always be received. It is possible to receive a lottery.

Also, focusing on the number of AT sets, in each AP mode, odd-numbered sets are relatively advantageous in many lottery patterns. Therefore, when the AT state continues, if the odd-numbered set can be extended including the BB state, the expectation that the AT state can be continued (by giving the initial value of AP) increases. In this way, by causing undulations in the provision of the initial value of AP, it is possible to create a state in which the player's expectation for the continuation of the AT state is further heightened, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. From this point of view, the number of relatively advantageous AT sets is not necessarily limited to odd-numbered sets. For example, the first set (or the number of AT sets in the first half) is advantageous because the lottery patterns “3” and “4” are associated (or there are many associations), but the second set and later (or the AT number in the latter half) The number of sets) may be set so that the lottery patterns "3" and "4" are less associated (or not associated) so that at least two sets of AT states are likely to continue. Also, for example, the number of AT sets in the second half is advantageous because there are many associations with lottery patterns "3" and "4", but the number of AT sets in the first half is advantageous because there are many associations with lottery patterns "3" and "4". It is also possible to reduce the number so that the AT state can be easily continued after at least a certain set of AT states have continued.

The initial AP grant lottery refers to the AP mode determined as described above, and when the BB state ends (for example, when the final game in the BB state or transitions to the AT state), the end of the BB state This is done to determine the initial value of "AP" in the AT state to which it will later transition.

The initial AP provision lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the initial AP provision lottery table shown in FIG. As the initial value (initial AP) of , any one of "0" (that is, no initial AP is given), "20", or "40" is determined. Note that the initial AP is not limited to this, and for example, "80", which confirms the extension of the AT state, may be determined with a predetermined probability.

<Special AT lottery>
In the second game machine, when it is decided to extend the AT state in the AT state, the extended AT state is a special AT state (in other words, For example, the game period is stipulated as 30 games, and a pseudo-bonus state (special BB state) in which "all navigators" always occur may occur. After the end of the special AT state, the next set of normal AT state is always entered (the extension of the AT state is determined). In addition, in the judgment state after that, the lottery result of the navigation lottery during the judge, which will be described later, is given preferential treatment by one stage (for example, if "no navigation" is determined, this is given preferential treatment by one stage and becomes "four-choice navigation", If "4-choice navigation" is decided, it will be treated one step higher and become "2-choice navigation", and if "2-choice navigation" is decided, this will be treated one step higher and become "all navigation") It's like

Then, in the AT state (and judge state) immediately before it is determined whether or not to shift to the special AT state, a special character that does not normally appear appears to suggest that the state will shift to the special AT state if extended. A special character production is to be executed.

Then, in the special AT lottery, in a series of advantageous states composed of the BB state and the AT state (including the judge state), the AT state in which the above-mentioned special character production is executed (that is, whether to shift to the special AT state) It is determined whether or not an AT state that makes it possible to decide whether or not to appear (activate), and if it does appear (activate), what set of AT state to use. ing. As with the initial AP mode lottery described above, these lotteries (activation lottery and activation set lottery) are performed at the time of so-called first winning.

The activation lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the activation lottery table shown in FIG. 43, and the probability corresponding to the current advantageous section mode is to activate (“winning”) or not to activate (“non-winning”). is determined. When it is determined to be activated as a result of the activation lottery, an activation set lottery will be performed.

The activation set lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the activation set lottery table shown in FIG. 43, and the number of sets to be activated (the number of AT sets) is determined. Then, for example, when it is determined to be activated in the 4th set and the AT state can be extended to the 4th set, the AT state becomes the AT state in which the above-mentioned special character effect is executed, and further If it is determined that the AT state will be extended in the judge state after the AT state has been consumed, it becomes possible to shift to the special AT state.

As described above, in the BB state, when the BB state ends after 21 games have been completed, the state shifts to the AT state (BB end). In addition, in the second game machine, after the BB state ends, the game always shifts to the AT state. In addition, although the game period in the BB state does not change, for example, an extension lottery or the like may be held during the BB state, and if the lottery is won, the number of games in the BB state may be extended. However, it is also possible to treat one set as 21 games and extend the BB state by the number of sets.

(AT state and judge state)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 36, 39, 41 and 44 to 46, the AT state and judge state in the second gaming machine will be described. As described above, the AT state is configured as the game state of the advantageous section, and is also configured as the above-described "increase section", which is 30 games per set. Also, the judge state is a game state in which it can be determined whether or not to extend the AT state.

In the AT state, for example, promotion state lottery, AT state lottery, AP grant lottery, Lv. 5 promotion lottery, all navigation state lottery, AT navigation lottery will be held. It should be noted that these lotteries are merely examples, and it is possible to construct other lotteries to be performed, or to not perform any of these lotteries.

Also, in the judge state, for example, a mid-judge navigation lottery, a judge reward lottery, a judge final revival lottery, and an all-navigation state lottery are performed. It should be noted that these lotteries are merely examples, and it is possible to construct other lotteries to be performed, or to not perform any of these lotteries.

The basic game characteristics of the AT state and the judge state are as follows.
(1) First, when the set in the AT state is started, whether the promotion lottery (Lv.5 promotion lottery) in the set is preferentially treated (promotion high probability state) or not preferentially It is determined according to the lottery result of the promotion state lottery whether the status is to be set to the normal status (promoted normal status). The lottery can be performed at the same timing as the above-described initial AP provision lottery.

(2) Also, when the set in the AT state is started, whether various lotteries related to AP grant in the set are preferentially treated (AP high probability state) or not preferentially (Whether the AP is in normal state or not) is determined according to the lottery result of the AT state lottery. The lottery can be performed at the same timing as the above-described initial AP provision lottery.

(3) Also, in the AT state, an AP provision lottery is performed. The AP grant lottery includes the initial AP grant lottery described above, the AP grant lottery described later (when the bell is displayed), the AP grant lottery (additional lottery when the bell is strong), and the AP grant lottery (additional lottery when the bell is displayed). , details of the lottery will be described later. In the AT state, basically, when the "bell" is displayed, AP is given, and when the set ends, including the initial value of AP, if the cumulative value of AP is "80" or more, the judge When "Lv.4" is set as the level and the accumulated AP value is "60" to "79", "Lv.3" is set as the judge level and the accumulated AP value is "40" to "59". , the judge level is set to "Lv.2", and if the AP cumulative value is "20" to "39", the judge level is set to "Lv.1" and the AP cumulative value is "0". ~ "19", "Lv. 0" is set as the judge level. The judge level will be described later. In addition, when the cumulative value of AP is "80" or more, "Lv.4" is uniformly set as the judge level, and the judge level "Lv.5" is not set according to the cumulative value of AP. However, it is not limited to this. For example, when the cumulative value of AP is “80” to “99”, “Lv.4” is set as the judge level, and when the cumulative value of AP is “100” or more, “Lv. .5” may be set.

(4) Also, in the AT state, Lv. 5 A promotion lottery will be held. Lv. In the 5-promotion lottery, regardless of the current accumulated AP value, whether or not "Lv. It is a lottery to decide. Note that the lottery can be configured as a lottery as to whether or not to give "100" AP. That is, it can be configured as one of the AP grant lotteries.

(5) In addition, in the AT state, all navigation state lottery is performed. The all-navigation state lottery determines whether or not to generate a state (all-navigation state) in which "all-navigation" can be executed when the "push order bell" is won in the AT state, and if so, how long. It is a lottery to decide whether to do it. As described above, in the AT state, AP is given when the "bell" is displayed. Therefore, when the full navigation state occurs, AP is inevitably more likely to be given. That is, the all-navigation state is configured as a state in which it is easy to obtain medals, and is configured as a state in which it is easy to extend the AT state. Details of the lottery will be described later.

(6) Also, in the AT state, an AT navigation lottery is performed. The navigation lottery during AT is a lottery for determining whether or not to execute "all navigation" or partial navigation (for example, "two-choice navigation") even if the above-mentioned all-navigation state is not in effect. there is Details of the lottery will be described later.

(7) In this way, in the AT state, when the full-navigation state, the information of the stop operation that is advantageous for the display of the "bell" is notified. Advantageous stopping operation information may be reported, and depending on whether or not such stopping operation information is reported, the status of AP provision varies. Of course, when the player selects the order of pressing the correct answer by himself and "Bell" is displayed, the AP granting situation also changes. Then, in the AT state, when 30 games of the set are completed, the judge level is set according to the cumulative value of AP, and the game shifts to the judge state. In addition, if the number of games in all navigation states remains when 30 games of the set are completed, the AT state of the set will be extended until the number of games in all navigation states becomes 0 (judgment state ), and more APs may be added during the extension. Also, Lv. When the 5-promotion lottery is won, the judge level is set to "Lv.5" regardless of the accumulated AP value.

(8) If "Lv.4" or "Lv.5" is set as the judge level in the judge state, it is determined that the AT state will be extended. Further, when "Lv. 3" is set as the judge level, the "number of times of judgment" is set to 3 times, and when "Lv. ” is set to twice and “Lv.1” is set as the judgment level, the “number of times of judgment” is set to one. The "judgment count" means the number of times the determination of whether or not to extend the AT state is made in the judge state. Also, when "Lv.0" is set as the judge level, the "number of times of judgment" is set to once. A lottery that is more disadvantageous than the case is performed, and is configured so that there is a difference in the degree of advantage between the case of "Lv.1" and the case of "Lv.0".

(9) In the judge state, basically, the game in which the "push order bell" described later is won determines whether or not the extension is possible, and if the "bell" can be displayed in the game, the extension is successful (extension is possible). is determined), a judge reward lottery is performed, and the mode of extension (for example, the “continuation type” described later, passing through the BB state, etc.) is determined. In addition, even if a rare role including "common bell" and "strong bell" described later is won, the extension is decided so that the extension will be successful, and the judge reward lottery will be held in the same way, and the extension will be extended. Aspects are determined. In addition, when "Lv.4" or "Lv.5" is set as the judge level, the extension decision is made so that the extension is successful in all roles, and the judge reward lottery is similarly performed. , the extended manner is determined. That is, in the judge state, the AT state is extended if the decision result of the decision on whether or not to allow the extension is successful before the judge state ends with no extension.

(10) On the other hand, in the judging state, if the game in which the "push order bell" described later is won is decided, and if the "bell" cannot be displayed in the game, the decision result of the extension decision is made. fails to extend. In this case, "1" is subtracted from the number of judgments. Then, when the number of times of judging reaches "0", the game shifts to the final state of judging for one game. That is, when the judge level is "Lv.3", the opportunity to decide whether to extend the extension is given three times, and when the judge level is "Lv.2", the opportunity to decide whether to extend the extension is given twice. If the judge level is "Lv. 1" or "Lv. 0", the opportunity to decide whether to extend or not is given only once.

(11) In the judging state, whether or not the "bell" can be displayed in the game in which the "push order bell" described later is won also varies depending on whether or not navigation is executed in the game. Therefore, in the judging state, navigation lottery during judging is performed. During the judgment navigation lottery, for example, whether or not to execute "all navigation" or partial navigation (for example, "4-choice navigation" or "2-choice navigation") in the game in which the later-described "push order bell" is won It is a lottery to decide. Details of the lottery will be described later.

(12) In the final judge state, a final judge resurrection lottery is performed. The judge final recovery lottery is a lottery in which the state in which the AT state is extended is determined when a predetermined rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the final state of the judge. That is, even if all the results of determination of whether or not to allow extension in the judge state result in extension failure, if a predetermined rare combination can be won in the final game, extension of the AT state is determined (AT state continue to revive). Details of the lottery will be described later.

(13) In addition, if it is determined that the AT state is extended in the judge state (including the final state of the judge), depending on the type of reward, all navigation states used in the next set of AT states (set of There may be an all-navi state lottery to determine the number). Details of the lottery will be described later.

<Promotion status lottery>
The promotion state lottery is, for example, when the set in the AT state is started (for example, when the set is started in the AT state, or when the set is shifted to the next set in the AT state), the promotion state of the set (for example, (either promotion normal state or promotion high certainty state).

The promotion state lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the promotion state lottery table shown in FIG. state is to be determined. Note that the promotion state shown in FIG. 44 is an example, and the Lv. It is also possible to provide three or more types of promotion states as promotion states at least partially different in the degree of advantage in the 5-promotion lottery.

<AT status lottery>
The AT state lottery is, for example, when the set of the AT state is started (for example, when the start game of the set of the AT state, or when moving to the next set of the AT state), the AT state of the set (for example, (either AP Normal state or AP Probable state).

The AT state lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the AT state lottery table shown in FIG. 44, and one of the AT states (AP normal state or AP High accuracy state) is determined. In addition, in the AT transition type, "first set" indicates that it is the first set in which the BB state, which is the so-called first hit, ends and the AT state starts, and "BB" is the judge reward described later. In the lottery and judge final revival lottery, the reward "weak BB" or "strong BB" is determined, indicating that the BB state has ended and the AT state has started. In addition, the AT state (AP normal state or AP high probability state) shown in FIG. 44 is an example, and three or more types of AT states are provided as AT states at least partially different in the degree of advantage in various lotteries related to AP grant. is also possible.

<AP grant lottery>
As described above, the AP grant lottery during the AT state includes the AP grant lottery (when the bell is displayed), the AP grant lottery (additional lottery when the bell is strong), and the AP grant lottery (additional lottery when the bell is displayed). During the AT state, the number of times "Bell" is displayed continuously (the number of bells) is counted, and in the AP giving lottery (when the bell is displayed), the AP given is determined according to the number of bells. be. It should be noted that the number of repeated bells is counted not only by the "push order bell" described later, but also by the "common bell" and the "strong bell". In addition, the number of bells is not cleared when a predetermined rare role (for example, "Cherry", "Watermelon", "Chance", "Determined role" described later) is won. The count is cleared when the "bell" is not displayed in the end.

For example, starting from a certain game in the AT state, if the first game wins the "push order bell", "common bell" or "strong bell" and "bell" is displayed, the number of bells is " 1”. When "replay" is won in the second game (because, of course, "bell" is not displayed), the number of bells is cleared and becomes "0". Further, when the "push order bell", "common bell" or "strong bell" is won in the second game and "bell" is displayed, the number of bells is increased by 1 to become "2". Also, if "Watermelon" is won in the second game (although "Bell" is not displayed), since it is a predetermined rare role, the number of bells is not cleared and remains "1", and then in the third game. When "Push order bell", "Common bell" or "Strong bell" is won and "Bell" is displayed, 1 is added to the number of consecutive bells to become "2".

In the AP giving lottery (when the bell is displayed), for example, at the end of each game, the AP to be given according to the number of bells being "1" or more (that is, the "bell" being displayed) is given. done to determine. In addition, the lottery is configured as a lottery for simply determining the AP to be given when "Bell" is displayed in the game (it may not be given) without using the number of bells. can also

The AP grant lottery (when the bell is displayed) is performed, for example, with reference to the "when the bell is displayed" table of the AP grant lottery shown in FIG. A grant value (grant AP) is determined. Note that the given AP shown in FIG. 44 is an example, and the value to be added can be set as appropriate. For example, as a guide, since the judge level increases by one stage at "+20", other AP grant values such as "+40" and "+60" may be set.

In the AP giving lottery (additional lottery at strong bell), for example, when a "bell" is displayed in the game in response to the winning of a "strong bell" described later, the AP giving lottery (bell In addition to the lottery result (at the time of display), it is performed to determine to additionally give AP.

The lottery for giving AP (additional lottery for strong bell) is performed, for example, with reference to the table for additional lottery for strong bell shown in FIG. It is supposed to be

AP giving lottery (additional lottery when self-powered bell is displayed) is, for example, in the case where "bell" is finally displayed even though navigation is not executed in the game (i.e., the player answers the correct answer by himself) When the pressing order is selected), in addition to the lottery result of the AP giving lottery (when the bell is displayed), it is determined to additionally give AP.

AP giving lottery (additional lottery when self-powered bell is displayed) is performed, for example, with reference to the additional lottery table when self-powered bell is displayed shown in FIG. is to be determined.

<Lv. 5 promotion lottery>
Lv. The 5 promotion lottery is performed, for example, in order to determine whether or not the judge level set in the set is to be “Lv.

Lv. 5 promotion lottery is, for example, Lv. 5 The promotion lottery table is referred to, and “Lv. 5 is not set (“non-winning”). Note that even when the number of bells is a predetermined value (for example, 5 or more), the lottery is executed (for example, with the same probability as when the "chance eye" is won in the Lv.5 promotion lottery table). You may allow

<All navigation state lottery>
As described above, the AT state is a game state that constitutes an "increase interval" in which information about a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified. It is configured as a game state that may not occur. The all-navigation state lottery is conducted to determine whether or not a state in which "all-navigation" can be executed during the AT state will occur for a certain period of time (for example, a set of five games). .

It should be noted that one unit of the "all navigation state" is one set of five games, and multiple units may be awarded at once. In addition, since one unit is managed by the number of games, if the "push order bell" is won 5 times in 5 games, the "all navigation" is executed 5 times, while the "push order bell" is also played once. , "all navigation" is not executed even once. In this way, the state of granting APs and medals is varied to enhance the interest of the game. However, the management method of the "all navigation state" is not limited to this. For example, it may be managed by the number of times "all navigation" is executed. That is, when one set is given, the "all navigation state" may continue until at least "all navigation" is executed five times. Alternatively, the number of games may be managed with no concept of the number of sets, or the number of games may be managed with a difference number.

The all-navigation state lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the all-navigation state lottery table shown in FIG. Not granting the number of games (the total number of navigation games) (“non-winning”), granting the total number of navigation games for 1 set (“1 set”), granting the total number of navigation games for 2 sets (“2 sets”), granting the total number of navigation games for 3 sets (“3 sets”), granting the total number of navigation games for 5 sets (“5 sets”), precursor state (2 games) ), giving 1 set of all navigation games (“1 set + omen”), and giving 2 sets of all navigation games after going through omen state (2 games) ("2 sets + omen"), after going through the omen state (2 games), giving the total number of navigation games for 3 sets ("3 sets + omen"), via the omen state (2 games) After that, it is decided to give the total number of navigation games for 5 sets (“5 sets + sign”).

Although the precursor state for all navigation states is specified as two games in advance, the number of precursor games may be determined by lottery, or no precursor state may be provided. In addition, the all-navi state lottery is performed even during the stay in the all-navi state, and if the lottery is won, the number of all-navi games is added and the all-navi state is extended. If the player wins the navigation state lottery and enters the all-navigation state, the all-navigation state lottery may not be performed until the number of all navigation games becomes 0 and the all-navigation state ends.

Also, when the total number of navigation games for multiple sets is given during the AT state, basically the AT state does not end until all the number of navigation games are completely consumed (the transition to the judge state is waited ), but in the AT state, if the total number of navigation games exceeding 1 set (30 games) of the AT state (for example, the total number of navigation games of 7 or more sets) is given, all Instead of waiting for the transition from the AT state to the judge state of the set until the number of navigation games is completely consumed, when the specified number of games (30 games) in the AT state of the set is consumed (or currently When the relevant set of all navigation states being digested is finished), the AT state is pseudo-terminated, and in the judge state that is transitioned after that, it is determined that the AT state is always extended (for example, always "all "Navigation" may occur, or all hands may be judged as successful, etc.), and the AT state may be extended to the next set. Also, in this case, the unredeemed number of the total number of navigation games given in the set may be carried over to the next set so that it can be redeemed.

Also, when the total number of navigation games is given during the AT state, basically the current total number of navigation games remaining (which may include the number of sets) is notified (or suggested) to the player. However, for example, when the total number of navigation games for multiple sets is given, in the notification, all the total number of navigation games are summed up and shown to the player (for example, 2 sets When the total number of navigation games for minutes is given, "10 remaining games" is displayed, and the display is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed. For each set, the total number of navigation games is shown to the player (for example, when the total number of navigation games for 2 sets is given, first, for the first set, "5 games remaining" is displayed, and 1 game is completed. The display is decremented by 1 for each set, and when "0 games remaining" is displayed, next, "5 games remaining" is displayed again for the second set, and after that, the same subtraction display is performed sequentially. ). Note that such notification is not limited to the display of the countdown method, and may be the display of the countup method.

<Navi lottery during AT>
As described above, in the AT state, "all navigation" is always executed in the all-navigation state. It is designed to be notified in some cases. The navigation lottery during AT is performed to determine whether or not to execute "all navigation" or partial navigation (for example, "two-choice navigation") when the total number of navigation games is not 1 or more.

The AT navigation lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the AT navigation lottery table shown in FIG. With a certain probability, it is determined whether to execute "all navigation", to execute partial navigation (for example, "two-choice navigation"), or to perform no navigation. It should be noted that in the AT navigation lottery, "four-choice navigation" is not decided, but it can be configured so that it can be decided.

<Judge navigation lottery>
Judge navigation lottery is a game in which the "push order bell" described later is determined as an internal winning combination in the judge state, and the stop operation information (all or part of the correct push order information indicating) to determine whether to notify. That is, it is determined whether or not to improve the probability of successful extension in the determination of whether or not the extension is possible.

In the judging navigation lottery, when the judge level is "Lv. 1" to "Lv. 3", for example, referring to the "Lv. 1 to Lv. With a probability according to the current advantageous section mode and the number of judges, either "all navigation" or partial navigation (for example, "4-choice navigation" or "2-choice navigation") is executed. is determined. In the "Lv. 1 to Lv. 3 o'clock" navigation lottery during judging, "no navigation" is not decided, but it can be configured so that this can be decided.

Focusing on the number of judgments, the navigation that is more advantageous for the "second time" than the "first time" is more likely to be executed, and the navigation that is more advantageous for the "third time" than the "second time" is more likely to be executed. there is Also, as described above, when the judge level is "Lv. 1", the determination of whether or not to extend the extension is made only once. . On the other hand, if the judge level is ``Lv. Even in such a case, next time you can receive the navigation lottery during judging with the probability specified in "2nd time". Also, if the judge level is "Lv. 3", the extension decision is made three times, so the navigation lottery during the judgment is received with the probability specified in the "first time", and if the extension does not succeed here Even if it is the case, next time you can receive the navigation lottery during judging with the probability specified in "2nd time". You can receive a navigation lottery while judging. In other words, a change in the judge level is not limited to a change in the number of times the extension decision is made, but also leads to a change in the degree of expectation of the extension decision.

Further, when the judge level is ``Lv. It is determined whether to execute navigation or not to execute navigation ("no navigation"). In the judging navigation lottery “Lv.

<Judge Reward Lottery>
A judge reward lottery is performed to determine the mode of extension (contents of privilege given to the player) when the result of the determination of whether or not to permit extension performed in the judge state is a successful extension. The mode of extension is roughly divided into extension of the AT state to the next set and extension of the AT state to the next set via the BB state. "Continuation type 1" to "continuation type 4" indicate the former, and "weak BB" and "strong BB" indicate the latter.

Further, "Continuation type 1" to "Continuation type 4" have different probabilities that the AP high probability state is set in the above AT state lottery. That is, it is set as information that can change the degree of advantage in the extended next set. However, the aspect of varying the degree of advantage in the extended next set is not limited to this. In other various lotteries performed in the AT state, the continuation type is individually referred to, and the lottery is performed with the lottery value according to this, so that the degree of advantage in the extended next set may be changed. In addition, the degree of advantage between "weak BB" and "strong BB" can be set so as to have an appropriate difference as described above. And, the probability that the AP high probability state is set in the case of "strong BB" is different (for example, the probability that the AT high probability state is set is higher in the case of "strong BB") The advantage You may make it change a degree.

The judge reward lottery is based on the display of "Bell" in a game in which the judge level is "Lv. 0" to "Lv. When the determination result of the extension determination is the extension success, for example, referring to the "Lv. 0 to Lv. Mode and the current judge level (for example, the judge level at the time of transition to the judge state is "Lv.2", and if the first judge succeeds, it remains "Lv.2", but the first If the first judge fails and the second judge succeeds, it will be "Lv. 1").

Further, in the judge reward lottery, when the judge level is "Lv.4" or "Lv.5", for example, the "Lv. Any mode of extension is determined with a probability according to the current advantageous section mode and the internal winning combination of the game.

In the judge reward lottery, if the judge level is "Lv. 0" to "Lv. 46, the internal winning combination of the game and the current judge level ( (similar to the above)), either extension mode is determined.

<Judge final revival lottery>
The final judge resurrection lottery is held in the final judge state, in order to give opportunities for so-called one-shot reversals and pullbacks. It should be noted that the mode of extension (contents of benefits given to the player) that can be determined as a result of the lottery is the same as in the judge reward lottery.

The final judge resurrection lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the final judge resurrection lottery table shown in FIG. 46, and any mode of extension is determined with a probability according to the internal winning combination of the game.

In the final judge resurrection lottery table shown in FIG. 46, the internal winning combination of the game is a specific internal winning combination ("cherry", "watermelon", "chance eye", "strong bell", "determined combination", etc.). However, this is only an example, and internal winning hands other than these specific internal winning hands (for example, "replay" and "push order") can be extended. The AT state may be extended with an arbitrary probability even for a normal hand such as "Bell". This is the same for other lotteries in which the lottery target combination is described as only a so-called rare combination in the present embodiment.

<All navigation state lottery>
All navigation state lottery is granted in the next set AT state to be extended according to the determined extension mode (reward) when the decision result of the extension determination is successful in the judge state. This is done to determine the total number of navigation games to be played. In the all-navigation state lottery table shown in FIG. 46, it is decided to give the total number of navigation games when a specific extension mode is determined, but when any extension mode is determined Also, it may be determined whether or not to give the total number of navigation games (including not given).

The all-navigation state lottery is performed, for example, with reference to the all-navigation state lottery table shown in FIG. 46, and the number of all navigation games is determined with a probability according to the determined mode of extension (reward). .

As described above, when the set of the AT state is started, the promotion state and the AT state (AP normal state or AP high certainty state) are determined, and during the AT state, the result of giving the total number of navigation games, or the AT Information on the stop operation is notified according to the result of the middle-navigation lottery, and AP is given in consideration of these results. Then, when the cumulative value of AP becomes "80" or more, the judge level is set to "Lv.4", so the AT state is extended (to the next set) in the judge state after completing the set is determined. Also, when the judge level is promoted to “Lv. When the game of the set is completed without confirming the extension of the AT state, if the total number of navigation games is also 0, the state shifts to the judge state. In the judge state, the number of times (judgement times) corresponding to the stage ("Lv. 0" to "Lv. 3") set according to the cumulative value of AP is determined, and if the extension is successful , the manner of extension is determined, and the AT state is extended in the determined manner. On the other hand, if the extension is not successful even after the number of times of judging, the AT state will be extended if the judge final resurrection lottery is won. be. If the judge final revival lottery is not won, the AT state ends without extension, the advantageous section ends, and the state shifts to the standby state of the non-advantageous section.

In the BB state, AT state, and judge state, when the net increase in the number of cards in the advantageous section is 1800 or more (that is, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is "1800" or more), It shifts to the ending state that constitutes the above-mentioned "increase section" in which "all navigation" always occurs, and this ending state continues until the advantageous section ends due to the activation of the limiter and transitions to the standby state of the non-advantageous section. Since the ending state is a dedicated game state waiting for the activation of the limiter, although "all navigating" always occurs in the game where the "push order bell" described later is won, various lottery related to the above-mentioned game characteristics is not performed.

In addition, in the BB state and AT state, for example, when the number of net increase in the advantageous section becomes 1770 or more (that is, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes "1770" or more), the ending state It is also possible to notify the player in advance of the shift to the ending state by shifting to an ending notice state that foretells the shift to , and performing a dedicated ending notice effect.

Also, the ending transition conditions are not limited to those described above. For example, when the number of sets in the AT state (the number of AT sets) reaches a predetermined number of times (eg, 11 times) (that is, when the AT state continues for a predetermined period of time (eg, 360 games)), the transition to the ending state can be Specifically, for example, when the number of AT sets reaches the 11th set, the ending state may be entered when the 11th set is completed. In this case, when the 11th set is completed, the game may transition to the ending state. In a game in which the later-described "push order bell" is determined as an internal winning combination, "all navigation" is always generated, and the ending state may be shifted to when the "bell" is displayed. Also, for example, the number of AT sets becomes the 11th set, the 11th set is completed, the state shifts to the judge state, and the AT state is decided to be extended by determining whether or not the extension is possible in the judge state. You may make it transfer to a state.

Also, the conditions for terminating the ending state are not limited to those described above. For example, when a predetermined fixed number of games (for example, an arbitrary number of games such as 101 games) has been played since the ending state started, the ending state ends and the transition to a non-advantageous section (standby state) occurs. You may do so. Further, as in the example described above, a plurality of transition conditions to the ending state may be provided, and transition to the ending state may be made according to the transition condition that is established earliest among the plurality of transition conditions. Also, the end condition of the ending state may be set according to the established transition condition. For example, in the ending state in which the transition condition is satisfied when the net increase in the number of sheets in the advantageous section becomes 1800 or more, the limiter operation is set as the end condition, and the transition condition is set when the number of AT sets reaches 11 times. In the established ending state, completion of the fixed number of games described above may be set as an ending condition.

<Example of game flow in AT state and judge state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 41, an example of the game flow in the AT state and judge state will be described. (a) and (b) of FIG. 41 show an example of a case in which the AT state transitions to the judge state and the extension fails in the judge state, and (c) to (e) of FIG. This is an example of a case where the transition to the state is made and the extension is successful in the judge state.

In addition, in (a) to (e) of FIG. 41, the "number of games elapsed" indicates the pure number of games played, and the "remaining number of games" indicates the number of games that can be stayed in the AT state and the judge state. The "winning combination" indicates the internal winning combination determined in the corresponding game, and the "display result" indicates the final result in response to the player's stop operation. "AP" indicates the cumulative value of AP, and the game state indicates whether the corresponding game is an AT state or a judge state. It indicates whether it is in a state.

In (a) of FIG. 41, first, for example, it is assumed that the set in the AT state has been completed from the 1st to the 27th games, and the cumulative value of AP is "69" by the 27th game. The 28th game is defined as the first game (1G) of the "elapsed number of games", and the following flow is described. In the second game (2G), since the "common bell" was won and "bell" was displayed, the number of consecutive bells became "1", and AP "1" was given by the AP giving lottery (when the bell was displayed). It is assumed that In addition, in the third game (3G), the "push order bell" was won and "bell" was displayed, so the number of consecutive bells was "2", and the AP grant lottery (when the bell was displayed) gave AP "3". is assumed to have been granted. Since the game period of the set ends in the third game (3G), the judge level “Lv. ing.

In the fourth game (4G), since the internal winning combination is "Replay", no decision is made as to whether or not the extension is allowed, and the judge level remains at "Lv.3". In addition, in the fifth game (5G), since the internal winning combination is "push order bell", it is determined whether or not the extension is possible, and "bell" was not displayed in the game (the bell was spilled), Since the extension failed and the number of judges was completed once, the judge level is lowered to "Lv.2". In addition, in the sixth game (6G), since the internal winning combination is "push-order bell", a determination is made as to whether or not the extension is possible. Since the extension failed and the number of judges was completed once, the judge level has dropped to "Lv.1".

In addition, in the seventh game (7G), since the internal winning combination is "push order bell", it is decided whether or not to extend the extension. The extension fails, the number of judges is also used up once, the number of judges becomes 0, and the judgment transitions to the final state (if the judge level is "Lv. 1", the transition from "Lv. descent is not performed). Then, in the eighth game (8G), since the internal winning combination is "replay", the judge final resurrection lottery is not performed, and it is determined that no extension (extension failure) will be made.

In FIG. 41(b), first, for example, it is assumed that the set in the AT state has been completed from the 1st to the 27th games, and the cumulative value of AP is "9" by the 27th game. The 28th game is defined as the first game (1G) of the "elapsed number of games", and the following flow is described. In the second game (2G), since the "common bell" was won and "bell" was displayed, the number of consecutive bells became "1", and AP "1" was given by the AP giving lottery (when the bell was displayed). It is assumed that In addition, in the third game (3G), the "push order bell" was won and "bell" was displayed, so the number of consecutive bells was "2", and the AP grant lottery (when the bell was displayed) gave AP "3". is assumed to have been granted. Since the game period of the set ends in the third game (3G), the judge level “Lv. ing.

In the 4th game (4G), the internal winning combination is "replay", so the extension decision is not made. In addition, in the fifth game (5G), since the internal winning combination is "push order bell", it is determined whether or not the extension is possible, and "bell" was not displayed in the game (the bell was spilled), Since the extension has failed and the judge level is originally "Lv. Then, in the sixth game (6G), since the internal winning combination is "replay", the judge final resurrection lottery is not performed, and it is determined that no extension (extension failure) will be made.

In (c) of FIG. 41, first, for example, it is assumed that the set in the AT state has been completed from the 1st to the 27th games, and the cumulative value of AP is "69" by the 27th game. The 28th game is defined as the first game (1G) of the "elapsed number of games", and the following flow is described. In the second game (2G), since the "common bell" was won and "bell" was displayed, the number of consecutive bells became "1", and AP "1" was given by the AP giving lottery (when the bell was displayed). It is assumed that In addition, in the third game (3G), the "push order bell" was won and "bell" was displayed, so the number of consecutive bells was "2", and the AP grant lottery (when the bell was displayed) gave AP "3". is assumed to have been granted. Since the game period of the set ends in the third game (3G), the judge level “Lv. ing.

In the fourth game (4G), since the internal winning combination is "Replay", no decision is made as to whether or not the extension is allowed, and the judge level remains at "Lv.3". In addition, in the fifth game (5G), since the internal winning combination is "push order bell", it is determined whether or not the extension is possible, and "bell" was not displayed in the game (the bell was spilled), Since the extension failed and the number of judges was completed once, the judge level is lowered to "Lv.2".

Further, in the sixth game (6G), since the internal winning combination is "push order bell", a decision is made as to whether or not the extension is possible. It shall be determined that the AT state is extended according to the manner of extension performed and determined.

In (d) of FIG. 41, first, for example, it is assumed that the set in the AT state has been completed from the 1st to the 27th games, and the cumulative value of AP is "9" by the 27th game. The 28th game is defined as the first game (1G) of the "elapsed number of games", and the following flow is described. In the second game (2G), since the "common bell" was won and "bell" was displayed, the number of consecutive bells became "1", and AP "1" was given by the AP giving lottery (when the bell was displayed). It is assumed that In addition, in the third game (3G), the "push order bell" was won and "bell" was displayed, so the number of consecutive bells was "2", and the AP grant lottery (when the bell was displayed) gave AP "3". is assumed to have been granted. Since the game period of the set ends in the third game (3G), the judge level “Lv. ing.

In the 4th game (4G), the internal winning combination is "replay", so the extension decision is not made. In addition, in the fifth game (5G), since the internal winning combination is "push order bell", it is determined whether or not the extension is possible, and "bell" was not displayed in the game (the bell was spilled), Since the extension has failed and the judge level is originally "Lv. However, in the 6th game (6G), since the internal winning hand is "Watermelon", the judge final resurrection lottery is performed, the extension is finally successful, and the AT state is extended according to the determined extension mode. It is assumed that

In (e) of FIG. 41, first, for example, it is assumed that the set in the AT state has been completed from the 1st to the 28th games, and the cumulative value of AP is "79" by the 28th game. Then, the 29th game is defined as the first game (1G) of the "elapsed number of games", and the subsequent flow is described. In the second game (2G), since the "common bell" was won and "bell" was displayed, the number of consecutive bells became "1", and AP "1" was given by the AP giving lottery (when the bell was displayed). It is assumed that Since the game period of the set ends in the second game (2G), the judge level “Lv. ing.

In the third game (3G), the internal winning combination is "Replay", but the judge level is "Lv. 4". Therefore, it is determined that the AT state is extended.

<Gaming machine using game features of AT state and judge state>
In the second game machine, by using the game features of the AT state and the judge state, it is possible to provide a game machine having the following configuration, for example.

For example, it has an AT state in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player can be notified, and a judge state in which it is possible to decide whether to extend the AT state or not. When a game for a unit (for example, 1 set of 30 games) is played, the game is shifted to the judgment state, and if it is decided to extend the AT state in the judgment state, the AT state is shifted to the next unit, and in the judgment state, the AT state is shifted to the next unit. If it is not decided to extend the AT state, it is possible to end the AT state in that unit, in the AT state, it is possible to give "AP", and in the judge state, at least the unit This game machine is capable of determining whether or not to extend the AT state by the number of times corresponding to the "AP" given in the AT state.

In addition, in the second gaming machine, the expected value of the probability of giving "AP" (the same applies to the above-mentioned "BP" and "CP") and the number of execution times of determination of whether extension is possible is not limited to those described above. For example, the winning probability of "push order bell", the display probability of "bell" (for example, the number of choices of the correct pushing order and the range of pressing positions), the winning probability of "common bell", the probability of some navigation and all navigation It is possible to comprehensively consider the execution probability and the like and appropriately set within a range in which the gambling nature does not become excessively high.

Further, for example, the conditions for imparting "AP" include the display of "bell", and in a game in which "push order bell)" is determined as an internal winning combination, the stop operation is performed in the correct order of pushes. On the other hand, if the stop operation is performed in an incorrect pressing order different from the correct pressing order, a symbol combination different from the "bell" is displayed, and in the AT state, a "pressing order bell" is displayed. )” is determined as an internal winning combination, the game machine is capable of reporting stop operation information (for example, 2-choice navigation or all-navigation) that is advantageous for the display of “Bell”.

Further, for example, in a game in which "push order bell" is determined as an internal winning combination, when the information of the stop operation that is advantageous for the display of "bell" is reported, "all navigation" in which all correct press orders are reported. and a case of performing "two-choice navigation" as partial navigation in which a part of the order of pressing the correct answer is notified.

Also, for example, when determining the notification mode of the navigation to be executed, a gaming machine capable of continuing a state (for example, all navigation state) in which "all navigation" can be performed over a plurality of games in the AT state. be.

Further, for example, the game machine can determine a "common bell" as an internal winning combination, in which "bell" can be displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation.

Further, for example, in a game in which ``push order bell'' is determined as an internal winning combination in the AT state, and ``bell'' can be displayed by itself without navigation being executed, ``AP'' is additionally given. It is a game machine that may be played.

Also, for example, the determination of whether or not to extend the judgment state is made in a game in which the "push order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, and it is decided to extend the AT state when the "bell" is displayed in the game. This is a game machine capable of executing navigation even when "push order bell" is determined as an internal winning combination in the judging state.

Also, for example, when "AP" is granted in the AT state, it is possible to set a judgment level (for example, Lv. This is a gaming machine that allows the determination of whether or not to extend the extension by the number of times (the number of times of judgment) corresponding to the judge level.

Further, for example, in the judgment state, if the set judgment level is "Lv. 4" or higher, the game machine always determines to extend the AT state.

Also, for example, in the AT state, regardless of the cumulative value of "AP", the game machine can determine whether or not to set the highest judge level to "Lv.5".

It is desirable that the judge level (which may be the cumulative value of AP) is suggested or notified in the AT state and the judge state. This may be realized, for example, by the above-mentioned gauge display, or may be realized by displaying an acquired right corresponding to the number of judges. Specifically, in the AT state, when the cumulative value of AP is 0 to 19, the number of rights "0" or the extension expectation degree "white" is displayed, and when the cumulative value of AP is 20 to 39, The number of rights "1" or the degree of extension expectation "blue" is displayed, and when the cumulative value of AP is 40 to 59, the number of rights "2" or the degree of extension expectation "yellow" is displayed and the cumulative value of AP is 60 to 79, the number of rights "3" or the degree of extension expectation "green" is displayed. "Red" is displayed, and Lv. When winning the 5 promotion lottery, the number of rights "MAX (extension confirmed)" or the extension expectation degree "gold" may be displayed.

Further, for example, in a game state in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player can be notified, and further includes a BB state different from the AT state, and when it is determined to extend the AT state in the judge state. , BB state, and then the AT state can be shifted to the next unit.

In addition, in the second game machine, when one unit of game is played in the AT state, it shifts to the judgment state, and in the judgment state, the number of extensions corresponding to the "AP" given during the AT state is allowed or not. Although it is assumed that a decision is made, the method of deciding whether to extend the AT state is not limited to this. For example, the judge state is a state in which the player can stay over a plurality of games, but the judge state may be configured so that the player can stay in only one game. In this case, in the one game concerned, the extension decision may be made for the number of times corresponding to the "AP". Alternatively, without defining a unique game state called "judge state", in the final game of AT state (or, for example, during the remaining 3 games to 1 game of AT state), the number of times according to "AP" may be determined whether or not to extend the period. That is, during the period from the end (or just before the end) of the AT state for one unit to the start of the next unit of the AT state, it is sufficient that there are at least one game or more games in which the extension decision can be made, The specifications are not limited to those described above.

Also, for example, the number of extension decisions is changed according to the "AP" given during the AT state, but by changing factors other than the number of times, the degree of advantage of the extension decision is changed. may For example, according to the "AP" given during the AT state, it may be configured such that the winning probability that the extension is successful in determining whether the extension is possible is different. As an example, even if the judge level is “Lv. If the judge level is "Lv.1", there is a 10% probability that the extension will be successful, and if the judge level is "Lv.2", there will be a 25% probability that the extension will be successful. When the judge level is “Lv. The above-mentioned winning probability may be used as the total probability, or (although only the "determined combination" will be won with a probability of 100%), basically the above-mentioned probability is uniformly applied without referring to the internal winning combination. A lottery may be used).

Further, for example, depending on the "AP" given during the AT state, the probability of occurrence of "all navigation" (resulting in successful extension) in the game in which the extension decision is made may differ. good. As an example, even if the judge level is “Lv. When the judge level is "Lv.1", "all navigation" occurs with a probability of 10%. "Navigation" may occur, and when the judge level is "Lv.

That is, for example, it has an AT state in which information of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player can be notified, and it is possible to determine whether to extend the AT state or not. It can be executed according to the fact that one unit (for example, 1 set of 30 games) has been played in the AT state. If it is not decided to extend the AT state by determining whether to extend the AT state, it is possible to end the AT state in that unit, and in the AT state, it is possible to give "AP" , and it is also possible to provide a gaming machine capable of determining whether or not to extend at least according to the "AP" given in the AT state of the unit.

[10-2. Pattern Arrangement Configuration of Second Gaming Machine]
Next, referring to FIG. 47, the symbol arrangement configuration of the second gaming machine will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of the symbol arrangement table of the second gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 47, in the second game machine, "Red 7", "Blue 7", "Black BAR", "White BAR", "Watermelon", "Cherry", "Blank", "Replay", Ten kinds of patterns of "Bell 1" and "Bell 2" are arranged at positions shown in FIG. 47 on each of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R. Further, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol.

[10-3. Internal Winning Combination Configuration of Second Gaming Machine]
Next, the internal winning combination structure of the second gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55. FIG. 48 and 49 are diagrams showing an example of the internal lottery table of the second gaming machine. Also, FIG. 50 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the symbol combination of the second gaming machine. 51 to 53 are diagrams showing an example of the symbol combination table of the second gaming machine. Also, FIGS. 54 and 55 are diagrams showing an example of the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, the display combination, etc., of the second gaming machine. That is, hereinafter, which symbol is selected according to the type of internal winning combination that is drawn by lottery in the second gaming machine, and the stop operation mode (that is, the batting order, stop operation timing, etc.) when each internal winning combination is won. (which can also be rephrased as a display combination, a winning combination, a stop display mode, a display result, etc.) will be displayed.

In the second gaming machine, in the above-described internal lottery processing (see FIG. 26), each internal winning combination shown in FIGS. 48 and 49 has a probability (lottery value/probability Denominator: 65536), and in the state of betting 3 cards, the winning is with the probability shown in FIG. 49 (lottery value/probability denominator: 65536). Combinations of symbols permitted to be displayed when each internal winning combination is won are as shown in "corresponding symbol combination" in FIG. In FIGS. 50 to 53, "BB" indicates a combination of symbols for a bonus combination, "REP" indicates a combination of symbols for a replay combination, and "FRU" indicates a combination of symbols for a minor combination. , "HZR" indicates a combination of symbols related to a specific win.

"F_2BB" may be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played in a 2-coin bet state while the game is played in a 3-coin bet state during non-flags. It is configured so that there is no case where it is determined as In a game in which ``F_2BB'' is won in a 2-bet state, if the pressing position of each reel is O (when a stop operation is performed at a timing at which the corresponding symbol can be stopped), ``BB01'' is displayed, While transitioning to the 2BB state (bonus state based on 2BB), "BB01" is not displayed if the pressed position x (when the stop operation is not performed at the timing at which the corresponding symbol can be stopped). In addition, between 2BB flags, there is no case of "losing", and since the combination of symbols related to the replay combination and the small combination is preferentially stopped over the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination, 2BB Even between flags, "BB01" is not displayed when two cards are bet. In addition, since "F_2BB" is a bonus combination exclusive to the 2-coin bet state, "BB01" will not be displayed in the 3-coin bet state even between the 2BB flags.

"F_3BB" may be determined as an internal winning combination when the game is played in a 3-coin bet state while the game is played in a 2-coin bet state. It is configured so that there is no case where it is determined as In a game in which ``F_3BB'' is won in a 3-coin bet state, or in a game in which ``losing'' occurs in a 3-coin bet state between 3BB flags, ``BB02'' is displayed and 3BB is displayed if each reel is at a pressed position . While shifting to the state (bonus state based on 3BB), "BB02" is not displayed if the pressed position x (when the stop operation is not performed at the timing at which the corresponding symbol can be stopped). In addition, since "F_3BB" is a bonus combination exclusive to the three-card bet state, "BB02" is not displayed in the two-card bet state even between 3BB flags.

"F_bell A123", "F_bell A132", "F_bell A213", "F_bell A231", "F_bell A312A", "F_bell A312B", "F_bell A321A" and "F_bell A321B" are In the non-bonus state, it is constructed so that it may be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets. Note that these are internal winning combinations described as "push order bell" in the second gaming machine, but in order to distinguish them from "push order bell B" described later, "push order bell It is described as A.

As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, "push order bell A" is a small push order combination with 6 options (any one of "batting order 1" to "batting order 6" is the correct hitting order). When it is determined as an internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct order, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the combination of “bell” symbols that are permitted to be displayed (Any one of "FRU01" to "FRU08") is displayed, and nine medals are paid out if three medals are bet, and three medals are paid out if two medals are bet.

On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct order of pressing, and if the correct order of pressing the first stop operation is performed, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the display of the "single role" is permitted. ” symbol combination (one of “FRU14” to “FRU63”) is displayed, and one medal is paid out regardless of the number of bets. Also, if the pressing order of the first stop operation is not correct, the pressed position is ◯ with a probability of 1/2 (1/4 probability in total) for each of the second stop operation and the third stop operation. If the pressed position is ◯, the symbol combination of "1-card combination" that is permitted to be displayed is displayed, and one medal is paid out regardless of the number of bets, but if the pressed position is x, a dropout occurs. No medals will be paid out.

"F_bell B123", "F_bell B132", "F_bell B213", "F_bell B231", "F_bell B312A", "F_bell B312B", "F_bell B321A" and "F_bell B321B" are In the non-bonus state, it is constructed so that it may be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets. Although these are internal winning combinations described as "push order bell" in the second game machine, they are explained as "push order bell B" here.

As shown in FIGS. 54 and 55, "push order bell B" is a small push order combination with six options (any one of "batting order 1" to "batting order 6" is the correct hitting order). When it is determined as an internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct order, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the combination of “bell” symbols that are permitted to be displayed is displayed, and 9 medals are paid out if 3 medals are bet, and 3 medals are paid out if 2 medals are bet.

On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct order of pressing, and if the correct order of pressing the first stop operation is performed, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the display of the "single role" is permitted. ” symbol combination is displayed, and one medal is paid out regardless of the number of bets. Also, if the pressing order of the first stop operation is not correct, the pressed position is ◯ with a probability of 1/2 (1/4 probability in total) for each of the second stop operation and the third stop operation. If the pressed position is ◯, the symbol combination of "1-card combination" that is permitted to be displayed is displayed, and one medal is paid out regardless of the number of bets, but if the pressed position is x, a dropout occurs. No medals will be paid out.

However, unlike the "push order bell A", the "push order bell B" differs from the "push order bell A" between the 2BB flags and 3BB flags in the 2-bet state, and between the 3BB flags in the 3-bet state. (that is, if the first stop operation is correct, this is the correct order of pressing), so if the pressing order of the first stop operation is correct, the timing of the stop operation Regardless, the symbol combination of "Bell" that is permitted to be displayed is displayed, and 9 medals are paid out if 3 are bet, and 3 medals are paid out if 2 are bet. become.

As for the symbol combination of "Bell", for example, if "Replay-Bell 1-Black BAR" of "FRU01" is displayed on the effective line (middle-middle-top), "Bell" is displayed on the cross-down line. (Bell 1 or Bell 2)” are displayed together. In other words, the phrase "the 'bell' is displayed" in the second gaming machine includes the fact that the 'bell' symbols are displayed in line on a line that is not necessarily an active line but can be recognized by the player. means Of course, the active line is configured without irregular lines, and the symbol combination is configured so that the ``bell'' symbols can be displayed all together on the activated line. ” can also be configured to be included in Moreover, such a configuration is the same for other patterns. In addition, "matching symbols" means not only matching the same symbols on each reel, but also matching different symbols that the player can identify with (or have such an idea). shall also be included.

“F_Common Bell A”, “F_Common Bell B”, and “F_Common Bell C” are configured to be determined as internal winning combinations regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. These are internal winning combinations described as "common bells" in the second gaming machine. When "common bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, regardless of the mode of the stop operation, the symbol combination of "bell" that is permitted to be displayed is displayed, and if 3 medals are bet, 9 medals will be awarded. Three medals are paid out if two medals are bet.

"F_cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. This is an internal winning combination described as "Cherry" in the second gaming machine. When "Cherry" is determined as an internal winning combination, if the pressed position is 0 for reel 3L, the symbol combination of "Cherry" ("FRU11") is displayed, and two medals are paid out regardless of the number of bets. be. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, the symbol combination of "cherry spilled" ("HZR05") is displayed. Since the symbol combination of "cherry spilled" is a symbol combination related to "lost", medals are not paid out.

"F_Watermelon" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. This is an internal winning combination described as "watermelon" in the second gaming machine. When "watermelon" is determined as an internal winning combination, if the pressed position is ◯ for reel 3C, the symbol combination of "watermelon" (either "FRU09" or "FRU10") is displayed, regardless of the number of bets. Three medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, the symbol combination of "watermelon spill" ("FRU12" or "FRU13") is displayed, and one medal is paid out regardless of the number of bets (configured so that a dropout occurs) can also be used).

"F_Replay A" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination in a non-bonus state regardless of the number of bets. This is an internal winning combination described as "replay" in the second gaming machine. When "Replay" is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol combination of "Replay" ("REP21") is displayed and a replay is awarded regardless of the mode of the stop operation.

"F_Replay B", "F_Replay C", and "F_Replay D" may be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played in a non-bonus state with 3 bets. When the game is played in the state of betting the number of coins, the internal winning combination is not determined. These are internal winning combinations described as "special" in the second gaming machine. When "special" is determined as the internal winning combination, if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, the display of "BAR alignment" (including combinations of "black BAR" symbols and "white BAR" symbols) is permitted. symbol combination (one of the symbol combinations of "REP25" to "REP34" with "BAR matching") is displayed, and if the pressed position is x, the symbol combination of other replay roles that are permitted to be displayed (Any one of "REP21" to "REP24", or a symbol combination of "REP25" to "REP34" that does not match "BAR") is displayed, and a replay is awarded.

"F_chance A", "F_chance B", "F_chance C", "F_chance D", and "F_replay E" are played in a non-bonus state with three bets. However, if the game is played with two bets, it is not determined as an internal winning combination. It should be noted that these are internal winning combinations described as "chance eyes" in the second gaming machine. When "chance number" is determined as an internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", the symbol combination of "chance slip" that is permitted to be displayed (any one of "REP03" to "REP15") is displayed, and if the stop operation is performed in either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", the symbol combination of "repeat alignment" ("REP21" ) is displayed, and replay is granted.

"F_High Bell A" and "F_High Bell B" may be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played in a non-bonus state with a 3-coin bet state, while a game is played in a 2-cow bet state. is made, it is not determined as an internal winning combination. It should be noted that these are internal winning combinations described as "strong bells" in the second gaming machine. If "strong bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, and if the stop operation is performed in any of the "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", the display of the "bell matching lips" pattern is permitted. When a combination (either “REP01” or “REP02”) is displayed (that is, “bell” is displayed) and a stop operation is performed in either “batting order 5” or “batting order 6”, A symbol combination (“REP21”) of “repeat matching” is displayed, and a replay is provided.

In the non-bonus state, the "F_SP combination" may be determined as an internal winning combination when the game is played in a 3-coin bet state. It is configured so that there is no case where it is determined as a role. It should be noted that this is an internal winning combination described as a "fixed combination" in the second gaming machine. When the "fixed combination" is determined as the internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in any of the "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", the symbol combination of "SP description" that is permitted to be displayed (any of "REP16" to "REP20") is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", the symbol combination ("REP21" ) is displayed, and replay is granted.

The "F_RB combination A" may be determined as an internal winning combination in the bonus state, but may not be determined as an internal winning combination in the non-bonus state. When the "F_RB combination A" is determined as the internal winning combination, regardless of the mode of the stop operation, the "Bell" symbol combination permitted to be displayed is displayed, and nine medals are paid out. The "F_RB combination B" may be determined as an internal winning combination in the bonus state, but may not be determined as an internal winning combination in the non-bonus state. When the "F_RB combination B" is determined as the internal winning combination, regardless of the mode of the stop operation, the symbol combination of the "single combination" permitted to be displayed is displayed, and one medal is paid out. As described above, when the game is played in the recommended game state, basically the game does not shift to the bonus state, so there are no cases where these internal winning combinations are won.

The internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combinations and symbol combinations shown in FIG. 50, the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 51 to 53, and the internal winning combinations shown in FIGS. , and the stop operation mode and the display combination etc. are merely examples, and the specifications of the second gaming machine are not limited to these modes.

[10-4. Instruction monitor configuration of the second gaming machine]
Next, referring to FIGS. 56 and 57, the instruction monitor configuration of the second game machine (that is, the mode of notifying the stop operation information) will be described. As described above, in the present embodiment, regarding the notification of the information of the stop operation, the presence or absence of execution and the determination of the mode are controlled by the main control circuit 100 side. In the second game machine, the information of the stop operation is notified by the main side notification means and the sub-side notification means, but the information of the stop operation may be notified by only one of them. can also However, in either case, the main control is still the main control circuit 100 . In the second game machine, the contents of the stop operation information reported may vary depending on the game state, etc., so this will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 56, when "push order bell" is determined as an internal winning combination, "CZ1 final state", "CZ2 normal state", "RB state", "AT state" and "judgment state" At levels Lv. 1 to Lv. 3 o'clock, according to the result of the navigation lottery, it is decided whether to execute partial navigation, to execute all navigation, or to perform no navigation ("judgment state judge level Lv. 0 When" is determined whether to perform full navigation or no navigation). Further, in the "BB state", "judgment level Lv.4/Lv.5 o'clock in judge state", "ending state", and "advantageous section 1500th game", execution of all navigation is always determined. In addition, when the game state is other than this, it is always determined that there is no navigation.

In addition, when partial navigation is performed in a game in which "push order bell" is determined as an internal winning combination, a plurality of options may occur. For example, when executing the "four-choice navigation" in a game in which "F_Bell A123" is determined as the internal winning combination, the first stop operation is "left or middle" (instruction number " 10”) or “left or right” (see instruction number “11” shown in the instruction information in FIG. 57). Therefore, when a plurality of options are generated in this manner, the sorting table shown in FIG. 57 is referred to, one of the instruction numbers is determined by lottery, and the stop operation information is notified according to the determined instruction number. It is intended to be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56, when "common bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, "CZ1 final state", "CZ2 normal state", "AT state", and "judgment state Lv. ~ Lv. 3 o'clock", according to the result of the navigation lottery, it is decided whether to perform partial navigation, all navigation, or no navigation ("judgment state judge level Lv. 0 o'clock" Either full navigation or no navigation is decided). In addition, when the game state is other than this, it is always determined that there is no navigation.

It should be noted that, in a game in which the "common bell" is determined as an internal winning combination, a plurality of options may occur when partial navigation or full navigation is executed. For example, when executing "4-choice navigation" in a game in which "F_common bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination, the first stop operation is "left or middle" (the instruction number shown in the instruction information in FIG. 57). "10"), "left or right" (see instruction number "11" shown in the instruction information in FIG. 57), or "middle or right" (see instruction number "12" shown in the instruction information in FIG. 57). information may be notified. Further, for example, when executing "2-choice navigation" in a game in which "F_common bell A" is determined as an internal winning combination, the first stop operation is "left first stop" (indicated by the instruction information in FIG. (Refer to instruction number "7" shown in FIG. 57), "Middle first stop" (Refer to instruction number "8" shown in the instruction information in FIG. 57), or "Right first stop" (Instruction number "9" shown in instruction information in FIG. ”) can be reported.

Further, for example, when executing "all navigation" in a game in which "F_common bell A" is determined as an internal winning combination, "left-middle-right" (see the instruction number "1" shown in the instruction information in FIG. 57). ), “left--right-center” (see instruction number “2” shown in the instruction information in FIG. 57), “middle-left-right” (see instruction number “3” shown in the instruction information in FIG. 57), “ Center-Right-Left" (see instruction number "4" shown in the instruction information in FIG. 57), "Right-Left-Center" (see instruction number "5" shown in the instruction information in FIG. 57), or "Right-Center -Left" (refer to the instruction number "6" shown in the instruction information in FIG. 57). Therefore, when a plurality of options are generated in this manner, the sorting table shown in FIG. 57 is referred to, one of the instruction numbers is determined by lottery, and the stop operation information is notified according to the determined instruction number. It is intended to be executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 56, when "Cherry", "Watermelon" or "Special" is determined as the internal winning combination, no navigation is always determined in any game state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 56, when "replay" is determined as the internal winning combination, "AT state", "judge level Lv. In the 1500th game of the advantageous section, execution of all navigation is always determined. In addition, when the game state is other than this, it is always determined that there is no navigation. In this case, any of the instruction numbers "1" to "6" may be determined, so as described above, the allocation table shown in FIG. Information on the stop operation is notified according to the determined instruction number.

Also, as shown in FIG. 56, when "chance", "strong bell", or "determined combination" is determined as an internal winning combination, it is determined that AP is awarded in the "AT state". If the total number of navigation games is added, no navigation is determined, and in other cases, execution of all navigation is determined. Also, in the "judgment state judgment level Lv. 4/Lv. 5 o'clock", the "ending state", and the "advantageous section 1500th game", execution of all navigation is always determined. In addition, when the game state is other than this, it is always determined that there is no navigation. In this case, any of the instruction numbers "1" to "6" may be originally determined, but if "Chance Lip", "Bell Matching Lip", or "SP Lip" is displayed Under the game feature of making it difficult for these winnings to be recognized, a sorting lottery is performed according to the sorting table shown in FIG. 57 so that either the instruction number "5" or "6" is determined. It has become.

[10-5. Lock Effect Configuration of Second Gaming Machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the configuration of the lock effect of the second gaming machine will be described. As described above, in this embodiment, under the control of the main control circuit 100, it is possible to execute a lock effect in which the progress of the game is stopped or delayed for a certain period of time. Various lock effects (including those in which reel effects are executed) are executed.

In FIG. 58, "time (ms)" indicates the execution period of the corresponding lock effect, "occurrence trigger" indicates the trigger for starting the corresponding lock effect, and "description of operation" indicates the corresponding lock effect. It shows the contents of the rock production. In addition, in the "occurrence trigger", "lever" indicates that the start operation has been performed (that is, the start lever 7 has been operated), and "3 stop OFF" indicates that the third stop operation has been performed. , indicating that the stop operation has been completed (that is, the stop button of the third stop operation has been operated and the pressing operation on the stop button has been released). In addition, in the "description of operation", "game stop" indicates that the reel performance is not performed and the progress of the game is stopped (delayed/standby) for a period specified by "time (ms)".

For example, when the symbol combination of "Bell Rip" (the above-mentioned "Bell Rip"), "Chance Rip", or "SP Rip" is displayed, the lock effect of "strong rare role lock" (lock number "1") is displayed. executed.

Further, for example, when the start operation is performed in the game that has transitioned to the CZ1 final state, if the instruction number (see FIG. 57) is either "0" or "10" to "12", "CZ1 When the lock effect of "CZ1 middle press order challenge 1" (lock number "2") is executed and the instruction number is any of "7" to "9", "CZ1 middle press order challenge 2" (lock number "3 ”) is executed, and if the command number is any one of “1” to “6”, the lock effect of “CZ1 middle press order challenge 3” (lock number “4”) is executed.

Further, for example, in the CZ state, when the third stop operation is completed in the game in which the BB lottery is won (including the case where the "determined hand" is won and the transition to the BB state is confirmed), "CZ direct win lock ” (lock number “5”) is executed.

Further, for example, when the start operation is performed in the start game in the RB state, one of "RB reel action 1" to "RB reel action 3" (lock numbers "6" to "8") is executed. executed. It should be noted that which of these is to be executed may be determined by lottery. Depending on the type of RB state to be played, a lock effect corresponding to each may be executed.

Further, for example, when the start operation is performed in the start game in the BB state (weak BB), the lock effect of "reel action for weak BB" (lock number "9") is executed.

Further, for example, when the start operation is performed in the start game in the BB state (strong BB), "reel action 1 for strong BB" or "reel action 2 for strong BB" (lock number "10" or "11") Any lock effect is executed. Which of these is to be executed may be determined by lottery, or, for example, the ratio determined according to the degree of advantage of the AT state before and after that may be made different. For example, if it is advantageous section mode A, the lock number "11" is likely to be determined, and if it is other than advantageous section mode A, it is possible to suggest the advantageous section mode so that the lock number "10" is likely to be determined. good too.

Further, for example, when the start operation is performed in the start game in the BB state (freeze BB), the lock effect of "freeze reel action" (lock number "12") is executed.

Further, for example, when the start operation is performed in the start game in the special AT state, the lock effect of "reel action for special AT" (lock number "13") is executed.

Further, for example, when the game transitions to the ending state (for example, when a start operation is performed in the starting game in the ending state), a lock effect of "ED reel action" (lock number "14") is executed.

Further, for example, when the third stop operation is completed in a game in which the RB state has ended, a "pseudo RB end lock" (lock number "15") is executed, and the third stop operation has been completed in a game in which the BB state has ended. Sometimes a "pseudo BB end lock" (lock number "16") is performed.

Also, for example, when the "push order bell" is won in a game when staying in the judge state judge level "Lv. If it is any of "10" to "12", the lock effect of "judge middle pressing order challenge 1" (lock number "17") is executed, and the instruction number is any of "7" to "9". If it is, the lock effect of "judge middle press order challenge 2" (lock number "18") is executed, and if the instruction number is any of "1" to "6", "judge middle press order A lock effect of "challenge 3" (lock number "19") is executed, and when the instruction number is "0", a lock effect of "judge middle pressing order challenge 4" (lock number "20") is executed. .

Also, for example, when it is determined that AP "3" or more is given in the AT state, and the instruction number is any of "1" to "6" (that is, when all navigation is executed) If it is determined), the lock effect of "all navigation bell short lock" (lock number "21") is executed. It should be noted that whether or not the lock effect is executed may be determined by lottery even when the above conditions are satisfied.

Further, for example, when the third stop operation is completed in the game immediately before the start of the ending state, the lock effect of "limiter lock" (lock number "22") is executed. Note that the lock effect may be executed when the limiter is activated (that is, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by the activation of the limiter).

Further, for example, when the third stop operation is completed in a game in which the relevant set in the AT state is completed, a lock effect of "lock at end of AT" (lock number "23") is executed.

Further, for example, in the judgment state, when the third stop operation is completed in the game in which the AT state is determined to be extended, the lock presentation of ``lock when judging is successful'' (lock number ``24'') is executed.

When executing various lock effects, the main control circuit 100 sends a lock command to the sub control circuit 200 that includes information that enables the sub control circuit 200 side (sub side) to recognize at least the type of lock effect to be executed. Send. Therefore, on the sub side, it is possible to execute an effect interlocking with the lock effect executed on the main side.

[10-6. Effect at start executed when RB state of second gaming machine starts]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, an example of an effect at the time of starting which is executed when the RB state is started in the second gaming machine will be described. In this embodiment, various main side effects, various sub side effects, or a combination of these effects can be executed. Description will be given of the start effect executed when the RB state is started.

In FIGS. 59 and 60, the left column shows an example of the flow of the main effect (lock effect), and the right column shows an example of the display mode flow in the effect display section as a sub-side effect. is shown. Also, FIG. 59 shows an example of the flow of effects when the BB promotion lottery is not won in the starting game in the RB state, and FIG. It shows an example of the flow of production in the case.

For example, "1Gth" in FIG. 59 assumes that the CZ1 final state is maintained. As described above, in the final state of CZ1, if the "Bell" is displayed in the game, the game will transition to a pseudo-bonus state (rank up is not considered here). , "Bell" is displayed at the end of the game, a CZ1 reward lottery is performed, the reward is determined to be "RB", and the state shifts to RB from the next game. At this time, the effect display section executes a confirmation effect (for example, display of "bonus confirmed" in FIG. 59) indicating that the transition to the pseudo-bonus state (here, the RB state) is confirmed. and Note that the fixed effect may definitively notify the transition to the RB state, or definitively notify the transition to the pseudo-bonus state. It may not be notified until there is a presence).

Next, in "2G" in FIG. 59, it is assumed that the player is staying in the start game (first game) in the RB state. As described above, in the starting game in the RB state, first, the reel effect (here, "reel action 1 for RB" with lock number "6") in which the "white BAR" pattern is displayed is executed, and then the game is played. is to be started. Also, at this time, although the progress of the game itself is stopped (delayed), an internal winning combination is determined in response to the start operation of the game, the BB promotion lottery is performed, and the RB promotion lottery is performed. A medium navigation lottery is being held. Therefore, in the game, it may be decided to shift to the BB state from the next game, and partial navigation or full navigation may be executed in the game.

In addition, in the effect display section, a start effect (for example, display of "RB start" in FIG. 59) indicating that the RB state is started at the timing when the "white BAR" pattern is stopped and displayed by the execution of the reel effect is displayed. ) is assumed to be executed. After that, when the lock period related to the reel effect ends, each reel starts rotating normally. At this time, the effect display section executes a selection effect (for example, display of "notification type selection ABC" in FIG. 59) for allowing the player to select the effect mode during the RB state from a plurality of effect modes. It is assumed that Further, at this time, when partial navigation or all navigation is executed in the game, the effect display section executes notification related to the navigation.

Here, in the second gaming machine, as the notification types for suggesting the lottery result of the BB promotion lottery in the RB state, the notification type A that is the chance notification pattern, the notification type B that is the complete notification pattern, and the reel Notification type C, which is a notification pattern, is set. Note that these are merely examples, and some of these notification types may not be set, and other notification types constituting notification patterns other than these may be set.

Notification type A is not only when the lottery result of the BB promotion lottery is a win, but also when the lottery result of the BB promotion lottery is a non-win, a production that suggests a BB promotion (promotion suggestion production) is executed with a certain probability. By doing so, the effect becomes a notification pattern in which the production is a chance notification. Therefore, since the frequency of execution of the effect is high (at least compared to the announcement type B), there is an advantage that the expectation can be raised by increasing the number of times the effect is executed, but the so-called false announcement Since it is also executed, it is a notification type that has the disadvantage that the reliability of the production (probability of actually winning when it is executed) is low. A player who regards such a point as an advantage is highly likely to select the notification type.

Further, the notification type B is a notification pattern in which the promotion-suggesting effect is executed only when the lottery result of the BB promotion lottery is a win, so that the effect is a fixed announcement. Therefore, since the so-called false announcement is not executed, there is an advantage that the reliability of the production is increased, but the frequency of execution of the production is low (at least compared to the announcement type A), so the execution of the production This announcement type has the demerit that the number of times is reduced and expectations cannot be raised in this respect. A player who regards such a point as an advantage is highly likely to select the notification type.

Notification type C is a notification pattern in which the lottery result of the BB promotion lottery is not notified by execution of the promotion suggesting effect. As described above or as described below, when the BB promotion lottery is won in the RB state (when it is determined to shift to the BB state), when the next game is started (the start game in the BB state) , “Red 7” or “Blue 7” symbols are displayed (see lock numbers “9” to “12” in FIG. 58). Therefore, the notification type is a notification pattern in which the transition to the BB state is notified for the first time by the execution of this reel effect. Therefore, there is an advantage in that, since the reel performance is suddenly executed and the transition to the BB state is made, the interest can be heightened by such a notification. As with the type B, the number of users is reduced, so in this respect, the notification type has the demerit that the degree of expectation cannot be increased. A player who regards such a point as an advantage is highly likely to select the notification type.

Note that notification types A to C each notify the player of the promotion to the BB state by different notification patterns. The control on the main side that a reel effect in which "7" is aligned is common. Therefore, it is possible to realize various notifications by combining notification patterns and reel effects while saving the control load and data amount on the main side.

Then, after executing the selection effect, the player operates the effect button (selection operation) during the game ("2nd G" in FIG. 59), and the desired notification type is determined. In the effect display section, a result effect (display of "A" after the selection operation in FIG. 59) indicating the selection result of the notification type of the player is executed. In addition, after executing the selection effect, if the player performs up to the third stop operation without performing the selection operation (that is, when all the reels are stopped), one predetermined notification type ( Here, for example, it is assumed that notification type A) is automatically determined. Also in this case, the above-described result effect is executed.

Note that the effect based on the notification type selected by the player is executed from the next game onwards, and is not executed in the current game (however, it can be configured to be executed from the current game). That is, it can be said that the above-described series of effects in the game is an introduction-time effect when the RB state is started. Also, even in this way, in the starting game in the RB state, the BB promotion lottery and the mid-RB navigation lottery are performed in the same way as other games, so there is no disadvantage for the player.

However, in the second gaming machine, the introduction-time effect as described above is executed in the start game in the RB state, and the effect based on the selected notification type is executed from the next game onward. In the event that a player wins the BB promotion lottery, it is thought that there is room for improvement as to the timing and manner in which this should be suggested or reported. An example of such a device will be described with reference to FIG. 60, which will be described later.

In FIG. 60, the flow up to the start of normal rotation of “1st G” and “2nd G” is the same as that in FIG. However, in FIG. 60, in the BB promotion lottery in the "2nd G", it is assumed that the transition to the BB state is decided.

In this case, in FIG. 60, after the selection effect is executed, the player operates the effect button (selection operation) during the game (“2nd G” in FIG. 60), and the desired notification type is displayed. When determined, the effect display section displays a specific effect ("?" in FIG. 60) different from the result effect described above.
? ? ”) is executed. That is, the player selects the notification type, and instead of the selection effect corresponding to the selection result being executed, the specific effect is executed instead. Similarly, even when the player performs up to the third stop operation without performing the selection operation after executing the selection effect (that is, when all the reels are stopped), the above-mentioned result effect Instead, a specific effect is executed. However, when the player performs up to the third stop operation without performing the selection operation, the result performance may be executed as usual instead of the specific performance, and an incentive for the selection operation may be given.

It should be noted that the specific effect may be, for example, any effect that at least suggests or notifies that the state is different from normal, as shown in FIG. It may be the same or at least partly the same production, or may be the same or at least partly the same as the promotion suggesting production as the above-mentioned final announcement. Also, for example, it may be a so-called premium effect that is not normally executed. Also, for example, when notification type A or notification type B is selected, a specific effect is executed by performing a result effect of a different effect mode from the selected effect mode, such as intentionally executing the result effect of the notification type C. may be made.

Then, when the "2nd G" game is finished (not shown) and the "3rd G" game is started as shown in FIG. ), the game is started after the reel effect (here, lock number “9”, “reel action for weak BB”) displaying “red 7” symbols is executed. will be started. In addition, in the effect display section, a start effect (for example, display of "BB start" in FIG. 60) indicating that the BB state is started at the timing when the "Red 7" pattern is stopped and displayed by the execution of the reel effect is displayed. ) is assumed to be executed.

As described above, the notification type C is a notification pattern in which no promotion-suggesting effect is executed. Therefore, in FIG. In this case, the effect corresponding to the selection result may be executed as it is, and the transition to the BB state may be indicated to the player by suddenly executing the reel effect in the next game.

<Gaming machine using RB state (and its performance specifications) game characteristics>
In the second game machine, by using the above-described game characteristics of the RB state (and its performance specifications), it is possible to provide a game machine having the following configuration, for example.

For example, there is an RB state in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and in the RB state, when the game next to the game in which the transition condition is established is started, the "white BAR" pattern arrangement is stopped. It is started after the displayed reel effect (for example, locked and white BAR matching effect) is executed. ) can be executed for selecting from a plurality of production modes, and after executing the selection production, when one production mode is selected by the player's production operation (for example, selection operation), This game machine executes an effect corresponding to the selected effect mode during the RB state.

In addition, in the second game machine, the state in which the effect mode can be selected is described as the RB state, but such a state is not limited to the RB state. For example, in the CZ1 state, a BB lottery is performed during CZ1, and when the lottery is won, the next game is shifted to the BB state, so that the CZ1 state can be selected as a production mode. state.

In addition, in the second gaming machine, the effect execution means for executing the selection effect, the result effect described later, and the specific effect are described as the effect display unit, but as long as the player can recognize these effects, other It is also possible to use the production execution means of.

Further, in the second gaming machine, the presentation mode that can be selected by the player is described as the notification type, but such presentation mode is not limited to the notification type. For example, when a player selects a character, background, or music (or a combination of these), the selected character, background, or music is rendered in the RB state. good too.

In addition, the selection operation for selecting the effect mode may be any game operation that reflects the intention of the player. , the time during which the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are pressed at the time of one of the stop operations, or the like.

Further, for example, after executing the selection effect, if one effect mode is selected by the player's effect operation, the effect display unit executes a result effect indicating the selection result of the effect mode in the game, This game machine executes an effect according to the effect mode selected from the next game.

Further, for example, it is possible to decide whether or not to grant a privilege (for example, a transition to the BB state) during the RB state. In the start game, if it is decided to give a privilege, after executing the selection effect, if one effect mode is selected by the player's effect operation, a specific effect different from the result effect in the game (for example , promotion suggestive effect).

In addition, in the second gaming machine, the privilege given during the RB state is explained as the transition to the BB state, but such a privilege is not limited to the transition to the BB state. For example, it may be possible to determine whether or not the total number of navigation games is awarded during the RB state, and this may be configured as the privilege. Further, for example, it may be made possible to determine whether or not to shift to the AT state during the RB state, and this may be configured as the privilege. Also, for example, the game period in the RB state may be extended during the RB state (the number of games to be added, or the number of sets to be added, etc.), and this may be configured as the privilege. That is, various benefits can be used as the benefit that the specific effect is executed instead of the result effect in the start game in the RB state.

Further, for example, in the start game in the RB state, if all the reels are stopped without one effect mode being selected by the player's effect operation after the selection effect is executed, a privilege is given in the game. When it is determined not to play, one predetermined performance mode is determined, and a result performance corresponding to this is executed, while when it is determined to give a privilege in the game. is a gaming machine in which a specific effect is executed.

Further, for example, in the game after the start game in the RB state, when it is decided to give a privilege, the game machine can execute the specific effect without executing the selected effect.

Further, for example, a plurality of presentation modes selectable by the player include, for example, a notification type B that is a complete notification pattern and a notification type C that is a reel notification pattern, and the notification type B is the start of the RB state. In the game after the next game of the game, it is an effect mode in which a specific effect is always executed when it is decided to give a privilege. The game machine is a performance mode in which a specific performance is not executed even when it is decided to give a privilege.

Further, for example, there is a BB state, which is a game state different from the RB state, in which information of a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and the BB state starts the next game after the game in which the transition condition is satisfied. When the game is started, a reel effect (for example, a red 7 matching effect during locking) in which the “Red 7” pattern is stopped and displayed is executed, and it is decided to give a privilege in the RB state. In this case, the game machine satisfies the conditions for transition to the BB state.

Further, for example, there is an AT state in which information of a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, which is a game state different from the RB state and the BB state, and the RB state may not shift to the AT state after the end of the AT state. BB state is a certain game state, and the game machine is a game state in which the BB state always shifts to the AT state after the end of the game state.

In the second game machine, unless the RB state is promoted to the BB state, in principle, the state does not shift to the AT state after the completion of the RB state. It may be configured such that when the player wins the game, the state may shift to the AT state after the RB state ends. In addition, in principle, the BB state always shifts to the AT state after the end of the BB state, but an AT lottery is also performed during the BB state, and if the lottery is won, the state shifts to the AT state after the BB state ends. However, if this is not the case, it may be configured so that the transition to the AT state may not occur after the BB state ends. However, in order to provide a difference in the degree of advantage between the RB state and the BB state, it is desirable to configure the AT lottery winning probability in the BB state to be higher than the AT lottery winning probability in the RB state.

Further, for example, in a game in which "push order bell" is determined as an internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the correct order of pushes, the "bell" that pays out 9 medals is displayed, while the correct answer is displayed. If the stop operation is performed in an incorrect pressing order different from the pressing order, "Bell" is not displayed, and the RB state is a game in which "Pressing order Bell" is determined as an internal winning combination, and the correct pressing order is correct. The BB state is a game state in which the correct pressing order is always reported in a game in which "Push Order Bell" is determined as an internal winning combination.

Further, for example, when a prescribed termination condition (for example, 21 games have been played) is satisfied without the transition condition to the BB state being established in the RB state, the amount of medals awarded during the RB state is specified. It is a game machine that shifts to the BB state when the amount (for example, 0) or less.

In the second game machine, the specific amount is set to "0", but this count may be determined based on the actual amount of payout, but according to a predetermined count condition. It may be counted and a determination may be made based on the count result. For example, if the determination is made based on the actual payout amount, if the payout amount during the RB state is arbitrarily decreased by intentionally performing a stop operation different from this even if the navigation is executed, A BB state may be acquired in an unintended manner. Therefore, the count condition is that if there is no navigation or partial navigation when the "push order bell" is won, the actual payout amount (9 or 1 or 0) is counted, and when the "push order bell" is won, all navigation In the case of (regardless of the actual payout amount), "9" is counted, when "watermelon" is won, "3" is counted (regardless of the actual payout), and when "cherry" is won It may be configured to count "two" (regardless of the actual payout amount).

In addition, when the stipulated end condition is satisfied without the transition condition to the BB state being satisfied in the RB state, the transition to the BB state is made as a remedy when all navigation is not executed even once in the RB state, or In the RB state, a condition such as a case where all navigation has been performed a specified number of times (for example, three times) or less may be considered to be met.

Also, for example, in the gaming machine, when a transition condition to the BB state is established in the RB state, the RB state ends even before the specified end condition of the RB state is satisfied, and the next game shifts to the BB state.

[10-7. Other devices in the second gaming machine]
The second gaming machine is not limited to the one described above, and can be further devised to enhance the interest of the game. One such example is described below.

(Press order history display)
As described above, in the second gaming machine, whether or not the "bell" was displayed in the game in which the "push order bell" was determined as the internal winning combination (i.e., whether the stop operation was performed in the correct push order) actually Not only the number of medals awarded to the player fluctuates, but also the degree of advantage regarding transition (granting) and continuation (extension) of a state advantageous to the player fluctuates. Therefore, when the "push order bell" is won, the player is very interested in information about which push order is correct.

Therefore, in the second gaming machine, it is possible to provide the player with information on the correct pressing order of the "pressing order bell". That is, by providing information on the order of pressing correct answers for a certain period of time in the past at any time desired by the player, it is possible to shift (provide) or continue (extend) a state that is particularly advantageous to the player ( In the game where it is determined whether or not these are performed, the player can select his/her own push order using the information as a clue. It is possible to further enhance the interest of the game.

As a specific example, an example of the pressing order history display in the second gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 shows the display mode of the main effect display section 21. As the pressing order history display, the first history display (upper display in FIG. 61) showing the cumulative number of correct pressing orders for today, 61 shows the second history display (the lower right display in FIG. 61) showing the content of the correct key pressing order.

Both the first history display and the second history display may be displayed in the main effect display section 21, or both may be displayed in the sub effect display section 22. , one may be displayed on the main effect display portion 21 and the other may be displayed on the sub effect display portion 22 . In addition, these may be displayed at the same time, or only one of them may be selected and displayed by the player's selection operation (or only one of them may be displayed). However, the other may be displayed by the player's switching operation).

In addition, regardless of whether the game is being played or not (for example, even when the reels are rotating), for example, a predetermined operation (for example, any It may be displayed when the button is pressed and held for 3 seconds or more), or when it is particularly necessary to display the pressing order history (for example, CZ1 final state or judge state , or when a game in which the "push order bell" in the CZ2 normal state or the AT state is won is started, etc.), it may be automatically displayed without any operation by the player. Further, it may be possible to set whether or not the push order history display is automatically displayed in the user menu (or by performing the predetermined operation described above).

In addition, the first history display indicates the cumulative number of correct pressing orders for the current day. (in other words, the types of bells to be pressed) of the winning game are counted and stored (for example, they are sequentially added and updated until they are cleared when the power is turned off), and the results of this count are displayed. (that is, it displays the history information about the "push order bell" for each business day of the amusement arcade).

The total number of correct pressing orders is counted by a counter provided on the main side (that is, managed by the main side). The history may be displayed, or counted by a counter provided on the sub side (that is, managed by the sub side). By transmitting at least information about the correct pressing order in the game in which the "pressing order bell" is won to the side, the sub side may be able to display the pressing order history. In the latter case, the information about the correct pressing order may be transmitted to the sub side as the above-mentioned "instruction number", or the information about the correct pressing order may be transmitted to the sub side as information different from the "instruction number". may be sent to However, in the second gaming machine, the above-mentioned "instruction number" does not necessarily indicate the order of pressing the correct answer itself in the normal state in which navigation is not executed, or in the AT state in which "two-choice navigation" or "four-choice navigation" is executed. In some cases, information is not provided (see FIGS. 56 and 57), and even in a game where the correct pressing order is not reported, if the correct pressing order is transmitted to the sub side every time the game starts, the information is illegal. It also increases the risk of fraudulent acts such as being read by others. Therefore, for example, it is desirable that the information regarding the order of pressing the correct keys is information different from the above-described "instruction number" and is included in the winning operation command transmitted at the end of the game.

In addition, the second history display shows the contents of the most recent 6 correct answer pressing order. For example, it is possible to set the number of games such as 30 games, etc.), the content of the correct pressing order (in other words, the type of pressing order bell) of the game that won the "push order bell" is stored (the stored contents are sequentially updated, for example, in FIFO format, until the power is turned off), and the contents are displayed (that is, the history of the "push order bell" in units of a predetermined game period). information). Note that the information may be managed by the main side or the sub side in the same manner as described above.

Also, in the second history display, it may be displayed in a display mode in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the player actually performed the stop operation in the correct order. For example, in FIG. 61, the histories of "one time before", "four times before", and "five times before" are all "middle left and right", but for "four times before", the stop operation was performed in the correct order. If the stop operation was not performed in the correct order of pressing "1 time before" and "5 times before" (the stop operation was performed in the incorrect order of pressing), the "middle left and right" of "4 times before" The display mode may be displayed in a display mode different from the display modes of "1 time before" and "5 times before". For example, "middle left and right" of "4 times before" are displayed in large characters, while "middle left and right" of "1 time before" and "5 times before" are displayed in small characters. Further, for example, the "middle left and right" of "four times before" are displayed in yellow, while the "middle left and right" of "one time before" and "five times before" are displayed in gray. By doing so, the player can know information including whether or not the stop operation was actually performed in the correct order of pressing. In addition, the pressing order (whether correct or incorrect) in which the stop operation was actually performed may be displayed for the correct pressing order indicated by each.

Also, in the second history display, it may be displayed in a display mode in which it is possible to recognize whether or not navigation has been performed (and the content of the navigation that has been performed). For example, in FIG. 61, "all navigation" is executed "1 time before" to "3 times before", "no navigation" is executed "4 times before", and "4 times before" is executed "5 times before". If "choice navigation" is executed and "2-choice navigation" is executed "6 times ago", for example, the history of "1 time ago" is set to "middle left and right (all navigation)", and "2 times The history of "previous" is set to "right-left center (all navigation)", the history of "three times ago" is set to "left-right center (all navigation)", and the history of "four times ago" is set to "middle left-right (no navigation)" , the history of "five times before" may be displayed as "middle left and right (four-choice navigation)", and the history of "six times before" may be displayed as "left middle right (two-choice navigation)". In this way, the player can know the information including whether or not the navigation was executed.

Note that the first history display and the second history display are merely examples of the pressing order history display. Only one of these may be displayed, or a pressing order history display stored according to another condition may be displayed together with or instead of these.

Here, an example of game characteristics using the pressing order history display will be described. For example, in the judge state, "push order bell" is won, "2-choice navigation" occurs, and "middle first stop" is navigated. At this time, the first history display and the second history display are performed. is displayed. In this case, in the second history display shown in FIG. 61, there are many histories of "middle left and right". Thus, one player predicts that the next game will also be "Central Left and Right", while another predicts that the next game will be "Central Right Left". Also, in this case, for example, it is assumed that the first history display also has a large number of histories of “middle left and right”. In this case, the former can perform the stopping operation with the expectation that his guess is correct, and the latter can perform the stopping operation with the expectation that the probability will soon converge. That is, by performing such a pressing order history display, it is possible to dramatically improve the enjoyment expected by the player in such a situation.

As described above, in the second gaming machine, for example, in a game in which the "bell for pressing order" is won, when the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, the "bell" is displayed, while the "bell" is displayed according to the correct pressing order. If the stop operation is performed in a different order of pressing incorrect answers, a symbol combination different from "bell" is displayed, and in a specific situation (e.g., judgment state), in a game in which "bell pressing order" is won, When the stop operation is performed in the correct order, a specific privilege (for example, extension of AT state) can be granted, and the history regarding the correct order when the "push order bell" is won according to a predetermined condition. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of storing information and displaying the history information according to specific conditions.

(Special effect for avoiding BAR matching)
As described above, the second gaming machine is provided with internal winning combinations (“F_Replay B”, “F_Replay C” and “F_Replay D”) described as “special”. Then, if this "special" is pushed forward (left first stop) and the pressed position is appropriate, the "white BAR" pattern is displayed side by side on a predetermined line ("BAR2 alignment" in FIG. 55), If the pressing position is appropriate for reverse pressing (right first stop), the "black BAR" pattern is displayed side by side on a predetermined line ("BAR1 aligned" in FIG. 55).

Then, for example, in the RB state, when notification pattern A or B is selected, if the BB promotion lottery is won due to winning "special", "white BAR" is aimed at by pushing forward. BB promotion is confirmed if the "white BAR" pattern is aligned, and if the "white BAR" pattern is aligned, another role that does not match the "white BAR" pattern is won, Even if the BB promotion lottery is not won, the notification effect may occur as a fake effect).

Also, for example, although omitted in the above description, in the BB state, the number of continuous sets of the AT state (synonymous with the above-mentioned "execution right of the AT state") is added (in short, the number of sets for which the extension is confirmed In the set number addition lottery, it is possible to add the number of sets with a predetermined probability due to winning at least "special". If you win the set number extra lottery due to winning the "special", an announcement effect that makes you aim for the "black BAR" pattern by pressing backward will occur, and if the "black BAR" pattern is aligned , The addition of the number of sets is confirmed (In addition, even if you win a different role that does not match the “black BAR” pattern and you do not win the lottery with the number of sets added, the notification effect is fake. may occur as a performance).

In this way, the "special" functions as a so-called chance role at least in the RB state and the BB state. As a result, it is possible to make the RB state and the BB state function as if they are different chance combinations despite the same internal winning combination.

However, for example, there are game states where such a hand does not function as a chance hand (or you do not want it to function), such as the normal state. It can be determined as a winning combination (for example, see FIG. 49). There are times when you won't win the number-adding lottery, but even in such a case, if you aim for the "white BAR" by pressing forward or aim for the "black BAR" by pressing backward, you can get the "white BAR" pattern or the "black BAR". The symbols will be displayed together, and the player will be confused.

Therefore, in the second gaming machine, when "special" is determined as the internal winning combination under such circumstances, a special game that can be executed even if "cherry" or "watermelon" is determined as the internal winning combination is performed. Ingenuity can be made such that the production is executed. That is, when the special effect is executed, it is suggested that there is a possibility that "Cherry" or "Watermelon" has been won.

Here, focusing on the symbol arrangement on the reel 3L (see FIG. 47), when it is desired to display the "cherry" symbol on the reel 3L, the "black BAR" symbol is usually targeted, so the "white BAR" symbol is usually aimed. is not displayed, and when the ``white BAR'' pattern is to be displayed, the vicinity of the ``white BAR'' pattern is aimed, so the ``cherry'' pattern is not displayed (because the maximum number of sliding pieces is four patterns). In addition, in the second gaming machine, "cherry" is configured as a combination that can cause failure (see FIG. 55). Therefore, when the special effect is executed, the player will aim at the vicinity of the "black BAR" symbol so as not to miss the "cherry" and perform the stop operation. It's also a great way to play. That is, when the player performs the stop operation by forward pressing, if the game is played in an appropriate game method according to the execution of the special effect, it is possible to avoid the "white BAR" pattern matching as a result.

Focusing on the symbol arrangement on the reel 3C (see FIG. 47), if the symbol "watermelon" is to be displayed on the reel 3C, normally special symbols other than the "black BAR" symbol ("red 7" symbol, "Blue 7" symbol, "white BAR" symbol), so the "black BAR" symbol will not be displayed. , "Watermelon" symbols are not displayed (because the maximum number of sliding pieces is 4 symbols). In addition, in the second game machine, "watermelon" is configured as a combination that can cause a dropout (see FIG. 55). Therefore, when the special effect is executed, the player will aim at the vicinity of the special symbols other than the "black BAR" symbol so as not to miss the "watermelon", and will perform the stop operation. is actually a proper way to play. That is, when the player performs a stop operation other than forward pressing, if the player tries to play the game in an appropriate game method according to the execution of the special performance, it is possible to avoid the "black BAR" pattern matching as a result.

In addition, when the player performs the stop operation by pressing backward, if the player is aiming at the vicinity of the "black BAR" symbol on the reel 3R, the stop display mode of the first stop (in short, the "black BAR" symbol or whether the "watermelon" pattern is displayed), it is possible to determine whether or not the "watermelon" has been won, but on the other hand, it is possible to determine whether the "chance eye" or "strong bell" has been won. (Refer to FIG. 55. At the first stop on the right, only "repeat alignment" is stopped and displayed). That is, if the game is played with the reverse push, there is a high possibility that it will not be possible to determine that a favorable opportunity has arrived. Therefore, if a game is played by an appropriate game method, the possibility that the game will be played by reverse pressing is inevitably low, and as a result, it is possible to avoid the "black BAR" pattern matching. However, it is also possible to apply the pattern arrangement like the reel 3C described above to the reel 3R, thereby avoiding the matching of "black BAR" patterns.

(First special production)
As described above, in the second gaming machine, the BB state that starts with the execution of the reel performance with all the "blue 7" symbols is the strong BB state, which is considered to be more advantageous to the player than the weak BB state. It's becoming Therefore, during the strong BB state, the first special effect different from the normal effect is performed in order to suggest that the player has a high degree of advantage.

The first special effect is, for example, a so-called “episode effect” (or “story effect”, etc.), which is a continuous effect in which a series of stories (using video and audio) flows over multiple games. Can be configured. In addition, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of such effects, each of which has at least a part of the content (episode) different from each other, and in this way it is possible to keep the player from getting bored.

In the second game machine, it is possible to determine which content of the first special effect is to be executed in line with (related to) the situation immediately before shifting to the strong BB state. can be made.

In the second game machine, it is possible to shift to the strong BB state from any of the CZ1 state, CZ2 state, RB state, or AT state (via the judge state). When the state is shifted to the BB state, a first special effect is determined in which an episode related to the character mainly appearing in the CZ1 state flows. When the RB state is shifted to the strong BB state, the first special performance in which episodes mainly appearing in the RB state are played can be determined.

Further, for example, in the AT state, an effect in which a different enemy character can appear for each set is performed, and in the judge state after completing the set, a battle effect with the appearing enemy character is performed, and the extension is successful. If the extension fails, the result of the battle production is shown as battle victory, and if the extension fails, the result of the battle production is shown as battle defeat. When the transition is made, it is possible to determine the first special effect in which an episode related to the enemy character (and ally character) that appeared appears.

Also, for example, even in the AT state, it is possible to execute an episode production in which the story progresses sequentially over multiple sets (for example, the 1st set to the 11th set), and the transition from the judge state after completing the set to the strong BB state. In this case, it is possible to determine the first special performance in which an episode related to the executed episode performance (or an episode appropriately summarized according to the progress of the episode performance in the AT state) flows. In this way, even when the episode production in the AT state progresses to some extent and then the transition to the strong BB state occurs, there is no discrepancy in the relevance, and the advantageous state ( It is possible to entertain the first special performance during the strong BB state).

(Second special production)
As described above, in the second gaming machine, when the judge level becomes "Lv.4" or "Lv.5" in the AT state of one set of 30 games, the AT state is extended to the next set. It is determined that Also, in the AT state, it is possible to provide a plurality of sets of all navigation states for one set of five games.

Here, since one set of AT states is 30 games, even if a plurality of sets of all navigation states are given, basically six sets of all navigation states can be digested in one set of AT states. Therefore, in the second gaming machine, a continuous effect that can be executed over five games in all navigation states (for example, it may be configured as the above-described "episode effect" or may be configured as a different effect). are prepared (referred to as "continuous effects 1 to 6"), and in the AT state, the effects are sequentially executed in response to one set of all navigation states being executed. Further, the continuous effects 1 to 6 constitute a series of effects when connected in order (originally one effect, which may be divided into 6 parts).

Then, a series of productions in which the continuous productions 1 to 6 are connected in order (partially, the beginning and the end may be different, and basically the same production is acceptable), which is called the second special production. so that it can be used for other purposes. In doing so, efforts are made to prevent discrepancies in the content.

Specifically, in the set in the AT state, when the judge level becomes "Lv.4" or "Lv.5" (when the corresponding "AP" is given), after the set In the game of , a second special performance is executed. In this way, when the next set is determined in the AT state, and when it becomes the all-navigation state where all navigation occurs, although the content of the advantage differs, the same effect is performed. Therefore, it is possible to clearly show the player that it is advantageous, and it is also possible to reduce the amount of data for presentation.

In addition, when the second special effect is executed in response to the judge level becoming "Lv.4" or "Lv.5", for example, the second special effect is executed from the beginning, the player cannot watch the second special effect to the end, and there is a possibility that the contents of the second special effect will be inconsistent and the interest will be reduced. Therefore, when continuous effects 1 to 6 are executed in all navigation states, the number of remaining games in the set is not taken into account (because it is divided into 5 games), but the second special effect is executed. In that case, the number of games remaining in the set is taken into consideration. For example, when the judge level becomes “Lv. The same effect as the 1st to 5th games of the continuous effect 6 is executed during the 26th to 30th games.

That is, even if the same effect is used, when it is used as each of the continuous effects 1 to 6, it is executed in a so-called cue, while when it is also used as the second special effect , continuous performances 1 to 6 can be executed from the middle. In this way, while reducing the amount of data by standardizing the performance data of the performance executed in different situations, there is no discrepancy and no sense of incongruity is given during the advantageous state (AT state). You can enjoy the second special performance of.

[10-8. Summary of inventions related to the second game machine (appendix)]
As described above, the second gaming machine can provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

(First invention group)
In a conventional game machine, there is a special game state (for example, AT state) in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and a special game state (for example, AT state) in which the degree of expectation for transition to this special game state is higher than that in the normal game state. For example, a CZ (chance zone) state) has been proposed (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2015-104445).

By the way, since such a special game state is one of the states in which the player increases interest in the game, for example, if the game characteristics related to the duration, lottery content, etc. are monotonous, the interest in the game may increase. There was a problem that there is a possibility that the

A first object of the invention group is to provide a game machine capable of increasing the interest of the game.

variable display means (for example, a variable display unit) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in multiple columns; internal winning combination determination means for determining an internal winning combination (eg, main CPU 101 for performing internal lottery processing) stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) for stopping the variable display of symbols in accordance with the internal winning combination and the player's stop operation; Special game state control means (for example, controlling each game state in the second game machine) capable of controlling a special game state (for example, RB state or BB state in the second game machine) in which information on the stop operation is notified main CPU 101) and a special game state (for example, the second game) in which the degree of expectation for the establishment of the special condition is higher than that of the normal game state (for example, the normal state in the second gaming machine) when the special condition is established. and a special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that controls each game state in the second game machine), and the specified end condition of the special game state is a predetermined combination ( For example, the number of times that a predetermined symbol combination (for example, the bell in the second gaming machine) was not displayed in a game in which the pressing order in the second gaming machine (for example, the bell in the second gaming machine) was determined as the internal winning combination is a specified number of times (for example, 7 times) ) is a gaming machine characterized by including reaching
According to this gaming machine, in the special game state in which the degree of expectation for transition to the special game state is higher than in the normal game state, the duration of the special game state depends on whether or not the predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the game in which the predetermined combination is won. fluctuates. That is, it is possible to cause undulations in the game period of the special game state according to the game result of the player. Therefore, the playability of the special game state can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

The stop control means displays the predetermined symbol combination when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined manner (for example, correct answer pressing order) in a game in which the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination. When a stop operation different from the mode is performed, a symbol combination different from the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, and when the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the special game state, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. The above-mentioned characterized by further comprising a special notification means (for example, an instruction monitor or an effect display unit) capable of notifying information of a stop operation (for example, 4-choice navigation, 2-choice navigation, or all navigation) that is advantageous to is a gaming machine.
According to this gaming machine, in the special game state, whether or not the predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the game in which the predetermined combination is won (that is, whether or not the game period of the special game state progresses) is further determined by the stop operation. information is notified or not. That is, it is possible to cause undulations in the game period of the special game state depending on whether or not the information of the stop operation is notified. Therefore, the playability of the special game state can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

The special notification means performs a first notification (for example, all navigation) in which all of the predetermined modes are notified, and a second notification in which a part of the predetermined modes is notified (for example, 4-choice navigation and 2 The game machine described above is characterized in that there is a case where selection navigation is performed.
According to this gaming machine, in the special game state, whether or not the predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the game in which the predetermined combination is won (that is, whether or not the game period of the special game state progresses) is further determined by the stop operation. It also fluctuates depending on the notification mode of the information. That is, it is possible to cause undulations in the game period of the special game state also by the notification mode of the information of the stop operation. Therefore, the playability of the special game state can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

It further comprises a notification mode determination means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs a navigation lottery during CZ2) that determines the mode of notification performed by the special notification means, and the notification mode determination means is the game in which the second notification is performed. , when the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, the state in which the second notification can be performed (for example, navigation state 1 or navigation state 2) is continued, and when the predetermined symbol combination is not displayed, the second notification is continued. The gaming machine described above is characterized in that it terminates a state in which 2 notification can be performed.
According to this gaming machine, when a part of the stop operation mode in which the predetermined symbol combination is displayed is notified in the special game state, the notification can be made depending on whether or not the predetermined symbol combination is finally displayed. It is determined whether the condition persists. That is, the continuation period of the notification varies according to the player's game result (result of selection of the stop operation mode), and as a result, it is possible to cause undulations in the game period of the special game state. Therefore, the playability of the special game state can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

The internal winning combination determination means is capable of determining a specific combination (for example, a common bell in the second gaming machine) that allows the predetermined symbol combination to be displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation, as the internal winning combination. It is the gaming machine described above.
According to this gaming machine, when the specific combination is won in the special game state, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed regardless of the player's stop operation mode. ) It may be possible to give the impression that the progress of the game period in the special game state has been avoided by the player's own stop operation, or that a predetermined privilege has been given as will be described later. Therefore, the playability of the special game state can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

When the predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the special game state, a privilege giving means (for example, CP giving lottery) capable of giving a predetermined privilege (for example, CP in the second gaming machine) that contributes to the establishment of the special condition The gaming machine described above is characterized by further comprising a main CPU 101) for executing the game.
According to this gaming machine, for example, when a predetermined symbol combination is displayed in a game in which a predetermined combination is won, it is possible not only to avoid the progress of the game period in the special game state, but also to shift to the special game state. It is possible to give a predetermined privilege that contributes to Therefore, the playability of the special game state can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

The above-described gaming machine is characterized in that the privilege granting means can grant the predetermined privilege in response to the establishment of the special condition.
According to this gaming machine, it is possible to provide a predetermined privilege even when the special game state is started. That is, even when the special game state is started, it is possible to change the degree of expectation of the special game state. Therefore, the playability of the special game state can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

The privilege granting means can impart the predetermined privilege even when a special combination in which the predetermined symbol combination cannot be displayed (for example, a confirmed combination in the second gaming machine) is determined as an internal winning combination. A gaming machine as described above characterized in that:
According to this gaming machine, even if the predetermined symbol combination is not displayed in the special game state, the predetermined privilege may be provided. That is, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the player even if the predetermined symbol combination is not displayed. Therefore, the playability of the special game state can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that the special condition can be established when the given condition of the predetermined privilege reaches a predetermined condition (for example, the cumulative CP is 5) in the special game state. be.
According to this gaming machine, in a special game state, for example, when a predetermined combination is won, if a predetermined combination of symbols can be displayed, the special game state is continued, and a predetermined privilege is also given, and furthermore, as a result of the accumulation, a special game is played. The privilege of being able to transition to a state may also be granted. Therefore, the playability of the special game state can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

The special game state is configured to be able to continue until the specified termination condition is satisfied even after the granting state of the predetermined privilege reaches the predetermined state, and when the specified termination condition is satisfied, the predetermined privilege can be continued. is the predetermined condition, the special condition is established and the special game state is entered; It is possible to provide the predetermined privilege even after the game, the special game state has a plurality of types with different degrees of advantage (for example, RB and BB in the second gaming machine), and the specified end condition in the special game state is satisfied, the specific situation (for example, the cumulative CP is 6 or more) in which the predetermined privilege is granted further from the predetermined situation than when the grant situation of the predetermined privilege is the predetermined situation The gaming machine described above is characterized in that the transition to the special game state with a higher degree of advantage is easier when the player is present.
According to this gaming machine, even if the state of granting the predetermined privilege becomes the predetermined state and the transition to the special game state is determined, the special game state continues until the specified end condition is satisfied, and furthermore, When a predetermined privilege is given, it becomes easy to shift to a special game state with a high degree of advantage. That is, the special game state is configured so that it is possible to give further benefits in the remaining game period even after the determination of the transition to the special game state. Therefore, the playability of the special game state can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

In the special game state, if the specified termination condition is satisfied before the granting status of the predetermined privilege reaches the predetermined status, at least a special game that can determine whether the granting status of the predetermined privilege is the predetermined status The gaming machine described above is characterized by further comprising determining means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs a special CP grant lottery).
According to this gaming machine, in the special game state, even if the condition of granting the predetermined privilege does not reach the predetermined condition and the specified end condition is satisfied, the condition of granting the prescribed privilege finally does not meet the predetermined condition. There is a case where the transition to the special game state is determined. That is, the special game state is configured so as to always give the player a sense of anticipation from the start to the end. Therefore, the playability of the special game state can be enhanced, and the amusement of the game can be enhanced.

(Second group of inventions)
A conventional game machine is provided with a special game state (for example, an AT game state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to a player is notified, and the game period of the special game state is set by one unit (set) of a predetermined number of games. , a continuation lottery is performed according to a predetermined continuation rate, and whether or not to continue the special game state for each unit is proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008- 272233).

However, in such a game machine, since it is determined whether or not the special game state is to be continued simply according to a predetermined continuation rate, the game characteristics are monotonous, and there is a risk that the interest in the game may decrease. There was a problem that there is

A second object of the invention group is to provide a game machine capable of increasing the interest of the game.

variable display means (for example, a variable display unit) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in multiple columns; internal winning combination determination means for determining an internal winning combination (eg, main CPU 101 for performing internal lottery processing) Stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) that stops the variable display of symbols in accordance with the internal winning combination and the player's stop operation, and information on the stop operation that is advantageous to the player can be notified. Game state control means for controlling transitions between a plurality of game states including at least a special game state (for example, AT state in the second gaming machine) (for example, controlling transitions between game states in the second gaming machine) main CPU 101) and extension decision means (for example, a second a main CPU 101 for controlling a judgment state in the gaming machine, and the extension determination means determines the extension in response to one unit (for example, 30 games in one set) being played in the special game state. It is possible to determine whether or not the game state can be determined, and the game state control means transfers the special game state to the next unit when it is determined to extend the special game state by the determination of whether or not the extension can be performed, and the extension is performed. When it is not decided to extend the special game state by decision of propriety, it is possible to end the special game state in the unit, and in the special game state, according to the establishment of the specific grant condition It is possible to give a specific value (for example, AP) to the unit, and the extension determination means can decide whether to extend the extension according to the specific value given at least in the special game state of the unit. It is a game machine characterized by being.
According to this gaming machine, the degree of expectation for extension as to whether or not the special game state is to be extended varies by one unit according to the status of provision of the specific value, the result of determining whether or not to permit extension, and the like. That is, for each unit, it is possible to vary the degree of expectation for extension of the special game state according to the game result of the player. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability related to the extension of the special game state, and to enhance the interest of the game.

The specific granting condition includes that a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a bell in the second gaming machine) is displayed, and the stop control means determines that a predetermined combination (for example, a bell in the second gaming machine) is displayed. In a game determined as an internal winning combination, when a stop operation is performed in a predetermined manner (for example, in order of pressing the correct answer), the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, while a stop operation different from the predetermined manner is performed. In such a case, a symbol combination different from the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, and when the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination in the special game state, information of a stop operation (for example, , 2-choice navigation, and all-navigation) is further provided with information notification means (for example, an instruction monitor and an effect display unit).
According to this gaming machine, in a special game state, the display of a predetermined combination of symbols in a game in which a predetermined winning combination is won is one of the specific granting conditions for granting a specific value, and the predetermined combination of symbols is displayed. Whether the stop operation information is notified or not varies depending on whether or not the stop operation information is notified. That is, in the special game state, depending on whether or not the information of the stop operation is notified with respect to the predetermined combination, it is possible to change the granting state of the specific value, and it is also possible to change the degree of advantage in determining whether or not the extension is possible thereafter. It's becoming Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability related to the extension of the special game state, and to enhance the interest of the game.

The information notification means performs a first notification (for example, all-navigation) in which all of the predetermined modes are notified, and a second notification (for example, two-choice navigation) in which a part of the predetermined modes is notified. The game machine described above is characterized in that there is a case where the game is performed.
According to this gaming machine, in the special game state, whether or not the predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the game in which the predetermined combination is won also varies depending on the notification mode of the stop operation information. That is, in the special game state, it is possible to change the state of granting of the specific value depending on the manner in which the information of the stop operation relating to the predetermined combination is reported, and also to change the degree of advantage in determining whether or not the extension is possible thereafter. . Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability related to the extension of the special game state, and to enhance the interest of the game.

Information mode determination means for determining the mode of notification performed by the information notification means (for example, the main CPU 101 for performing an all-navigation state lottery or an AT navigation lottery), wherein the notification mode determination means determines the mode of notification performed by the information notification means in the special game state. The gaming machine described above is characterized in that the state in which the first notification can be performed (for example, all navigation state) can be continued over a plurality of games.
According to this gaming machine, in the special game state, there is a case where the state in which all of the stop operation modes in which the predetermined symbol combination is displayed can be notified continues over a plurality of games. That is, it is possible to create a state in which the provision of the specific value is given preferential treatment depending on the manner in which the stop operation information is reported, without unnecessarily increasing the control load. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability related to the extension of the special game state, and to enhance the interest of the game.

The internal winning combination determination means is capable of determining a specific combination (for example, a common bell in the second gaming machine) in which the predetermined symbol combination can be displayed regardless of the mode of the stop operation, as the internal winning combination. The gaming machine as described above is characterized in that even when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the game state, the information notification means can perform notification.
According to this gaming machine, when the specific winning combination is won in the special game state, the predetermined symbol combination is displayed regardless of the player's stop operation mode. In this case, for example, when the information of the stop operation is not reported (or, for example, includes the case where only a part of the information is reported), the player is instructed to perform his/her own stop operation (although he won the predetermined combination). In some cases, it may be possible to give the impression that a specific value is given by the Sometimes we can. In other words, when a predetermined combination is won, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game due to the continuation of unfavorable game results or lottery results. Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the playability. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability related to the extension of the special game state, and to enhance the interest of the game.

In the game in which the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the special game state, when the predetermined symbol combination is displayed without being notified by the information notification means, the specific value is additionally provided. (For example, an additional lottery is performed when the bell is displayed on its own power).
According to this gaming machine, the fact that the information of the stop operation is not notified may not necessarily work against the player. That is, when the stop operation is not notified, the specific value may be additionally given to the player compared to when the stop operation is notified, so the stop operation is not notified. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game due to the absence of the game. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability related to the extension of the special game state, and to enhance the interest of the game.

The extension decision is made in the game in which the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and when the predetermined symbol combination is displayed in the game, it is determined to extend the special game state. In the gaming machine described above, it is possible to perform notification by the information notification means (for example, a navigation lottery during judging) even in a game in which the extension decision is made.
According to this gaming machine, the predetermined combination is also used to determine whether or not the extension is possible, and it is possible to determine whether or not the information of the stop operation is to be reported in the determination of whether or not the extension is permitted when the predetermined combination is won. That is, in the special game state, the given combination changes the state of granting the specific value, and in the case of the determination of whether or not the extension is possible, the determination result is changed, and furthermore, the information of the stop operation is notified regarding the predetermined combination. It is also possible to cause undulations in the degree of expectation for the extension of the special game state depending on whether or not it is played. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability related to the extension of the special game state, and to enhance the interest of the game. Also, even in this case, since there is no need to increase the number of combinations of wins and the number of game states, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data and the control load.

The plurality of game states further include an extension determination state (for example, a judge state in the second gaming machine) capable of determining whether or not to extend the extension, and the game state control means controls 1 unit in the special game state. When the minute game is played, the state is shifted to the extension determination state, and in the extension determination state, when it is determined to extend the special game state by the extension determination, the special game state is shifted to the next unit. If it is not decided to extend the special game state by the determination of whether or not to extend the special game state, the special game state can be ended in the unit, and the specific value is given in the special game state. Then, it becomes possible to set a stage (for example, Lv.0 to Lv.5) according to the accumulated grant result, and in the extension determination state, the number of times corresponding to the set stage is determined. The game machine described above is characterized in that it is possible to
According to this gaming machine, in the extension determination state, determination of whether or not to permit extension is made for the number of times corresponding to the stage set according to the assigned specific value. As a result, for example, in the special game state, the specific value can be given in small portions by lottery, so that the expectation of the specific value given in the special game state can be increased, and in the extension decision state, the extension decision can be made. Since the number of times of execution can be made easy to understand, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to understand. Also, for example, it is possible to show the player information suggestive of the given specific value and the level set by this to heighten the player's sense of anticipation. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability related to the extension of the special game state, and to enhance the interest of the game.

In the extension determination state, when the set stage is a specific stage (for example, Lv.4) or higher, the extension of the special game state is always determined. It is a game machine.
According to this gaming machine, when the specific value given in the special game state becomes the specific situation and a stage higher than the specific stage is set, it is always determined that the special game state is extended. That is, since the extension of the special game state may be determined depending on the state of granting the specific value during the special game state, the game characteristics can be further diversified, and the expectation during the special game state can be increased. can be further increased. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability related to the extension of the special game state, and to enhance the interest of the game.

In the special game state, it is possible to decide whether or not the level to be set is the highest level regardless of the accumulated grant result of the specific value (for example, Lv.5 promotion lottery is performed). The gaming machine described above, characterized by
According to this gaming machine, for example, even if the current state of granting the specific value in the special game state is not desirable for the player, it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability related to the extension of the special game state, and to enhance the interest of the game.

The plurality of game states are game states in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player can be notified, and a specific game state (for example, BB state in the second gaming machine) different from the special game state is further included. Including, the game state control means, when it is determined to extend the special game state by the determination of whether or not to extend, it is possible to shift the special game state to the next unit after shifting to the specific game state. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is possible.
According to this gaming machine, when the special game state is extended to the next unit, there is a case where the transition is made after passing through the specific game state which is also advantageous for the player. That is, when determining whether or not to extend the special game state, it is not only determined whether or not to extend the special game state, but the special game state may be extended after shifting to the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the playability, and it is possible to further increase the expectation of the determination of whether or not the extension is possible. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the playability related to the extension of the special game state, and to enhance the interest of the game.

(Third invention group)
A conventional game machine has been proposed in which the player can select the content of the effect to be executed during a special game state (for example, a bonus game) that is advantageous to the player by selecting a character of his or her choice. (See, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2008-148810).

By the way, in such a game machine, various kinds of special game states can be provided, and specifications such as start timing and timing are also diversified. For this reason, depending on the type of special game state, the player may not be able to smoothly select an effect, and there is a possibility that the interest in the effect may decrease.

A third invention group aims to provide a game machine capable of increasing the interest in presentation.

variable display means (for example, a variable display unit) capable of variably displaying a plurality of symbols in multiple columns; internal winning combination determination means for determining an internal winning combination (eg, main CPU 101 for performing internal lottery processing) stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) for stopping the variable display of symbols in accordance with the internal winning combination and the player's stop operation; Special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101 for controlling each game state in the second game machine) capable of controlling a special game state (for example, RB state in the second game machine) in which information on the stop operation is notified , production execution means (for example, production display unit) for executing production, and production operation means (for example, production buttons) capable of accepting a player's production operation related to the production executed by the production execution means. The special game state is a special symbol performance (for example, lock middle white BAR alignment performance) to stop and display the special symbol combination on the variable display means when the next game of the game in which the special condition is established is started. is executed, and the effect execution means selects the effect mode (for example, notification type) during the special game state from among a plurality of effect modes in the game in which the special game state is started. After executing the selection effect, when one effect mode is selected by the player's effect operation, the effect corresponding to the selected effect mode is executed in the special game It is a gaming machine characterized by execution during the state.
According to this gaming machine, the special game state is configured to be started after the special symbol performance is executed when the game next to the game in which the transition condition is established is started, and in the start game, the A selection effect is executed in which the player can select the effect mode during the special game state. That is, even if the special game state is started after the corresponding symbol performance is executed in the first game, it is possible to smoothly select the performance mode in the flow of the game. . Therefore, even in the special game state having such a configuration, the effect selection can be smoothly performed, and the interest in the effect can be enhanced.

After executing the selected effect, when one effect mode is selected by the player's effect operation, the effect execution means executes a result effect indicating the selection result of the effect mode in the game, and performs the next effect in the game. The gaming machine described above is characterized in that an effect corresponding to the effect mode selected from the game is executed.
According to this gaming machine, in the start game of the special game state, the special symbol effect is executed, and after the selection effect is executed, when the player selects the effect mode, the result effect corresponding to the selection result in the game. is executed, and the effect is executed in the effect mode selected from the next game. That is, the start game of the special game state is performed while the benefits during the special game state (for example, the notification of advantageous stop operation information, the grant of a specific privilege described later, etc.) are unchanged. can be configured as a state in which Therefore, even in the special game state having such a configuration, the introduction-time effect including the effect selection can be smoothly executed, and the interest in the effect can be enhanced.

It further comprises privilege granting means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs a BB promotion lottery) capable of determining whether or not to grant a specific privilege during the special game state, and the privilege granting means is configured to operate when the special game state is started. It is possible to decide whether or not to give the specific privilege in the game, and the effect executing means decides to give the specific privilege by the privilege giving means in the game in which the special game state is started. In this case, after executing the selection effect, when one effect mode is selected by the player's effect operation, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, a promotion suggesting effect) different from the result effect in the game. The gaming machine described above is characterized by:
According to this gaming machine, there is a case where a specific privilege is given even in the start game of the special game state, and in this case, a specific effect different from the result effect can be executed at the time of the effect operation related to the player's selection of effect. and That is, essentially, in the situation where the selection result of the effect selection is shown, it is possible to suggest the result of providing the specific privilege to the player by executing the effect different from this. Therefore, it is possible to dramatically enhance the interest of the presentation at the time of introduction in the special game state having such a configuration, and to enhance the interest in the presentation.

In the game in which the special game state is started, after the selection effect is executed by the effect execution means, the variable display of the patterns of all the rows is performed without selecting one effect mode by the effect operation of the player. When it is stopped, when it is decided not to give the specific privilege by the privilege giving means, one predetermined effect mode is determined, and the effect execution means executes the result effect. In the gaming machine described above, the specific effect is executed by the effect executing means when the specific benefit is determined to be given by the special benefit providing means.
According to this gaming machine, even if the player is not so interested in the effect selection, or wants to advance the game quickly, even if the player does not select the effect, the result will be obtained at the end of the game. There are cases where effects are executed, and there are cases where specific effects are executed. Therefore, it is possible to dramatically enhance the interest of the presentation at the time of introduction in the special game state having such a structure, and to enhance the interest of the presentation, while also considering the intention of the player.

The effect execution means, in the game subsequent to the game in which the special game state is started, when it is determined by the privilege giving means to give the specific privilege, without executing the selected effect The gaming machine described above is characterized in that it is capable of executing a specific effect.
According to this gaming machine, the specific effect suggesting the granting result of the specific privilege functions as one of the operation-linked effects in which the mode changes according to the player's effect operation in the start game of the special game state, In subsequent games, it functions as one of the suggestive effects. Therefore, it is possible not only to increase interest in the performance, but also to reduce the amount of data related to the performance.

The plurality of production modes include a first production mode (for example, notification type B that is a complete notification pattern) and a second production mode (for example, notification type C that is a reel notification pattern). is an effect mode in which the specific effect is always executed when it is determined that the specific privilege is given by the privilege giving means in the game subsequent to the game in which the special game state is started. , the second effect mode is the game after the game in which the special game state is started, even if it is decided to give the specific privilege by the privilege giving means The gaming machine described above is characterized in that the game machine is in an effect mode in which the specific effect is not executed.
According to this gaming machine, in the game after the start game in the special game state, depending on the selected effect mode, the specific effect may or may not suggest the granting result of the specific privilege. It has become. In the latter case, for example, the player can be notified of the result of giving the specific privilege by executing a specific symbol effect, which will be described later. In other words, it is possible to notify the player of the result of giving the specific privilege by various methods according to the selected notification mode. Therefore, it is possible to perform suggestive effects rich in variation in line with the player's intentions, and to increase interest in the effects.

Control to a specific game state (for example, BB state in the second game machine) in which information of a stop operation advantageous to the player is reported, which is a game state different from the special game state when a specific condition is established. Possible specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that controls each game state in the second gaming machine) is further provided, and the specific game state is set when the game next to the game in which the specific condition is satisfied is started. Then, the special symbol performance (for example, red 7 matching performance during lock) is executed to stop and display the specific symbol combination on the variable display means, and the special privilege is granted by the privilege granting means. The gaming machine described above is characterized in that the specific condition is satisfied when it is determined.
According to this gaming machine, the specific privilege is a privilege of shifting to a specific game state, and in the specific game state, a specific symbol effect is executed when the game next to the game in which the transition condition is established is started. configured to start after That is, for example, when shifting to a special game state, the start game is started after the special symbol effect is executed, but when the specific privilege is given in the game, the next game is the start of the specific game state. A game is started, and a specific game state is started after a specific symbol effect is executed in the starting game. In this case, the start game of the specific game state is started after the specific effect is executed in accordance with the player's effect operation in the start game of the special game state. It will be executed with high interlocking within. Therefore, even when the special game state and the specific game state are formed in this way, the linkage and consistency of the presentation can be dramatically improved, and the interest in the presentation can be enhanced.

A predetermined game state (for example, an AT state in a second gaming machine) in which information of a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, which is a game state different from the special game state and the specific game state. A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that controls each game state in the second gaming machine) is further provided, and the special game state is a game state that may not transition to the predetermined game state after its completion, The game machine described above is characterized in that the specific game state is a game state that always transitions to the predetermined game state after the end of the specific game state.
According to this gaming machine, the special game state and the specific game state are similar game states in that the information of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is reported. While it is a game state that may not transition to a game state, the specific game state is advantageous to the player in that it is a game state that always transitions to a predetermined game state after the end of the game state. Then, the specific effect suggests transition to the specific game state based on such playability. Therefore, it is possible to heighten interest in performance.

The stop control means, in a game in which a predetermined combination (for example, the pressing order bell in the second gaming machine) is determined as an internal winning combination, when a stop operation in a predetermined manner (for example, correct pressing order) is performed displays a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a bell in the second gaming machine) to which a predetermined amount (for example, 9) of game value is awarded, while when a stop operation different from the predetermined mode is performed The predetermined symbol combination is not displayed, and the special game state is a game state in which the predetermined mode stop operation may not be notified in a game in which the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and the specific game state is a game state. , The game machine is characterized in that the game state is such that the predetermined mode stop operation is always notified in the game in which the predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination.
According to this gaming machine, the special game state and the specific game state are similar game states in that the information of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is reported, but the special game state is the winning of the predetermined combination. While the game state is a game state in which the information of the stop operation which is advantageous in some cases may not be notified, the specific game state is a game state in which the information of the stop operation which is advantageous when a predetermined combination is won is always notified, which is advantageous to the player. It has become. Then, the specific effect suggests transition to the specific game state based on such playability. Therefore, it is possible to heighten interest in performance.

In the special game state, if a prescribed end condition (for example, 21 games have been played) is satisfied without the specific condition being established, the game value amount given during the special game state is reduced to a specific amount ( For example, the game machine described above is characterized in that when the number of cards is 0 or less, the game machine is shifted to the specific game state.
According to this gaming machine, when the game result during the special game state is an undesirable result for the player, it is possible to shift to the specific game state after the end of the special condition even if the special condition is not established. there is Therefore, it is possible not only to increase the interest in the presentation, but also to prevent the decline in the interest in the game.

When the specific condition is satisfied in the special game state, the special game state is terminated even before the specified termination condition is satisfied, and the transition to the specific game state is performed from the next game. It is a game machine.
According to this gaming machine, when the transition to the specific game state is determined during the special game state, it is possible to end the special game state even in the middle. Therefore, it is possible not only to increase the interest in the presentation, but also to prevent the gambling aspect of the game from becoming excessively high.

Reference Signs List 1 Pachi-slot machine 71 Main control board 72 Sub control board 100 Main control circuit 101 Main CPU 200 Sub control circuit 201 Sub CPU

Claims (1)

variable display means capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns in a plurality of columns;
internal winning combination determination means for determining an internal winning combination;
stop control means for stopping the variable display of symbols in accordance with the determined internal winning combination and the player's stop operation;
It has a first information game state and a second information game state in which information of a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and when a predetermined condition is established, control is performed to the first information game state, and the specific condition is established. Information game state control means capable of controlling the second information game state when
production execution means for executing production;
an effect operation means capable of accepting a player's effect operation related to the effect executed by the effect execution means;
The first information game state is started after a special control for displaying a special symbol combination on the variable display means is executed after the start operation of the game following the game in which the predetermined condition is satisfied is performed. and
The production executing means is
In the game in which the special control is executed, after the special symbol combination is displayed on the variable display means, a selection effect for selecting the effect mode during the first information game state from among a plurality of effect modes is performed. is executable and
After executing the selection effect, when one effect mode is selected by the player's effect operation, a result effect indicating the selection result of the effect mode is executed in the game, and the selected game is selected from the game next to the game. A predetermined effect corresponding to the effect mode can be executed during the first information game state,
The first information game state includes a first control state and a second control state that is more advantageous than the first control state,
The information game state control means can determine whether or not to shift to the second control state during the first control state, and when the state shifts to the second control state, the specific condition is established. , a gaming machine capable of being controlled to the second information game state in response to the termination of the second control state.

Images